Fluke Netdaq 2640A Users Manual Ruckus Wireless™ SmartCell Insight™ Release Notes, V. 3.0.0

2645A to the manual b8c68817-6844-43b5-8292-da8e463bb405

2015-02-02

: Fluke Fluke-Netdaq-2640A-Users-Manual-427825 fluke-netdaq-2640a-users-manual-427825 fluke pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 353

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2640A/2645A
NetDAQ


Networked Data Acquisition Unit

Users Manual

PN 942623
May 1994, Rev 2 11/96
© 1994, 1995, 1996 Fluke Corporation, All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.
All product names are trademarks of their respective companies.

LIMITED WARRANTY & LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under
normal use and service. The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of
shipment. Parts, product repairs and services are warranted for 90 days. This warranty
extends only to the original buyer or end-user customer of a Fluke authorized reseller, and
does not apply to fuses, disposable batteries or to any product which, in Fluke’s opinion,
has been misused, altered, neglected or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of
operation or handling. Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance
with its functional specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on nondefective media. Fluke does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without
interruption.
Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to enduser customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on
behalf of Fluke. Warranty support is available if product is purchased through a Fluke
authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international price. Fluke reserves
the right to invoice Buyer for importation costs of repair/replacement parts when product
purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country.
Fluke’s warranty obligation is limited, at Fluke’s option, to refund of the purchase price, free
of charge repair, or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke
authorized service center within the warranty period.
To obtain warranty service, contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center or send
the product, with a description of the difficulty, postage and insurance prepaid (FOB
Destination), to the nearest Fluke authorized service center. Fluke assumes no risk for
damage in transit. Following warranty repair, the product will be returned to Buyer,
transportation prepaid (FOB Destination). If Fluke determines that the failure was caused
by misuse, alteration, accident or abnormal condition of operation or handling, Fluke will
provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work.
Following repair, the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the
Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges (FOB Shipping Point).
THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF
ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, INCLUDING LOSS OF
DATA, WHETHER ARISING FROM BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BASED ON
CONTRACT, TORT, RELIANCE OR ANY OTHER THEORY.
Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty, or
exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, the limitations and
exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer. If any provision of this Warranty is
held invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, such holding will not
affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision.
Fluke Corporation
P.O. Box 9090
Everett WA
98206-9090

5/94

Fluke Europe B.V.
P.O. Box 1186
5602 B.D.
Eindhoven
The Netherlands

PCaution
This is an IEC safety Class 1 product. Before using, the
ground wire in the line cord or rear panel binding post
must be connect to an earth ground for safety.

Interference Information
This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in strict
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, may cause interference to radio and television
reception. It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device
in accordance with the specifications of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide
reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
•
•

This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

There is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the
following measures:
•
•
•
•

Reorient the receiving antenna
Relocate the equipment with respect to the receiver
Move the equipment away from the receiver
Plug the equipment into a different outlet so that the computer and receiver are on different
branch circuits

If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for
additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal
Communications Commission helpful: How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems.
This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. Stock
No. 004-000-00345-4.
Declaration of the Manufacturer or Importer
We hereby certify that the Fluke Model 2640A/2645A Networked Data Acquisition Unit is in
compliance with BMPT Vfg 243/1991 and is RFI suppressed. The normal operation of some
equipment (e.g. signal generators) may be subject to specific restrictions. Please observe the
notices in the users manual. The marketing and sales of the equipment was reported to the Central
Office for Telecommunication Permits (BZT). The right to retest this equipment to verify compliance
with the regulation was given to the BZT.

Bescheinigung des Herstellers/Importeurs
Hiermit wird bescheinigt, daβ Fluke Models 2640A/2645A Networked Data Acquisition Unit in
Übereinstimung mit den Bestimmungen der BMPT-AmtsblVfg 243/1991 funk-entstört ist. Der
vorschriftsmäßige Betrieb mancher Geräte (z.B. Meßsender) kann allerdings gewissen
Einschränkungen unterliegen. Beachten Sie deshalb die Hinweise in der Bedienungsanleitung. Dem
Bundesamt für Zulassungen in der Telekcommunikation wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerätes
angezeigt und die Berechtigung zur Überprüfung der Seire auf Einhaltung der Bestimmungen
eingeräumt.
Fluke Corporation

SAFETY TERMS IN THIS MANUAL
This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC publication
1010-1, Safety Requirements for Electrical Measuring, Control and Laboratory
Equipment. This Users Manual contains information, warnings and cautions. Use
of this equipment in a manner not specified herein may impair the protection
provided by the equipment.
This instrument is designed for IEC 1010-1 Installation Category II use.
WARNING statements identify conditions or practices that could result in personal
injury or loss of life.
CAUTION statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage
to equipment.
SYMBOLS MARKED ON EQUIPMENT:
WARNING Risk of electric shock.
Ground (earth) terminal.
Protective ground (earth) terminal. Must be connected to safety earth
ground when the power cord is used.
Attention. Refer to the manual (see the Index for references). This
symbol indicates that information about usage of a feature is contained
in the manual. This symbol appears on the Universal Input Module and
in the following three places on the instrument rear panel:
1. Ground Binding Post (to the left of the line power connector).
2. Ground Binding Post (to the left of the 10Base2 connector).
3. ALARM/TRIGGER I/O and DIGITAL I/O connectors.
AC POWER SOURCE
The instrument is intended to operate from an ac power source that will not apply
more than 264V ac rms between the supply conductors or between either supply
conductor and ground. A protective ground connection by way of the grounding
conductor in the power cord is required for safe operation.

DC POWER SOURCE
The instrument may also be operated from a 9V to 16V dc power source when
either the rear panel ground binding post or the power cord grounding conductor
is connected properly.
USE THE PROPER FUSE
To avoid fire hazard, for fuse replacement use only a 1/4 ampere, 250V non-time
delay line fuse.
GROUNDING THE INSTRUMENT
The instrument utilizes controlled overvoltage techniques that require the
instrument to be grounded whenever normal mode or common mode ac voltages
or transient voltages may occur. The enclosure must be grounded through the
grounding conductor of the power cord, or if operated on battery with the power
cord unplugged, through the rear panel ground binding post.
USE THE PROPER POWER CORD
Use only the power cord and connector appropriate for the voltage and plug
configuration in your country.
Use only a power cord that is in good condition.
Refer power cord and connector changes to qualified service personnel.
WARNING!
DO NOT OPERATE IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES
To avoid personal injury or death, do not remove the instrument cover without first
removing the power source connected to the rear panel. Do not operate the
instrument without the cover properly installed. Normal calibration is accomplished
with the cover closed. There is no need for the operator to remove the cover
except to replace the fuse. Access procedures and the warnings for such
procedures are contained both in this manual and in the Service Manual. Service
procedures are for qualified service personnel only.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPERATE IF PROTECTION MAY BE IMPAIRED
If the instrument appears damaged or operates abnormally, protection may be
impaired. Do not attempt to operate the instrument under these conditions. Refer
all question of proper instrument operation to qualified service personnel.

Table of Contents

Chapter
1

Title
Overview ...........................................................................................
1-1. Introduction ..........................................................................................
1-2. Instrument Features and Capabilities ...................................................
1-3.
Analog Channels ..............................................................................
1-4
Computed Channels .........................................................................
1-5.
Channel Numbering .........................................................................
1-6.
Mx+B Scaling ..................................................................................
1-7.
Alarms ..............................................................................................
1-8.
Channel Monitoring .........................................................................
1-9.
Digital I/O ........................................................................................
1-10.
Totalizer ...........................................................................................
1-11.
Trigger Input ....................................................................................
1-12.
Trigger Output..................................................................................
1-13.
Master Alarm ...................................................................................
1-14.
Interval Trigger ................................................................................
1-15.
External Trigger ...............................................................................
1-16.
Alarm Trigger...................................................................................
1-17. NetDAQ Logger Features and Capabilities..........................................
1-18. Operating a NetDAQ Data Acquisition System...................................
1-19.
Isolated Networks.............................................................................
1-20.
General Networks.............................................................................
1-21.
Ethernet Port Selection ....................................................................
1-22.
Asynchronous Instrument Operations..............................................
1-23.
Group Instrument Operations...........................................................
1-24.
Scanning and Logging......................................................................
1-25.
RS-232 Interface ..............................................................................
1-26. Host Computer Requirements ..............................................................
1-27. Options and Accessories ......................................................................
1-28.
Instrument Connector Set.................................................................
1-29.
Host Computer Ethernet Adapters ...................................................
i

Page
1-1
1-3
1-4
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-11
1-11
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-14
1-14
1-15
1-15

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Preparing for Operation ..................................................................
2-1. Introduction..........................................................................................
2-2. Instrument Preparation.........................................................................
2-3.
Unpacking and Inspecting the Instrument .......................................
2-4.
Positioning and Rack Mounting ......................................................
2-5.
Connecting to a Power Source and Grounding ...............................
2-6.
AC Power ....................................................................................
2-7.
DC Power ....................................................................................
2-8.
Grounding and Common Mode Voltage .....................................
2-9.
Universal Input Module Connections..............................................
2-10.
Shielded Wiring...........................................................................
2-11.
Crosstalk Considerations.............................................................
2-12.
Digital I/O Connections...................................................................
2-13.
Digital I/O....................................................................................
2-14.
Totalizer ......................................................................................
2-15.
Alarm/Trigger I/O Connections.......................................................
2-16.
Trigger Input................................................................................
2-17.
Trigger Output.............................................................................
2-18.
Master Alarm...............................................................................
2-19.
External Trigger Wiring for a Group Instrument ............................
2-20.
Controls and Indicators....................................................................
2-21.
Front Panel Controls ...................................................................
2-22.
Front Panel Indicators .................................................................
2-23.
Rear Panel Controls.....................................................................
2-24.
Rear Panel Indicators ..................................................................
2-25.
Front Panel Operating Procedures...................................................
2-26.
Power-On Options.......................................................................
2-27.
Displaying a Monitor Channel ....................................................
2-28.
Displaying the Digital I/O Status ................................................
2-29.
Displaying the Totalizer Status ...................................................
2-30.
Reviewing and Setting the Base Channel Number .....................
2-31.
Reviewing and Setting the Line Frequency ................................
2-32.
Reviewing and Setting the Network Type ..................................
2-33.
Reviewing and Setting the General Network Socket Port ..........
2-34.
Reviewing and Setting the General Network IP Address ...........
2-35.
Reviewing and Setting the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway..
2-36.
Viewing the Instrument Ethernet Address ..................................
2-37. Host Computer and Network Preparation............................................
2-38.
Installing Host Computer Ethernet Adapter ....................................
2-39.
Instrument and Host Computer Interconnection..............................
2-40.
Host Computer/Instrument Direct Connection ...........................
2-41.
Interconnection Using 10Base2 (Coaxial) Wiring......................
2-42.
Interconnection Using 10BaseT (Twisted-Pair) Ethernet Wiring
2-43.
Installing Host Computer Networking Software .............................
ii

2-1
2-3
2-3
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
2-17
2-18
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-21
2-22
2-24
2-26
2-27
2-29
2-31
2-36
2-37
2-38
2-41
2-43
2-43
2-45
2-45
2-48
2-48
2-50

Contents (continued)

2-44.
Setting Host Computer Networking Parameters ..............................
2-45.
Installing NetDAQ Logger...............................................................
2-46.
Installing NetDAQ Logger with Trumpet....................................
2-47.
Changing from an Isolated Network to a General Network ........
2-48.
Installing Trend Link for Fluke (Optional) ......................................
2-49. Testing and Troubleshooting................................................................
2-50.
Testing the Installation.....................................................................
2-51.
Troubleshooting Network Problems ................................................

2-51
2-52
2-53
2-54
2-55
2-55
2-55
2-58

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows.....................................
3-1. Introduction ..........................................................................................
3-2.
Starting NetDAQ Logger .................................................................
3-3.
The Main Window ...........................................................................
3-4.
Accessing NetDAQ Logger Commands ..........................................
3-5. Configuring Network Communications ...............................................
3-6.
The Communications Configuration Dialog Box ............................
3-7.
Adding an Instrument to the Network..............................................
3-8.
Deleting an Instrument from the Network .......................................
3-9.
Verifying Network Communications ...............................................
3-10. Configuring the Current Setup .............................................................
3-11.
Creating an Instrument Icon.............................................................
3-12.
Deleting an Instrument Icon.............................................................
3-13.
Designating Instruments as Group or Asynchronous.......................
3-14. Setup Files ............................................................................................
3-15.
Saving the Current Setup in a File ...................................................
3-16.
Opening a Setup File........................................................................
3-17.
Starting NetDAQ Logger with a Setup File.....................................
3-18.
Starting Logging Automatically.......................................................
3-19.
NetDAQ Logger Command Line .....................................................
3-20. Configuring an Instrument....................................................................
3-21.
Dimmed Configuration Commands .................................................
3-22.
The Instrument Configuration Dialog Box ......................................
3-23. Configuring Channels...........................................................................
3-24.
The Channels Configuration Dialog Box.........................................
3-25.
Configuring Analog Channel Functions ..........................................
3-26.
Configuring Computed Channel Functions .....................................
3-27.
Defining a Computed Channel Equation .....................................
3-28.
Equation Syntax...........................................................................
3-29.
Configuring Mx+B Scaling..............................................................
3-30.
Configuring Alarms .........................................................................
3-31.
Assigning Channel Labels................................................................
3-32. Configuring Mx+B Scaling From a File ..............................................
3-33. Entering an Instrument’s Description...................................................
3-34. Copying a Channels Configuration ......................................................

3-1
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-25
3-26

iii

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

3-35.
3-36.
3-37.
3-38.

Default Configuration Settings ............................................................
Using Configuration Lockout ..............................................................
Saving an Instrument’s Configuration as a Text File. .........................
Configuring the netdaq.ini File ............................................................

3-27
3-28
3-28
3-29

Operating NetDAQ Logger for Windows ........................................
4-1. Introduction..........................................................................................
4-2. Starting and Stopping Logging ............................................................
4-3.
Starting or Stopping all Instruments at Once...................................
4-4.
Starting or Stopping a Group Instrument.........................................
4-5.
Clearing an Instrument’s Totalizer Value .......................................
4-6.
Simulated Logging...........................................................................
4-7.
Selecting an Instrument’s Scanning Duration .................................
4-8. Real-Time Displays..............................................................................
4-9.
The Logging Status Window ...........................................................
4-10.
The Readings Table Window ..........................................................
4-11.
The Spy Window .............................................................................
4-12.
Quick Plot ........................................................................................
4-13.
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) Operations...................................
4-14. Data Files .............................................................................................
4-15.
Configuring a Data File4-15............................................................
4-16.
Converting Data Files......................................................................
4-17.
Viewing and Printing a Data File ....................................................
4-18. Optimizing Performance ......................................................................
4-19.
Optimizing Performance for Speed .................................................
4-20.
Increasing Scanning Rate ............................................................
4-21.
Increasing Data Transmission and Storage Rate.........................
4-22.
Increasing Network Speed...........................................................
4-23.
Optimizing Performance for Precision ............................................
4-24. Using Online Help ...............................................................................

4-1
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-18
4-18
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-21

Using Trend Link for Fluke..............................................................
5-1. Introduction..........................................................................................
5-2.
Displaying a Trend Link Chart During Logging .............................
5-3.
Playing Back a Trend Link File in Trend Link ...............................
5-4.
Playing Back a Fast Binary File in Trend Link ...............................
5-5.
Playing Back an ASCII (CSV) File in Trend Link..........................
5-6.
Importing Trend Link Data Files.....................................................
5-7.
Create a New Trend Link Data Set Directory.............................
5-8.
Add the New Folder to the Trend Link infolink.ini File ...
5-9.
Import the NetDAQ ASCII (CSV) File into Trend Link ............
5-10.
Display the Trend Link Chart for the Imported File. ..................
5-11.
Title the Trend Link Chart ..........................................................
5-12.
Save the Trend Link Chart ..........................................................

5-1
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-9

Contents (continued)

5-13.
Exporting Trend Link Data Files .....................................................
5-14.
Deleting Old Trend Link Files .........................................................
5-15. Getting the Right Look for Your Trend Link Chart .............................
5-16.
Using the Trend Link Control Bar ...................................................
5-17.
Using the Trend Link Menus ...........................................................
5-18.
Adjusting the Curve Time Scale (X-axis) ...................................
5-19.
Adjusting the Curve Amplitude Scale (Y-axis)...........................
5-20.
Configuring the Curve Status Display.........................................
5-21.
Curve Preferences........................................................................
5-22.
Background Preferences ..............................................................
5-23.
Real Time Frequency Update ......................................................
5-24.
Adding or Changing the Chart Title ............................................
5-25.
Using the Note System ................................................................
5-26.
Printing a Chart............................................................................

5-9
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-21
5-23
5-23
5-24
5-24

Maintenance .....................................................................................
6-1. Introduction ..........................................................................................
6-2. Self-Test Diagnostics and Error Codes ................................................
6-3. Cleaning................................................................................................
6-4. Fuse Replacement.................................................................................
6-5. Performance Test..................................................................................
6-6.
Configuring the Performance Test Setup.........................................
6-7.
Initializing the Performance Test Setup...........................................
6-8.
Accuracy Performance Tests ...........................................................
6-9.
Volts DC Accuracy Test (2640A) ...............................................
6-10.
Volts DC Accuracy Test (2645A) ...............................................
6-11.
Volts AC Accuracy Test..............................................................
6-12.
Frequency Accuracy Test ............................................................
6-13.
Analog Channel Integrity Test.....................................................
6-14.
Computed Channel Integrity Test................................................
6-15.
Thermocouple Temperature Accuracy Test ................................
6-16.
Open Thermocouple Response Test ............................................
6-17.
2-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test (2640A) .................................
6-18.
2-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test (2645A) .................................
6-19.
4-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test (2640A) .................................
6-20.
4-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test (2645A) .................................
6-21.
RTD Temperature Accuracy Test (Resistance) (2640A) ............
6-22.
RTD Temperature Accuracy Test (Resistance) (2645A) ............
6-23.
RTD Temperature Accuracy Test (DIN/IEC 751 RTD) .............
6-24.
Digital Input/Output Tests ...............................................................
6-25.
Digital I/O Output Test ................................................................
6-26.
Digital Input Test .........................................................................
6-27.
Totalizer Tests..................................................................................
6-28.
Totalizer Count Test ....................................................................

6-1
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-6
6-6
6-9
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-20
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-25
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-28

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

6-29.
6-30.
6-31.
6-32.
6-33.
6-34.
6-35.
6-36.
6-37.
6-38.
6-39.

Totalizer Sensitivity Test ............................................................
Master Alarm Output Test...............................................................
Trigger Input Test ............................................................................
Trigger Output Test .........................................................................
Calibration............................................................................................
Adding Calibration to the Utilities Menu........................................
Instrument Calibration Dialog Box .................................................
Calibration Steps Dialog Box ..........................................................
Variations in the Display .....................................................................
Service..................................................................................................
Replacement Parts................................................................................

Appendices
A Specifications ...........................................................................................
B Noise, Shielding, and Crosstalk Considerations ......................................
C True-RMS Measurements ........................................................................
D RTD Linearization....................................................................................
E Computed Channel Equations ..................................................................
F Data File Format.......................................................................................
G Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) ..............................................................
H Ethernet Cabling.......................................................................................
I Network Considerations...........................................................................
J Error Messages & Exception Conditions .................................................
K Fluke Service Centers...............................................................................
Index

6-28
6-29
6-30
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-33
6-33
6-34
6-34
6-36

A-1
B-1
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
H-1
I-1
J-1
K-1

List of Tables

Table
1-1.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
3-1.
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
A-1.
A-2.
A-3.
A-4.
A-5.
A-6.
A-7.
A-8.
A-9.
A-10.
A-11.
A-12.
A-13.
A-14.
A-15.
A-16.
A-17.
A-18.
A-19.
A-20.

Title
Models, Options and Accessories ...................................................................
Front Panel Key Descriptions .........................................................................
Annunciator Display Descriptions ..................................................................
Instrument Default Parameters........................................................................
Network Error Messages .................................................................................
Ethernet Indicators ..........................................................................................
Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................
NetDAQ Logger Default Instrument Configuration .......................................
Self-Test Error Codes......................................................................................
Recommended Test Equipment.......................................................................
Replacement Parts ...........................................................................................
2640A/2645A General Specifications.............................................................
2640A/2645A Environmental Specifications..................................................
2640A/2645A DIGITAL I/O Specification.....................................................
2640A/2645A Trigger In (TI) Specification ...................................................
2640A/2645A Trigger Out (TO) Specification...............................................
2640A/2645A Master Alarm (MA) Specification ..........................................
2640A/2645A Totalizer Specification ............................................................
2640A/2645A Real-Time Clock and Calendar ...............................................
2640A DC Voltage Measurement General Specifications..............................
2640A DC Voltage Range and Resolution Specifications..............................
2640A DC Voltage Accuracy Specifications..................................................
2640A AC Voltage General Specifications ....................................................
2640A AC Voltage Range and Resolution Specifications..............................
2640A AC Voltage Accuracy Specifications..................................................
2640A 4-Wire Resistance Temperature Coefficient .......................................
2640A 4-Wire Resistance Range and Resolution Specifications ...................
2640A 4-Wire Resistance Accuracy Specifications........................................
2640A 4-Wire RTD Temperature Coefficient ................................................
2640A 4-Wire RTD Specifications .................................................................
2640A Thermocouple General Specifications ................................................
vii

Page
1-14
2-17
2-18
2-21
2-58
2-60
2-61
3-27
6-3
6-7
6-36
A-2
A-4
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-6
A-7
A-7
A-8
A-8
A-9
A-9
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-12
A-12
A-13
A-13
A-14

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

A-21.
A-22.
A-23.
A-24.
A-25.
A-26.
A-27.
A-28.
A-29.
A-30.
A-31.
A-32.
A-33.
A-34.
A-35.
A-36.
A-37.
A-38.
B-1.
B-2.
I-1.
I-2.

2640A Thermocouple Specifications .............................................................
2640A Frequency Accuracy Specifications....................................................
2640A Frequency Sensitivity Specifications..................................................
2645A DC Voltage Measurement General Specifications .............................
2645A DC Voltage Resolution and Repeatability Specifications ..................
2645A DC Voltage Accuracy Specifications .................................................
2645A AC Voltage General Specifications....................................................
2645A AC Voltage Range and Resolution Specifications .............................
2645A AC Voltage Accuracy Specifications .................................................
2645A 4-Wire Resistance Temperature Coefficient.......................................
2645A 4-Wire Resistance Range and Resolution Specifications ...................
2645A 4-Wire Resistance Accuracy Specifications .......................................
2645A 4-Wire RTD Temperature Coefficient................................................
2645A 4-Wire RTD Specifications.................................................................
2645A Thermocouple General Specifications................................................
2645A Thermocouple Specifications .............................................................
2645A Frequency Accuracy Specifications....................................................
2645A Frequency Sensitivity Specifications..................................................
2645A Crosstalk Specifications......................................................................
2640A Crosstalk Specifications......................................................................
Newt Quick Check..........................................................................................
Additions to Host Computer Files made by Newt Installation.......................

viii

A-15
A-16
A-16
A-17
A-18
A-18
A-19
A-20
A-20
A-21
A-21
A-21
A-22
A-22
A-23
A-23
A-25
A-25
B-3
B-4
I-29
I-30

List of Figures

Figure
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
2-12.
2-13.
2-14.
2-15.
2-16.
2-17.
2-18.
2-19.
2-20.
2-21.
2-22.
2-23.
2-24.
2-25.
2-26.
2-27.

Title
2640A/2645A NetDAQ Networked Data Acquisition Units ..........................
2640A/2645A Front Panel ..............................................................................
Typical Front Panel Display During Scanning and Monitoring .....................
2640A/2645A Rear Panel................................................................................
Instrument Preparation ....................................................................................
Connecting the Instrument to a Power Source ................................................
Universal Input Module Connections .............................................................
2-Wire and 4-Wire Connections.....................................................................
DIGITAL I/O Connector .................................................................................
ALARM/TRIGGER I/O Connector ................................................................
External Trigger Wiring for a Group Instrument ............................................
Front Panel Controls........................................................................................
Front Panel Indicators .....................................................................................
Rear Panel Controls.........................................................................................
Rear Panel Indicators ......................................................................................
Displaying a Monitor Channel ........................................................................
Examples During Monitor...............................................................................
Displaying the Digital I/O Status ....................................................................
Examples for Digital I/O and Totalizer Status ................................................
Displaying the Totalizer Status .......................................................................
Reviewing and Setting the Base Channel Number .........................................
Examples for Reviewing and Setting the BCN ...............................................
Reviewing and Setting the Line Frequency ....................................................
Examples for Reviewing and Setting the Line Frequency ..............................
Reviewing and Setting the Isolated Network Type to Isolated .......................
Examples for Reviewing and Setting the Network Type ................................
Reviewing and Setting the Network Type to General.....................................
Examples for Reviewing and Setting General Network Parameters...............
Reviewing and Setting the General Network Socket Port ..............................
Reviewing and Setting the General Network IP Address ...............................
Reviewing and Setting the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway......................
ix

Page
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
2-4
2-6
2-9
2-10
2-12
2-14
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-20
2-20
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-30
2-31
2-32
2-33
2-34
2-36
2-37
2-40

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

2-28.
2-29.
2-30.
2-31.
2-32.
2-33.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
C-1.
D-1.
D-2.
D-3.
D-4.
H-1.

Viewing the Instrument Ethernet Address......................................................
Examples for Viewing the Ethernet Address..................................................
Preparing for Network Operation ...................................................................
Interconnection Using 10Base2 (Coaxial) Wiring..........................................
Host Computer/Instrument Direct Connection ...............................................
Interconnection Using 10BaseT (Twisted-Pair) Wiring.................................
NetDAQ Logger for Windows Main Window ...............................................
Communications Configuration Dialog Box ..................................................
Instrument Configuration Dialog Box ............................................................
Channels Configuration Dialog Box...............................................................
Configuration Text File ..................................................................................
Replacing the Fuse..........................................................................................
Performance Test Setup ..................................................................................
2-Wire Connections to 5700A ........................................................................
4-Wire Connections to the Universal Input Module (Resistor)......................
4-Wire Connections to the Universal Input Module (5700A) ........................
Comparison of Common Waveforms .............................................................
385 RTD .........................................................................................................
375 RTD .........................................................................................................
391 RTD .........................................................................................................
392 RTD .........................................................................................................
10BaseT Ethernet Cables................................................................................

2-41
2-42
2-44
2-46
2-47
2-49
3-4
3-5
3-16
3-18
3-29
6-5
6-8
6-8
6-20
6-21
C-3
D-2
D-3
D-4
D-6
H-2

Chapter 1

Overview

Contents
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.
1-9.
1-10.
1-11.
1-12.
1-13.
1-14.
1-15.
1-16.
1-17.
1-18.
1-19.
1-20.
1-21.
1-22.
1-23.
1-24.
1-25.
1-26.
1-27.
1-28.
1-29.

Introduction ..........................................................................................
Instrument Features and Capabilities ...................................................
Analog Channels ..............................................................................
Computed Channels .........................................................................
Channel Numbering .........................................................................
Mx+B Scaling ..................................................................................
Alarms ..............................................................................................
Channel Monitoring .........................................................................
Digital I/O ........................................................................................
Totalizer. ..........................................................................................
Trigger Input ....................................................................................
Trigger Output..................................................................................
Master Alarm ...................................................................................
Interval Trigger ................................................................................
External Trigger ...............................................................................
Alarm Trigger ..................................................................................
NetDAQ Logger Features and Capabilities..........................................
Operating a NetDAQ Data Acquisition System...................................
Isolated Networks ............................................................................
General Networks ............................................................................
Ethernet Port Selection ....................................................................
Asynchronous Instrument Operations..............................................
Group Instrument Operations...........................................................
Scanning and Logging......................................................................
RS-232 Interface ..............................................................................
Host Computer Requirements ..............................................................
Options and Accessories ......................................................................
Instrument Connector Set.................................................................
Host Computer Ethernet Adapters ...................................................

Page
1-3
1-4
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-11
1-11
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-14
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

1-2

Overview
Introduction

Introduction

1-1.

The 2640A and 2645A NetDAQ Networked Data Acquisition Units are
20-channel front ends that operate in conjunction with NetDAQ Logger for
Windows (hereafter known as NetDAQ Logger) to form a data acquisition
system.
The instruments measure dc volts, ac volts, Ohms, temperature, frequency, and dc
current. Temperature measurements use thermocouples or resistance-temperature
detectors (RTDs). To measure other parameters, use an appropriate transducer.
The instrument also includes ten computed channels for custom calculations
based on measured values.
The NetDAQ instruments scan the 20 analog channels in sequence and calculate
the values for the ten computed channels. Interval timers, alarm conditions, and/or
an external signal input can trigger scans. The NetDAQ Logger software
configures and controls up to 20 instruments via an Ethernet connection. The
software provides the means to view scan data and log it into files.
The 2640A and 2645A instruments (Figure 1-1) are identical in operation and
appearance, and vary only in emphasis. The 2640A emphasizes precision and
supports up to 100 measurements per second, with 5 ½ digits of resolution, .02%
accuracy, and 150-volt common mode voltage (300 volts on channels 1 and 11).
The 2645A emphasizes increased measurement speed supporting up to 1000
measurements per second, with 4 ½ digits of resolution, 0.04% accuracy, and 50volt common mode voltage. See Appendix A for instrument specifications.

NetDAQ

NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

REM SCAN
MON
V

CAL
ENABLE

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Figure 1-1. 2640A/2645A NetDAQ Networked Data Acquisition Units

1-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Instrument Features and Capabilities

1-2.

The following describes the front and rear panels of the instrument and its
capabilities (Figures 1-2 to 1-4).

Primary, Secondary, and
Annunciator Displays.
Indicators and annunciators for
operating mode, configuration,
display, and data measurements.

NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

REVIEW
LAST

MAX
MIN

REM SCAN
AUTO MON

SET FUNC
Mx+B ALARM
°C °F RO
mV AC DC
x1Mk Ω Hz

F
LIMIT HI OFF PRN CH
1 2 LO CAL EXT TR

CAL
ENABLE

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Function Keys.
User keys for configuring
operating parameters such as
Base Channel Number, and front
panel displays such as channel
monitoring, digital I/O status, and
totalizer count.

REVIEW
LAST

MAX
MIN

REM SCAN
AUTO MON

SET FUNC
Mx+B ALARM
°C °F RO
mV AC DC
x1Mk Ω Hz

F
LIMIT HI OFF PRN CH
1 2 LO CAL EXT TR

Display Detail

Figure 1-2. 2640A/2645A Front Panel

1-4

Overview
Instrument Features and Capabilities
REM (Remote)
Annunciator.
Indicates the Host
Computer and the
Instrument are
communicating on the
network, i.e., the
instrument is being
operated remotely.

SCAN (Scanning)
Annunciator.
Indicates the
instrument is
scanning.

MON (Monitor)
Annunciator.
Indicates the
instrument is
monitoring a channel
(in this example,
analog channel 8).
You can monitor a
channel with or
without instrument
scanning.

1208 (Global Channel
Number).
Indicates the channel
being monitored is
1208. This number
consists of the
instrument Base
Channel Number (12)
and the selected
channel (08).

REM SCAN
MON
mV

m Annunciator.
Indicates the multiplier
for the reading is .001
(milli). The other
multipliers are k (kilo,
1000), and M (mega,
1,000,000).
14.721 (Reading).
Indicates the reading
of the channel being
monitored has a value
of 14.721. This
display is limited to 4
1/2 digits of resolution.

V DC (Volts DC)
Annunciator.
Indicates that the
number shown in the
primary display
(14.721) is the
function volts dc.
CH (Channel)
Annunciator.
Indicates the number
shown in the
secondary display
(1208) is the Global
Channel Number.

Figure 1-3. Typical Front Panel Display During Scanning and Monitoring

1-5

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Ground Terminal.
Connects mainframe to ground.

Ethernet 10BaseT
Connector.
A RJ-45 connector that
interfaces the instrument with
a 10BaseT Twisted-Pair
Ethernet network. The
instrument automatically
selects the active 10Base2 or
10BaseT connector.

Universal Input Module.
Directly wires 20 analog inputs
(Channels 1 to 20) without need
for external signal conditioning.

Power Switch.
Applies power to the
instrument (ac or dc
operation).
AC Power Connector.
Connects to any line
source of 107 to 264 volts
ac (50/60 Hz).

Serial Port.

OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY II PER IEC 1010-1

107-264V

MODEL: 2640A / 41A

2645A / 46A

50/60 Hz
15VA

WARNING: TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DISCONNECT LINE CORD BEFORE REMOVING COVER

ON / OFF
DIGITAL I/O

ALARM/TRIGGER I/O

SERIAL PORT
XMT RCV

MA TO TI

9-16V
DC PWR

ALARM/TRIGGER I/O
Connector.
MA (Master Alarm)
output is logic low when
any channel is in alarm;
TO (Trigger Output)
output is logic low for
nominal 125 µs at the
start of any scan; TI
(Trigger Input) input
logic low triggers
scanning; DC PWR (dc
volts input) input is 9 to
16V dc to power the
instrument.

3 4 5

7
ETHERNET

+30V

NOT FOR CONNECTION TO
PUBLIC TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

MEETS VFG 243 / 1991

DIGITAL I/O
Connector.
Alarm outputs (logic
low for a channel in
alarm) and general
purpose I/O (terminals
0 to 7); totalizer input,
and GND.

Ground Terminal.
Use for 50-ohm
termination ground
lug.
Ethernet 10Base2
Connector.
A BNC-type connector that
interfaces the instrument
with a 10Base2 coax
network. The instrument
automatically selects the
active 10Base2 or 10BaseT
connector.

Figure 1-4. 2640A/2645A Rear Panel

1-6

Ethernet Indicators.
XMT (transmit) blinks
red for instrument
Ethernet transmissions;
RCV (receive) blinks
red for any Ethernet
activity on the network;
LK (link) lights amber
when the Ethernet
interface is active for
the Twisted-Pair
connection, and blinks
for a data collision for
the coaxial connection.

Overview
Instrument Features and Capabilities

Analog Channels

1-3.

The analog channel (1 to 20) measurement connections are made via the
Universal Input Module. External signal conditioning for the analog inputs is not
necessary. The host computer configures all analog channels using NetDAQ
Logger.

Computed Channels

1-4.

In addition to the 20 analog channels, the instrument provides an additional 10
computed channels (21 to 30) by processing analog channels and other computed
channels. The following methods are used:
•

The average of a group of channels,

•

The difference between any two channels,

•

The difference between a channel and the average of a group of channels,

•

A mathematical equation.

Channel Numbering

1-5.

Each instrument channel, measured or computed, is identified by Global Channel
Number (GCN). The first two digits of the GCN are the Base Channel Number
(01 to 99) that identifies the instrument. The last two digits are the channel
number. For example, GCN 2618 indicates instrument 26 and analog channel 18
(below). When the instrument is in the quiescent state, the channel number of the
GCN shows dashes, for example, 45-- for instrument 45.

SCAN
MON

Mx+B ALARM
CH

Mx+B Scaling

1-6.

Mx+B scaling multiplies a measurement by a multiplier M and then offsets it by
an offset B. For example, Mx+B scaling of 100x+50 applied to a measured or
computed channel value of 1.15 results in a reading of 100(1.15)+50=165. A
common use of Mx+B scaling is to calibrate a sensor or transducer to provide for
display and recording in engineering units. The Mx+B annunciator lights when a
monitored channel has scaling applied.

1-7

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Alarms

1-7.

Two alarms, Alarm 1 and Alarm 2, can be applied to any configured channel. An
alarm condition occurs when a measurement falls below a low alarm value or
rises above a high alarm value. You can use alarms to trigger scanning (see
“Alarm Triggering”) and to set a Digital I/O line to a logic low (see “Digital I/O”
below). NetDAQ Logger displays and records alarm conditions.
If you apply Mx+B scaling as part of the channel configuration, the instrument
bases the alarms on the scaled values. When any configured channel is in alarm,
the ALARM annunciator is on dim, or bright if a channel in alarm is being used as
an Alarm Trigger. When a channel is in alarm, the rear-panel Master Alarm
output is asserted (logic low). NetDAQ Logger displays and records alarm
conditions.

Channel Monitoring

1-8.

Channel monitoring takes place at the front panel of the instrument. Use the front
panel MON key and arrow keys to select a channel for monitoring. NetDAQ
Logger also allows the selection of a channel to monitor during scanning. For an
example of a front panel display of the instrument during monitoring, see Figure
1-3. The channel monitoring display updates once per second (nominal).

Digital I/O

1-9.

Eight general-purpose open-collector Transistor-Transistor Logic (TTL) digital
input/output (I/O) lines are available at the instrument rear-panel DIGITAL I/O
connector, terminals 7 through 0 (Figure 1-4). A logic low externally applied to an
I/O line is an input; a logic low internally set by the instrument is an output. An
output logic low condition takes precedence over an input logic high condition.
When the I/O lines are used as inputs, they signal an external condition that can
be correlated to the data measurements.
NetDAQ Logger displays and records the status of the Digital I/O as the decimal
equivalent of the eight binary bits. For example, 11111111 (DIO7 to DIO0) is
represented by decimal 255; 00001111 is represented by decimal 15.
The instrument can display the Digital I/O status in binary format at the front
panel with updates each second.

Totalizer

1-10.

The totalizer input counts contact closures or voltage transitions with a maximum
count of 4,294,967,295. The connections for the totalizer input line are at the
instrument rear panel DIGITAL I/O connector, terminals Σ and GND (Figure 14). The instrument continuously detects the totalizer input on the rear panel
independently from instrument scanning and other activities. If the Totalizer
1-8

Overview
Instrument Features and Capabilities

overflows (reaching the maximum count), the display briefly shows OL
(overload) and begins counting from zero again
A totalizer input from contact closures increments on the “open” portion of the
switch sequence close-open. To prevent switch contact “bounce” from triggering
false readings, select the Totalizer Debounce feature. A totalizer input from
voltage transitions increments during low-to-high voltage transitions with a
nominal threshold of +1.4 volts. The maximum voltage input is +30V dc, and the
minimum voltage input is -4.0V dc. The maximum totalizer rate is 5,000
transitions per second without debounce and 500 transitions per second with
debounce.
The instrument reports Totalizer status with scan data and can display it at the
front panel. You can clear the Totalizer count by cycling power to the instrument
or via NetDAQ Logger.

Trigger Input

1-11.

Trigger Input is an instrument connection used to trigger scans from an external
source. The connection uses the ALARM/TRIGGER I/O terminals TI and GND
(Figure 1-4). A contact closure or logic low between TI and GND triggers an
instrument scan if External Trigger is enabled. While the trigger input line is held
low, the instrument continues to scan at Interval 2.
When there is no trigger input, an internal pull-up resistor holds the input at logic
high (nominal +5.0V dc).

Trigger Output

1-12.

Trigger Output is an output line that, when enabled, goes to logic low for 125 µs
every time a scan begins. The connection uses the ALARM/TRIGGER I/O
terminals TO and GND (Figure 1-4). Use the Trigger Output to trigger other
instruments by their Trigger Input connection and to interface with external
equipment. An internal pull-up resistor holds the trigger output line at a logic high
(nominal +5.0V dc) when there is no trigger output.

1-9

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Master Alarm

1-13.

Master Alarm is an instrument output line that is logic low (nominal +0.8V dc)
for as long as any channel is in alarm while scanning is active. The connection
uses the ALARM/TRIGGER I/O terminals MA and GND (Figure 1-4). This TTL
output interfaces with external equipment such as warning lights, alarms,
automatic shutdowns, and paging systems. When the alarm condition ends or
scanning stops, an internal pull-up resistor sets the output at logic high (nominal
+5.0V dc).

Interval Trigger

1-14.

Interval Trigger triggers scanning at regular time intervals using Interval 1.
Interval 1 is in seconds, with a minimum of 0.000 (continuous scanning) and a
maximum of 86400.000 (one scan every 24 hours). The time resolution is to the
millisecond, for example, 12.345 seconds.

External Trigger

1-15.

External Trigger triggers scanning when an external logic low is applied to the
instrument TI (Trigger In) line. As long as the Trigger Input remains low, scans
are triggered at regular time intervals using Interval 2. Interval 2 is in seconds,
with a minimum of 0.000 (continuous scanning) and a maximum of 86400.000
(one scan every 24 hours). The time resolution is to the millisecond, for example,
12.345 seconds. When scanning starts, if the External Trigger is logic low,
scanning begins at the Interval 2 rate. If the External Trigger is logic high, no
scans are triggered until the trigger line is set to logic low.
You can combine External Trigger with Alarm Trigger and Interval Trigger. For
example, if the Interval Trigger is set for 60 seconds (Interval 1) and the External
Trigger is set for 10 seconds (Interval 2), scanning is at 60-second intervals except
when External Trigger is low, when scanning is at 10-second intervals.
If one or more external trigger events occur while a scan is in progress, one scan
triggers following the scan in progress.

Alarm Trigger

1-16.

Alarm Trigger triggers scanning when a channel designated as an alarm trigger
goes into alarm. As long as any such channel is in alarm, scans are triggered at
regular time intervals using Interval 2. Interval 2 is in seconds, with a minimum of
0.000 (continuous scanning) and a maximum of 86400.000 (one scan every 24
hours). The time resolution is to the millisecond, for example, 12.345 seconds.
The instrument performs background monitoring of channels designated as alarm
triggers to check for alarm conditions using Interval 3. (See “Configuring the
netdaq.ini File” in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
1-10

Overview
NetDAQ Logger Features and Capabilities

You can combine Alarm Trigger with External Trigger and Interval Trigger. For
example, set the Interval Trigger for 60 seconds (Interval 1) and the Alarm
Trigger for 10 seconds (Interval 2). Scanning is at 60-second intervals except
when a channel designated as an alarm trigger is in alarm, when scanning is at 10second intervals.

NetDAQ Logger Features and Capabilities

1-17.

NetDAQ Logger is the operating software for NetDAQ instruments. It lets you
configure and operate your system through a Windows-based environment. The
package installs either a 32-bit version for Windows 95 and Windows NT, or a
16-bit version for Windows 3.1. Chapters 3 and 4 of this manual provide an
overview of operating NetDAQ Logger. Online help provides more details.
Some major features of NetDAQ Logger include:
•

Multiple Instruments. NetDAQ Logger lets you configure and control up to
20 instruments either as Asynchronous instruments or a Group Instrument.

•

Data File Recording. NetDAQ Logger logs scan data into a choice of several
file types for each instrument or instrument group.

•

Online Help. Online help describes the controls and operations.

•

Real-time Data Display. The Readings Table displays the latest scan data
from the currently selected instrument. Quick Plot graphs scan data from any
eight channels. The Spy utility gets current readings from any eight channels
whether or not scanning is active.

•

Real-Time Trend Plotting. Trend Link for Fluke (optional) lets you view realtime or historical trends in your collected data. It compares data from multiple
sources, performs simple Statistical Process Control (SPC) calculations on
selected data portions, annotates data, highlights curve limits, zooms in on
data of interest, compares batches, and exports to spreadsheets or other
applications.

•

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). You can link data to other Windows-based
applications, such as spreadsheets, with Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE).

Operating a NetDAQ Data Acquisition System

1-18.

You can configure NetDAQ hardware and software to operate over either an
isolated or general network. An isolated network includes NetDAQ instruments
and host computers only. A general network may also include servers, routers,
gateways, or other network devices. Both types of networks interconnect using
Ethernet (i.e., using the IEEE 802.3 or ISO 8802-3 standards).
A unique 2-digit Base Channel Number (BCN) entered at the instrument front
panel identifies each NetDAQ instrument on the network. All subsequent
1-11

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

operations refer to the instrument by BCN. NetDAQ Logger supports up to 20
instruments for operation. You cannot operate an instrument from more than one
host computer at a time.

Isolated Networks

1-19.

An isolated network consists of only NetDAQ instruments and host computers.
The advantages include simplified setup, faster network operation, and freedom
from general network problems. Data throughput specifications are guaranteed
only for isolated networks. When you install NetDAQ Logger for an isolated
network, it automatically handles instrument IP addressing. You must configure
your host computer networking software to use a host computer IP address of
198.178.246.1xx and subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. See “Setting Host Computer
Network Parameters” in Chapter 2 of this manual.

General Networks

1-20.

A general network consists of host computers, NetDAQ instruments, and servers,
routers, gateways, or other network devices. Refer connectivity issues to your
network administrator and review Appendix I “Network Considerations” for more
information. When you install the NetDAQ software for a general network, you
must enter the instrument IP addresses manually.

Ethernet Port Selection

1-21.

Each instrument has two network ports: 10Base2 coaxial and 10BaseT twisted
pair Ethernet. The instrument automatically monitors and selects the active
Ethernet port. You may change ports at any time and the instrument will detect
the change and automatically connect to the active port.

Asynchronous Instrument Operations

1-22.

Using NetDAQ Logger, you denote instruments as asynchronous or grouped. An
asynchronous (independent) instrument controls its own scanning operations,
including scan interval and method of triggering scans. NetDAQ Logger records
measurement data from each asynchronous instrument in an individual data file.

Group Instrument Operations

1-23.

Using NetDAQ Logger, you can group multiple instruments to act as one
instrument. NetDAQ Logger records data from all instruments in the group into a
single data file. You can group up to 20 instruments for up to 400 time-correlated
channels.

1-12

Overview
Host Computer Requirements

Designate one instrument in the group as the Master and the others as Slaves. The
Master controls scanning operations, including the scan intervals and method of
scan triggering. You can create only one group instrument.

Scanning and Logging

1-24.

When a scan is triggered, the instrument scans the 20 analog channels and
calculates the 10 computed channels. It stores the resulting time-stamped data in a
scan record. Scans can be triggered from several sources:
•

Interval Trigger, where an elapsed interval timer triggers a scan.

•

External Trigger, where an external input (ground or logic low) applied to the
instrument TI (Trigger In) line triggers a scan.

•

Alarm Trigger, where a channel going into alarm status a scan.

NetDAQ Logger obtains scan records from the instruments and logs the data into
files. Each scan record written in the data file consists of a timestamp, values from
all configured analog channels and computed channels, the alarm states, the
digital I/O line status, and the count of the totalizer.

RS-232 Interface

1-25.

The instruments include an RS-232 port for calibration and factory procedures;
the RS-232 port is not used for instrument control or scan data collection. The
NetDAQ Service Manual (PN 942615) describes calibration and factory
procedures that use the RS-232 port. See also “Calibration” in Chapter 6 of this
manual.

1-13

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Host Computer Requirements

1-26.

The host computer used for instrument operations must meet the following
minimum requirements:
•

IBM PC with an Intel 386 microprocessor or greater, running Windows 95,
Windows NT, or Windows 3.1.

•

Color VGA Monitor.

•

A Hard disk drive with 2 MB of free disk space.

•

A 1.44 Mbyte (3 1/2-inch) floppy disk drive.

Options and Accessories

1-27.

Table 1-1 summarizes the available Models, Options and Accessories, including
measurement transducers, software, connector sets, Ethernet adapters, cables, and
components.
Table 1-1. Models, Options and Accessories
Model

1-14

Description

2640A

NetDAQ Networked Data Acquisition Unit

2645A

NetDAQ Networked Data Acquisition Unit

2640A-911

NetDAQ Logger for Windows

2640A-912

NetDAQ Logger with Trending

264XA-903

NetDAQ Developer’s Toolbox

2600A-904

Trend Link for Fluke

264XA-801

Ethernet Card (10Base2, 10BaseT)

264XA-802

Parallel-to-LAN Adapter (10Base2)

264XA-803

PCMCIA Adapter (10Base2, 10BaseT)

2640A-913

Newt Networking Software

2620A-100

Input Module Option

2620A-101

4-20 mA Current Shunt Strip

942615

NetDAQ Service Manual

Y2641

19” Rackmount Kit Single/Dual

Y2642

Wall/Cabinet Mounting Plate

Y2643

4-meter Cable Kit

Y2644

NEMA 4X (IP65) Enclosure

Overview
Options and Accessories

Instrument Connector Set

1-28.

The 2620A-100 is a complete set of input connectors: one Universal Input
Module, one ALARM/TRIGGER I/O connector, and one DIGITAL I/O
connector. A 2620A-100 Instrument Connector Set comes with each instrument.
You can wire additional connector sets to allow quick interfacing to multiple
wiring setups.

Host Computer Ethernet Adapters

1-29.

The 264XA-801, 264XA-802, and 264XA-803 are the recommended Ethernet
adapters. The 264XA-801 is a plug-in card, the 264XA-802 is an external parallelto-LAN adapter, and the 264XA-803 is a PCMCIA card.

1-15

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

1-16

Chapter 2

Preparing for Operation

Contents

Page

2-1. Introduction .......................................................................................... 2-3
2-2. Instrument Preparation ......................................................................... 2-3
2-3.
Unpacking and Inspecting the Instrument........................................ 2-5
2-4.
Positioning and Rack Mounting....................................................... 2-5
2-5.
Connecting to a Power Source and Grounding................................ 2-5
2-6.
AC Power..................................................................................... 2-6
2-7.
DC Power..................................................................................... 2-7
2-8.
Grounding and Common Mode Voltage...................................... 2-7
2-9.
Universal Input Module Connections .............................................. 2-7
2-10.
Shielded Wiring. .......................................................................... 2-11
2-11.
Crosstalk Considerations ............................................................. 2-11
2-12.
Digital I/O Connections ................................................................... 2-11
2-13.
Digital I/O .................................................................................... 2-12
2-14.
Totalizer....................................................................................... 2-12
2-15.
Alarm/Trigger I/O Connections ....................................................... 2-12
2-16.
Trigger Input ................................................................................ 2-13
2-17.
Trigger Output ............................................................................. 2-14
2-18.
Master Alarm ............................................................................... 2-14
2-19.
External Trigger Wiring for a Group Instrument............................. 2-15
2-20.
Controls and Indicators .................................................................... 2-15
2-21.
Front Panel Controls. ................................................................... 2-17
2-22.
Front Panel Indicators.................................................................. 2-18
2-23.
Rear Panel Controls ..................................................................... 2-20
2-24.
Rear Panel Indicators................................................................... 2-20
2-25.
Front Panel Operating Procedures ................................................... 2-21
2-26.
Power-On Options ....................................................................... 2-21
2-27.
Displaying a Monitor Channel..................................................... 2-22
2-28.
Displaying the Digital I/O Status................................................. 2-24
2-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

2-29.
Displaying the Totalizer Status ................................................... 2-26
2-30.
Reviewing and Setting the Base Channel Number ..................... 2-27
2-31.
Reviewing and Setting the Line Frequency ................................ 2-29
2-32.
Reviewing and Setting the Network Type .................................. 2-31
2-33.
Reviewing and Setting the General Network Socket Port .......... 2-36
2-34.
Reviewing and Setting the General Network IP Address ........... 2-37
2-35.
Reviewing and Setting the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway.. 2-38
2-36.
Viewing the Instrument Ethernet Address .................................. 2-41
2-37. Host Computer and Network Preparation............................................ 2-43
2-38.
Installing Host Computer Ethernet Adapter .................................... 2-43
2-39.
Instrument and Host Computer Interconnection.............................. 2-45
2-40.
Host Computer/Instrument Direct Connection ........................... 2-45
2-41.
Interconnection Using 10Base2 (Coaxial) Wiring...................... 2-48
2-42.
Interconnection Using 10BaseT (Twisted-Pair) Ethernet Wiring 2-48
2-43.
Installing Host Computer Networking Software ............................. 2-50
2-44.
Setting Host Computer Networking Parameters.............................. 2-51
2.45.
Installing NetDAQ Logger .............................................................. 2-52
2-46.
Installing NetDAQ Logger with Trumpet ................................... 2-53
2-47.
Changing from an Isolated Network to a General Network........ 2-54
2-48.
Installing Trend Link for Fluke (Optional)...................................... 2-55
2-49. Testing and Troubleshooting ............................................................... 2-55
2-50.
Testing the Installation .................................................................... 2-55
2-51.
Troubleshooting Network Problems................................................ 2-58

2-2

Preparing for Operation
Introduction

Introduction

2-1.

This chapter describes how to prepare the instruments, host computers and
network for operation, and how to test and troubleshoot system operation.
Setting up your system requires the following steps (described in detail later in
this chapter), performed in the order shown:
•

Instrument Preparation Unpacking and setting up the NetDAQ instrument.
This section of the manual describes all the connections, controls, and
indicators on the instrument.

•

Host Computer Ethernet Adapter Installation Installing an Ethernet
adapter such as the 264XA-801, 264XA-802, or 264XA-803 if your host
computer does not already have one.

•

Instrument and Host Computer Interconnection Connecting the host
computer(s) and instruments.

•

Host Computer Software Installation Installing NetDAQ Logger for
Windows and networking software.

•

Trend Link Installation (Optional) Installing Trend Link software on your
host computer.

•

Testing and Troubleshooting Testing and verifying network operation, and
troubleshooting any difficulties.

Instrument Preparation

2-2.

This section contains information for preparing the instruments for operation
summarized in Figure 2-1.

2-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

NetDAQ

NETWORKED DATA AQUISITION UNIT

NetDAQ
DIO

COMM

MON

NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

ENTER

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Unpacking and
Inspection

Positioning and
Rack Mounting

Universal Input
Module Connection

Connecting to
a Power Source

6
5

I/O
Input/Output (I/O)
Connections

External Trigger
(Group Instrument)

REVIEW
LAST

MAX
MIN

REM SCAN
AUTO MON

SET FUNC
Mx+B ALARM
°C °F RO
mV AC DC
x1Mk Ω Hz

NetDAQ

F
LIMIT HI OFF PRN CH
1 2 LO CAL EXT TR

NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Control and Indicators

Front Panel
Procedures

Figure 2-1. Instrument Preparation

2-4

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

Unpacking and Inspecting the Instrument

2-3.

Verify the contents of the shipping package against the checklist in the package. If
any items are missing or damaged, report the problem immediately to your Fluke
representative.
Carefully remove the instrument from its shipping container, saving the packaging
materials if possible. Inspect the rear rubber feet of the instrument. If they are
flush with the bottom of the case, then rotate them 180 degrees so that their
support pads extend slightly below the bottom of the case.

Positioning and Rack Mounting

2-4.

Position the instrument in any location that meets the environmental
specifications. (Refer to Appendix A.) The Y2641 Rack Mounting Kit includes
hardware and instructions to mount one or two instruments (see "Options and
Accessories" in Chapter 1).

Connecting to a Power Source and Grounding

2-5.

You can connect the instrument to an ac power source between 107 to 264V ac
(45 to 65 Hz), to a dc power source between 9 and 16V dc, or to both. Fluke
guarantees equipment specifications only for 50 Hz and 60 Hz operation. Refer to
Figure 2-2 and the descriptions below for making power connections. If you
connect both ac power and dc power to the instrument, the instrument uses ac
power when it exceeds approximately 8 times the value of the dc voltage.
Automatic switchover occurs between ac and dc power without interrupting
instrument operation.
If you connect both ac and dc power to the instrument, the ac and dc ground
connections must be to the same earth ground terminal.

2-5

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Line Cord (AC Operation)

OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY II PER IEC 1010-1

107-264V

MODEL: 2640A / 41A

2645A / 46A

50/60 Hz
15VA

WARNING: TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DISCONNECT LINE CORD BEFORE REMOVING COVER

ON / OFF
ALARM/TRIGGER I/O

DIGITAL I/O

SERIAL PORT
XMT RCV

MA TO TI

9-16V
DC PWR

3 4 5

7
ETHERNET

+30V

NOT FOR CONNECTION TO
PUBLIC TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

MEETS VFG 243 / 1991

+–

Ground for 50-ohm
Termination Ground Lug.

External Battery (DC Operation)

WARNING:
IF VOLTAGES GREATER THAN 50V (2640A ONLY) ARE TO BE MEASURED, A
SEPARATE EARTH GROUND MUST BE ATTACHED TO THIS REAR PANEL
GROUND CONNECTOR WHEN THE INSTRUMENT IS OPERATED FROM BATTERY
POWER.

Figure 2-2. Connecting the Instrument to a Power Source

PWarning
To avoid shock hazard when powering the instrument
with ac power, connect the power cord to a receptacle
with an earth ground.
AC Power

2-6.

Plug the line cord into the connector on the rear of the instrument as shown in
Figure 2-2. The instrument operates on any line voltage between 107 and 264V ac
(45 to 65 Hz) without adjustment. Fluke warrants the instrument to meet
specifications only at 50 Hz and 60 Hz operation. Power consumption is a
nominal 15 watts. Be sure the line cord ground terminal connects to an earth
ground.

PWarning
To avoid shock hazard when powering the instrument
with dc power, connect the instrument ground terminal to
an earth ground.
2-6

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

DC Power

2-7.

The instrument operates from any dc voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Power
consumption is a nominal 6 watts. To connect the ALARM/TRIGGER I/O
connector to the rear panel, complete the following procedure:
1. Remove the ALARM/TRIGGER I/O connector from the packing material or
instrument rear panel.
2. Loosen the wire clamp screw for the associated terminal.
3. Feed the wire into the gap between the connector body and the wire clamp.
4. Tighten the wire clamp; do not overtighten and crush the wire.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each wire.
6. Insert the connector in the rear panel.

Grounding and Common Mode Voltage

2-8.

Connect the instrument chassis to a good earth ground (Figure 2-2) to prevent a
common mode voltage from gradually raising the chassis to a high potential. For
example, if you measure the voltage across a resistor in a 50V dc circuit, the
instrument reads the resistor voltage and ignores the 50V dc common mode
voltage. Since the impedance between the channel’s inputs and chassis ground is
not infinite, a common mode voltage gradually leaks to the chassis ground. A
good earth ground prevents the chassis from rising to the common-mode voltage
(50V dc in this case).

Universal Input Module Connections

2-9.

Connections to the Universal Input Module (Figure 2-3) use the H (high) and L
(low) pairs of terminals for each of the 20 analog input channels. Complete the
following procedure to make connections.

PWarning
To avoid electric shock, remove all inputs from live
voltages before opening this module. Input wiring may be
connected to live voltages.
1. Remove the module from the rear panel by pressing the release tab on the
bottom of the module and pulling the module free of the connector.
2. Loosen the two large screws on top and open the module.
3. Connect the wires to H (high/positive) and L (low/negative) for each channel.
4. Thread these wires through the strain-relief pins and out the back of the
module.
2-7

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

5. Close the module cover, secure the screws, and insert the module in the
connector at the rear of the instrument until it latches in place.
Resistance and RTD measurements use two terminals (one channel) or four
terminals (two channels). The 4-wire connection provides increased accuracy over
the 2-wire connection. Refer to Figure 2-5 for examples of 2-wire and 4-wire
connections. (The 2645A does not allow two-wire RTD measurements.)

2-8

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

H
L
H
L
H

H
L

H
H

L
H

H
L
H
L
H
L

STRAIN RELIEF
11

H L

H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L

H L

H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L

Figure 2-3. Universal Input Module Connections

2-9

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

2-WIRE (2W) CONNECTION

SOURCE

HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL

(4-WIRE)

SENSE
(4-WIRE)

Use H and L terminals for any channel.
• Channels 1 through 20 on rear panel input module (Channel 8 shown here).

4-WIRE (4W) CONNECTION

SOURCE

HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL

(4-WIRE)

SENSE
(4-WIRE)

10
Resistance
or
RTD Source

Use H and L terminals for two channels on rear panel input module. Connections for Channel 8 are
shown here with Channel 18 providing the additional two connections.
For each 4-wire connection, one Sense Channel (1 through 10) and one Source Channel (Sense
Channel number +10 = 11 through 20) are used.

Figure 2-4. 2-Wire and 4-Wire Connections

2-10

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

Shielded Wiring

2-10.

Use shielded wires and sensors (such as thermocouples) in environments where
electrical noise is present, and connect the wire shield to the chassis ground
terminal. Also refer to Appendix B "Noise, Shielding and Crosstalk
Considerations."

Crosstalk Considerations

2-11.

Crosstalk between measurement lines causes one signal to interfere with another,
introducing measurement errors. To reduce the effects of crosstalk, check the
following:
•

Separate Wiring Keep any input wiring carrying ac voltage signals
physically separate from the input wiring of sensitive channels. Also keep
input wiring separated from, or shielded from, ac power mains wiring.

•

Adjacent Channels Avoid connecting input with ac voltage signals next to
sensitive channel inputs. Leave unconnected channels between the inputs
when possible.

•

Sensitive Channels Avoid connecting inputs with ac voltage signals adjacent
to four-terminal input channels.

•

High Impedance Inputs Avoid high-source impedances on sensitive
channels, or minimize the capacitance of the sensitive channel to earth
(chassis) ground for high impedance inputs.

•

Precision Resistance Measurements Avoid connecting any ac voltage
inputs when making peak-accuracy high resistance measurements (resistance
greater than 10 kΩ).

See Appendix B "Noise, Shielding and Crosstalk Considerations" for a complete
discussion of crosstalk and measurement errors.

Digital I/O Connections

2-12.

PCaution
To avoid damage to the instrument, do not apply any
voltages greater than 30V maximum between the DIGITAL
I/O connector terminals and earth ground.
The 10-terminal DIGITAL I/O connector (Figure 2-5) on the rear panel of the
instrument provides connection to the Digital I/O and Totalizer functions.
Complete the following procedure to make a connection to these functions:
1. Remove the DIGITAL I/O connector from the packing material or instrument
rear panel.
2-11

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

2. Loosen the wire clamp screw for the associated terminal.
3. Feed the wire into the gap between the connector body and the wire clamp.
4. Tighten the wire clamp; do not overtighten and crush the wire.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each wire.
6. Insert the connector in the rear panel.
DIGITAL I/O
0
1
2
3
4

I/O Line 0
I/O Line 1
I/O Line 2
I/O Line 3
I/O Line 4

5 I/O Line 5
6 I/O Line 6
7 I/O Line 7
Σ Totalizer Input
Signal Ground

Figure 2-5. DIGITAL I/O Connector

Digital I/O

2-13.

The Digital I/O lines use terminals 0 to 7 and GND. You can use these lines either
as signal inputs or as alarm outputs. See Table A-3 in Appendix A for complete
specifications.

Totalizer

2-14.

The Totalizer uses terminals Σ and GND. The Totalizer counts contact closures or
voltage transitions with a maximum count of 4,294,967,295. See Table A-7 in
Appendix A for complete specifications.

Alarm/Trigger I/O Connections

2-15.

PCaution
To avoid damage to the instrument, do not apply any
voltages greater than 30V maximum between the
ALARM/TRIGGER I/O connector terminals and earth
ground.
The eight-terminal ALARM/TRIGGER I/O connector (Figure 2-6) on the rear
panel of the instrument provides connections to Trigger In (TI), Trigger Out (TO),
and Master Alarm (MA) I/O lines along with a common ground connection. (See
the "Trigger Input," "Trigger Output," and "Master Alarm Output" discussions in
Chapter 1 for additional information.) The dc power connection is also on this
connector. (See "DC Power" above.).
2-12

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

Complete the following procedure to make a connection to the
ALARM/TRIGGER I/O connector:
1. Remove the ALARM/TRIGGER I/O connector from the rear panel.
2. Loosen the wire clamp screw for the associated terminal.
3. Feed the wire into the gap between the connector body and the wire clamp.
4. Tighten the wire clamp; do not overtighten and crush the wire.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each wire.
6. Insert the connector in the rear panel.

Trigger Input

2-16.

Trigger Input uses terminals TI and GND. A contact closure or a TTL low signal
input between TI and GND triggers instrument scanning when you select External
Trigger as a scan parameter. (See "Scan Parameters" in Chapter 3) A TTL signal
input triggers on the falling edge of the signal. A contact closure input triggers on
the "close" portion of the switch sequence, open-close-open. Scanning continues
at the Interval 2 rate while TI is held low. See Table A-4 in Appendix A for
specifications.

2-13

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ALARM/TRIGGER I/O

Instrument

MA TO TI

9-16V
DC PWR

Connector

+
Function
DC Positive Input
DC Negative Input
Master Alarm Output
Trigger Out Output
Trigger In Input
Signal Ground

–

Instrument
+
–
MA
TO
TI

3 TR

Connector
+
–
2
3
TR

Figure 2-6. ALARM/TRIGGER I/O Connector

Trigger Output

2-17.

Trigger Output uses terminals TO and GND, and is a TTL signal that goes to a
logic low for 125 µs every time a scan begins. Use the Trigger Output to trigger
other instruments via their Trigger Input connection and to interface with external
equipment. To enable or disable the Trigger Output, see "Trigger Out" in Chapter
3 of this manual. The trigger output default is OFF. See Table A-5 in Appendix A
for complete specifications.

Master Alarm

2-18.

Master Alarm uses terminals MA and GND. It is a TTL signal that goes to a logic
low when any channel is in alarm while the instrument is scanning. This TTL
signal output can interface with external equipment such as warning lights,alarms,
paging systems, etc. See Table A-6 in Appendix A for complete specifications.
2-14

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

External Trigger Wiring for a Group Instrument

2-19.

External Trigger Wiring for a group instrument refers to the triggering
configuration in which you connect the Master TO (Trigger Out) line to each
Slave TI (Trigger In) line and provide a common connection to the GND line for
each instrument. This configuration provides improved synchronization of the
group instrument when the scanning intervals are 1 second or less.
Figure 2-7 shows a typical wiring connection for a group instrument. Use
NetDAQ Logger to configure a group instrument as described in Chapter 3 of this
manual.

Controls and Indicators

2-20.

The front panel provides a display and a set of control keys; the rear panel
provides the power switch and Ethernet status indicators. See Figures 1-2 through
1-4 for an overall view of front and rear panels, and "Front Panel Operating
Procedures" later in this chapter for procedures that use the front and rear panel
controls and indicators.

2-15

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY II PER IEC 1010-1

107-264V

MODEL: 2640A / 41A

2645A / 46A

50/60 Hz
15VA

WARNING: TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DISCONNECT LINE CORD BEFORE REMOVING COVER

ON / OFF
DIGITAL I/O

ALARM/TRIGGER I/O

SERIAL PORT
XMT RCV

MA TO TI

9-16V
DC PWR

3 4 5

7
ETHERNET

+30V

NOT FOR CONNECTION TO
PUBLIC TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

MEETS VFG 243 / 1991

External
trigger
if used

Master Instrument

OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY II PER IEC 1010-1

107-264V

MODEL: 2640A / 41A

2645A / 46A

50/60 Hz
15VA

WARNING: TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DISCONNECT LINE CORD BEFORE REMOVING COVER

ON / OFF
DIGITAL I/O

ALARM/TRIGGER I/O

SERIAL PORT
XMT RCV

MA TO TI

9-16V
DC PWR

3 4 5

7
ETHERNET

+30V

NOT FOR CONNECTION TO
PUBLIC TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

MEETS VFG 243 / 1991

Slave Instrument

OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY II PER IEC 1010-1

107-264V

MODEL: 2640A / 41A

2645A / 46A

50/60 Hz
15VA

WARNING: TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DISCONNECT LINE CORD BEFORE REMOVING COVER

ON / OFF
DIGITAL I/O

ALARM/TRIGGER I/O

SERIAL PORT
XMT RCV

+
9-16V
DC PWR

MA TO TI

3 4 5

7
ETHERNET

+30V

NOT FOR CONNECTION TO
PUBLIC TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

MEETS VFG 243 / 1991

Slave Instrument

Figure 2-7. External Trigger Wiring for a Group Instrument

2-16

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

Front Panel Controls

2-21.

Use the front panel controls (Figure 2-8) to enter configuration parameters, and
choose monitoring functions. Table 2-1 summarizes the front panel control
functions.
Display Digital I/O and Totalizer Status
COMM

Set/Review
COMMunication
Parameters

Display MONitor Channel
DIO

MON

ENTER

ENTER Selection

Figure 2-8. Front Panel Controls
Table 2-1. Front Panel Key Descriptions
Key

Description

COMM

Communication - Set up communication parameters. To review, just
press COMM; to set, press and hold COMM for 3 seconds until the
SET annunciator lights. If you press COMM again during
configuration operations, the operation cancels. The COMM
parameters are as follows:
Base Channel Number (01 to 99)
Line Frequency (50 or 60 Hz)
Ethernet Address (Read Only)
RS-232 (Baud Rate)
Network
Isolated Network
General Network
Internet Protocol (IP) Address
Socket Port
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway Address

DIO

Digital I/O - Display Digital I/O Status and Totalizer count. After
pressing DIO, use the left/right arrow keys to display the DIO status
and the up/down arrow keys to display the totalizer status.

MON

Monitor - Display Monitor Channel. After pressing MON, use the
up/down arrow keys to select the desired channel to monitor.

ENTER

Enter - Make Configuration Selection or Terminate Parameter Entry.

Left/Right Arrows

Used to make selections in setup menus. The arrow keys have an
automatic repeat action when held down for more than 1 second.

Up/Down Arrows

Used to make selections in setup menus and select monitor
channels. The arrow keys have an automatic repeat action.

2-17

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Front Panel Indicators

2-22.

The front panel indicators (Figure 2-9) consist of two five-digit displays and a set
of annunciators. Table 2-2 summarizes the front panel indicator functions.

Annunciators

REVIEW
LAST

MAX
MIN

REM SCAN
AUTO MON

Secondary Display

SET FUNC
Mx+B ALARM
°C °F RO
mV AC DC
x1Mk Ω Hz

Primary Display

F
LIMIT HI OFF PRN CH
1 2 LO CAL EXT TR

Annunciators

Figure 2-9. Front Panel Indicators
Table 2-2. Annunciator Display Descriptions
Annunciator

2-18

Description

REVIEW

Displays while reviewing the instrument parameters.

MAX

(Not Used.)

REM

Indicates active communications connection with the host computer (bright
display) or inactive communications (dim display).

SCAN

Displays while the instrument is scanning.

SET

Displays while setting the instrument parameters.

FUNC

Displays while monitoring a computed channel.

(Not Used.)

LAST

(Not Used.)

MIN

(Not Used.)

AUTO

Displays while monitoring a channel with Autorange selected.

MON

Displays while monitoring a channel.

Mx+B

Displays bright while monitoring a channel scaled with an M value other than
1 and/or a B value other than 0.

ALARM

Displays dim when the rear panel Master Alarm (MA) is logic low, meaning
one of the instrument channels is in alarm. Displays bright when an alarm
channel is being used as an Alarm Trigger.

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

Table 2-2. Annunciator Display Descriptions (cont)
Annunciator

Description

°C

Displays when you monitor a channel for which the measurement function is
in degrees Celsius.

°F

Displays when you monitor a channel for which the measurement function is
in degrees Fahrenheit.

(Not Used.)

Displays when you monitor a channel for which the measurement value is
scaled by .001 (milli).

Displays when you monitor a channel for which the measurement function is
volts. Operates in conjunction with the AC and DC annunciators.

Displays when you monitor a channel for which the measurement function is
in Alternating Current (AC).

Displays when you monitor a channel for which the measurement function is
in Direct Current (DC).

(Not used.)

Displays when you monitor a channel for which the measurement value is
scaled by 1,000,000 (mega).

Displays when you monitor a channel for which the measurement value is
scaled by 1,000 (kilo).

Ω

Displays when you monitor a channel for which the measurement function is
in Ohms.

Displays when you monitor a channel for which the measurement function is
in Hertz.

LIMIT

(Not used.)

OFF

(Not used.)

PRN

(Not Used.)

Displays when the channel number is in the secondary display.

(Not used.)

CAL

Displays when the instrument internal calibration constants become corrupted.

EXT

Displays when the External Trigger is enabled while scanning.

Displays when Alarm Trigger or External Trigger is enabled while scanning.

2-19

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Rear Panel Controls

2-23.

The rear panel has a single control: the power switch (Figure 2-10). The power
switch controls both ac and dc power inputs.

Power Switch
Applies AC and/or DC
power to the instrument.

Figure 2-10. Rear Panel Controls

Rear Panel Indicators

2-24.

The rear panel has three LED indicators for the Ethernet adapter (Figure 2-11).

Red LED blinks for instrument
receiving Ethernet data.
Amber LED for instrument
Ethernet status: 10BaseT, LED
on for connection with hub;
10Base2, LED blinks for data
collisions.

Red LED blinks for
instrument transmitting
Ethernet data.

XMT RCV

ETHERNET

NOT FOR CONNECTION TO
PUBLIC TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

Figure 2-11. Rear Panel Indicators

2-20

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

Front Panel Operating Procedures

2-25.

Power-On Options

2-26.

There are three power-on options as listed below:
• Normal Power-On Turn power switch on. The instrument communication
parameters are the same as when the instrument was last turned off.
• Configuration-Reset Power-On Hold the front panel COMM key down,
and then turn the power switch on. Continue holding the COMM key until the
instrument beeps. The communication parameters are reset to default values
(see Table 2-3).
• Display-Hold Power-On Hold the front panel arrow-left ( < ) key down, and
then turn the power switch on. Continue holding the < key until the instrument
beeps. The instrument front panel display remains on until you press any front
panel key. This allows inspection of the display segments.
Each power-on sequence includes a four-second self-test routine. If the self-test
fails, the instrument displays ERROR in the primary display with a code character
in the secondary display. See Chapter 6 "Maintenance" for information on error
codes. Power-on also clears channel configuration data and sets all channels to
OFF.
Table 2-3. Instrument Default Parameters
Parameter
Base Channel Number

Default Setting
1

Line Frequency

60 Hz

Network Selection

Isolated Network

Socket Port

4369

Internet Protocol Address

---.---.---.--- (dashes)

Baud Rate

19200

Default Gateway

OFF

2-21

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Displaying a Monitor Channel

2-27.

Perform the procedure in Figure 2-12 to monitor an instrument analog channel (01
to 20) or computed channel (21 to 30). See Figure 2-13 for examples.
•

Channel Display When you press the MON key, the first monitor channel
displayed is the channel most recently monitored. After power-on, reset,
configuration, or self-test commands, the channel displayed is the lowest
numbered configured channel. When no channels are configured, monitoring
is not available. (Under this condition, an error beep occurs when you press
the Monitor key.)

•

Monitor Display The initial monitor display is a series of dashes, which lasts
for approximately one second. The measurement then appears in the primary
display (the secondary display shows the Global Channel Number). The MON
(monitor) annunciator is on when monitoring.

•

Monitor Reading Updates The instrument updates monitor readings once
per second. Since the 2640A measures readings with 5 ½ digits of resolution
and the display can only show 5 digits of resolution, the least significant digit
is truncated for 2640A monitor displays.

MON

Press the MON (Monitor) key to monitor a channel. You can use Monitor
whether the instrument is scanning or not scanning.

Use the up/down arrow keys to select the desired channel. The instrument will
not allow selection of channels that are set to OFF.

MON

Press the MON key again to exit.

Figure 2-12. Displaying a Monitor Channel

2-22

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

MON
mV DC

Monitor display for 13.758 mV DC, GCN (Global Channel Number) 511

MON
V AC

Monitor display for Scale Overload V AC (reading is greater than the selected range), GCN 4507

MON

°F
CH

Monitor display for 234.96°F (Thermocouple), GCN 512 (otc displays for open thermocouple)

FUNC
MON
CH

Monitor display for 23.884 FUNC (Computed Channel), GCN 522

MON

Mx+B
CH

Monitor display for analog channel 18 with Mx+B scaling, GCN 818
Figure 2-13. Examples During Monitor

2-23

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Displaying the Digital I/O Status

2-28.

Perform the procedure in Figure 2-14 to display an instrument Digital I/O line
status. The instrument updates the DIO display once per second. (See Figure 2-15
for examples.)
•

Number Of DIO Lines There are eight DIO lines: DIO 0 to DIO 7. You can
assign DIO lines as alarm outputs or as digital inputs. For example, a switch
closure can toggle a DIO line as an input.

•

DIO Status Display DIO status display is in the form nnnn-nnnn with five
characters in view at a time.

DIO

Press the DIO (Digital I/O) key to view the Digital I/O status. You can display the
Digital I/O status whether the instrument is scanning or not scanning.
Press the left/right arrow keys to display the desired DIO line, DIO7 to DIO0.
A hyphen divides the display, for example, 1111-0000.

DIO

Press the DIO key again to exit. NetDAQ Logger for Windows can also display
the Digital I/O status.
Figure 2-14. Displaying the Digital I/O Status

Input example Toggling DIO7 between open circuit and ground results in I/O
status of 255 (11111111) and 127 (01111111). The changes from 255 to 127 in
your scan data provide a direct correlation between the external condition at DIO7
and the analog and computed measurements.
Output example Associating I/O line DIO0 with an alarm results in I/O status of
255 (11111111) when the channel is not in alarm and 254 (11111110) when the
channel is in alarm. External equipment such as warning lights can process the
logic low output on the Digital I/O connector.
Associating an I/O line with an alarm condition is part of the alarm’s
configuration procedure. (See “Alarms” in Chapter 3 of this manual.)

2-24

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

Digital I/O status display for DIO line 7 (for the example 1111-0000)

Digital I/O status display for DIO line 4 (for the example 1111-0000)

Digital I/O status display for DIO line 0 (for the example 1111-0000)

Totalizer status display for the high digits (for the example 4294967295)

Totalizer status display for the low digits (for the example 4294967295)
Figure 2-15. Examples for Digital I/O and Totalizer Status

2-25

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Displaying the Totalizer Status

2-29.

Perform the procedure in Figure 2-16 to display the instrument Totalizer status.
The instrument updates the Totalizer display once per second. (See Figure 2-15
for examples.) To clear the Totalizer count, cycle the instrument power. You can
also configure NetDAQ Logger to clear the Totalizer count when it starts logging.
•

Maximum Totalizer Count The Totalizer counts switch closures or voltage
transitions with a maximum count of 4,294,967,295.

•

Totalizer Status Display The instrument displays the Totalizer status in two
five-digit segments; high (HI) and low (LO). Using the maximum count of
4,294,967,295 as an example, the HI five-digit segment would display 42949
and the LO five-digit segment 67295.

DIO

Press the DIO (Digital I/O) key to view the Totalizer status. You can view the
Totalizer status whether the instrument is scanning or not scanning.

Press an up/down arrow key to advance to the Totalizer display. The 10
digits display in a five-digit tot:HI count and five-digit tot:LO count.

DIO

Press the DIO key again to exit. NetDAQ Logger also provides a display of the
Totalizer status.
Figure 2-16. Displaying the Totalizer Status

2-26

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

Reviewing and Setting the Base Channel Number

2-30.

Perform the procedure in Figure 2-17 to review or set the Base Channel Number
(BCN). The BCN identifies the instrument. The BCN is also the first two digits of
the Global Channel Number (GCN), which uniquely identifies each instrument
channel. For example, a GCN of 2716 indicates instrument 27 and analog channel
16. (See Figure 2-18 for examples.)
•

BCN Range The BCN can be any number from 01 to 99. If you plan to
install NetDAQ Logger for isolated network operation, each instrument on the
network must have a unique BCN.

•

BCN Review or Set identifier The REVIEW annunciator displays when
reviewing the BCN; the SET annunciator displays when setting the BCN.

COMM

Press the COMM key to review the Base Channel Number (BCN), or press and
hold the COMM key for 3 seconds to set the BCN.

Press the up/down arrow keys until bASE (Base Channel Number) appears
in the primary display (COMM appears in the secondary display).

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. bASE appears in the secondary display and the current
BCN (two digits) in the primary display.
For BCN set procedures, press the left/right arrow keys to select the BCN 10s
or 1s digit position (highlighted).

Press the up/down arrow keys to select the desired number, 0 to 9, for the
positioned BCN digit. In this manner, set both BCN digits.

ENTER

Press the ENTER key to exit. (Pressing any other function key will cancel set
operations.)
Figure 2-17. Reviewing and Setting the Base Channel Number

2-27

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

REVIEW

Communications display for reviewing the Base Channel Number (BCN)

SET

Communications display for setting the BCN

SET

Base Channel Number display for setting the BCN 10s digits (for example, 45)

REVIEW

Base Channel Number display for reviewing the BCN number (for example, 45)

Front Panel display for an instrument with BCN 45
Figure 2-18. Examples for Reviewing and Setting the BCN

2-28

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

Reviewing and Setting the Line Frequency

2-31.

Perform the procedure in Figure 2-19 to review or set the line frequency. Line
frequency selection allows the instrument to optimize internal circuitry for
maximum precision. (See Figure 2-20 for examples.)
•

COMM

Line Frequency Choices Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz as the frequency of the
primary power when an ac source powers the instrument.
Press the COMM key to review the Line Frequency setting, or press and hold the
COMM key for 3 seconds to set the Line Frequency.

Press the up/down arrow keys until LinE (Line Frequency) appears in the
primary display (comm appears in the secondary display).

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. LinE appears in the secondary display and the current
LinE frequency setting is in the primary display.

For Line Frequency set procedures, press the up/down arrow keys to select
50 (Hz) or 60 (Hz) line frequency (current setting appears bright).

ENTER

Press the ENTER key to exit. (Pressing any other function key will cancel set
operations.)
Figure 2-19. Reviewing and Setting the Line Frequency

2-29

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

REVIEW

Communications display for reviewing the line frequency

SET

Communications display for setting the line frequency

SET

Line frequency display for setting the line frequency to 60 Hz

SET

Line frequency display for setting the line frequency to 50 Hz

REVIEW

Line frequency display for reviewing the line frequency (60 Hz)
Figure 2-20. Examples for Reviewing and Setting the Line Frequency

2-30

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

Reviewing and Setting the Network Type

2-32.

Perform the procedure in Figure 2-21 to review or set the network type to isolated.
Perform the procedure in Figure 2-23 to review or set the network type to general.
An isolated network consists of only NetDAQ instruments and one or more host
computers. A general network consists of instruments, host computers, and
possibly servers, routers, gateways, or other network devices. (See Figure 2-22 for
examples.)
If you install NetDAQ Logger for isolated network operation and set the
instruments’ network type to isolated, you do not need to know or set IP addresses
for your instruments.
COMM

Press the COMM key to review the network type, or press and hold the COMM
key for 3 seconds to set the network type.

Press the up/down arrow keys until nEt (Network) appears in the primary
display (comm appears in the secondary display).

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. nEt appears in the secondary display and ISo (isolated
network) or gEn (general network) is in the primary display.

To set the network type to isolated, press the up/down arrow keys to
select ISo (current setting appears bright).

ENTER

Press the ENTER key to exit. (Pressing any other function key will cancel set
operations.)
Figure 2-21. Reviewing and Setting the Network Type to Isolated

2-31

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

REVIEW

Communications display for reviewing the network type

SET

Communications display for setting the network type

SET

Network display for setting the network type to isolated

SET

Network display for setting the network type to general

REVIEW

Network display for reviewing the network type (isolated network)
Figure 2-22. Examples for Reviewing and Setting the Network Type

2-32

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

If you install NetDAQ Logger for general network operation, you must set the
network type of each instrument to general. You will need to enter an IP address,
socket port, and possibly a subnet mask and gateway address into each instrument.
Get this information from your network administrator.
COMM

Press the COMM key to review the network type, or press and hold the COMM
key for 3 seconds to set the network type.

Press the up/down arrow keys until nEt (Network) appears in the primary
display (comm appears in the secondary display).

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. nEt appears in the secondary display and ISo (isolated
network) or gEn (general network) is in the primary display.

To set the network type to general, press the up/down arrow keys to
select gEn (current setting appears bright).

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. (Pressing any other function key will cancel set
operations.) This displays the current Socket Port.

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. This displays the first digit of the Internet Protocol
address (segment IP:0).

ENTER

Press the ENTER key to exit. You must also set an IP address and Socket Port
when using a general network.
Figure 2-23. Reviewing and Setting the Network Type to General

2-33

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

REVIEW

Communications display for reviewing the network type

SET

Communications display for setting the network type

SET

Network display for setting the network type to general

SET

Socket Port display for setting the first digit (for the example 04369)

SET

Socket Port display for setting the second digit (for the example 04369)
Figure 2-24. Examples for Reviewing and Setting General Network Parameters

2-34

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

SET

IP address display for setting an IP:0 digit (for example, 129:196:152:101)

SET

IP address display for setting an IP:1 digit (for example, 129:196:152:101)

SET

IP address display for setting an IP:1 digit (for example, 129:196:152:101)

SET

IP address display for setting an IP:2 digit (for example, 129:196:152:101)

SET

IP address display for setting an IP:3 digit (for example, 129:196:152:101)
Figure 2-24. Examples for Reviewing and Setting General Network Parameters (cont)

2-35

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Reviewing and Setting the General Network Socket Port

2-33.

Perform the procedure in Figure 2-25 to review or set the general network Socket
Port (1024 to 65535). The default is 04369. In order to communicate with each
other, a host computer and an instrument must use the same socket port number.
(See Figure 2-25 for examples.)
•

COMM

General Network Socket Port Enter the Socket Port supplied by your
network administrator.
Press the COMM key to review the network settings, or press and hold the
COMM key for 3 seconds to set the network settings.

Press the up/down arrow keys until nEt (Network) appears in the primary
display (comm appears in the secondary display).

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. nEt appears in the secondary display and ISo (isolated
network) or gEn (general network) is in the primary display.

To set the network type, press the up/down arrow keys to
select gEn.

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. (Pressing any other function key will cancel set
operations.) This displays the current Socket Port.
To set the socket port, press the left/right arrow keys to select the desired
digit position (highlighted).

Press the up/down arrow keys to select the desired number, 0 to 9, for the
positioned Port digit. In this manner, select all Port digits.

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. This displays the first digit of the Internet Protocol
address segment IP:0.

ENTER

Press the ENTER key to enter the settings and exit the procedure. (Pressing any
other function key will cancel set operations.).
Figure 2-25. Reviewing and Setting the General Network Socket Port

2-36

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

Reviewing and Setting the General Network IP Address

2-34.

Perform the procedure in Figure 2-26 to review or set the instrument’s general
network Internet Protocol (IP) address. (See Figure 2-24 for examples.)
•

COMM

General Network IP Address Enter the IP Address supplied by your
network administrator and recorded inside the rear cover of this manual for
each BCN. The format is four 3-digit segments: IP0.IP1.IP2.IP3.
Press the COMM key to review the network settings, or press and hold the
COMM key for 3 seconds to set the network settings.

Press the up/down arrow keys until nEt (Network) appears in the primary
display (comm appears in the secondary display).

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. nEt appears in the secondary display and ISo (isolated
network) or gEn (general network) is in the primary display.

To set the network type, press the up/down arrow keys to
select gEn.

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. (Pressing any other key will cancel set operations.) This
displays the current Socket Port.

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. This displays the first digit of the 12-digit Internet Protocol
address (grouped into four 3-digit segments: IP0 . IP1 . IP2 . IP3).
Press the left/right arrow keys to select the desired number in each segment.
The selected digit is highlighted and the segment, for example, IP2, appears.

Press the up/down arrow keys to select the desired number, 0 to 9, for the
positioned IP digit. In this manner, select all 12 IP digits.

ENTER

Press the ENTER key to enter the settings and exit the procedure. (Pressing any
other function key will cancel set operations.).
2-26. Reviewing and Setting the General Network IP Address

2-37

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Reviewing and Setting the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway

2-35.

If communication between the host computer and the NetDAQ instrument passes
through a router or gateway, you must set the subnet mask and default gateway
address on both the host computer and the instrument. Get this information from
your network administrator.
For more information on the purpose of the subnet mask and default gateway
address, see Appendix I, “Network Considerations.”
Perform the procedure in Figure 2-27 to review or set the instrument network
gateway parameters. The network gateway parameters include turning the default
gateway feature on or off, setting a subnet mask, and setting an IP address for the
gateway attached to the local network.
Note
Set the IP address of the instrument before the setting gateway
parameters. The NetDAQ instrument checks the gateway IP address
for validity by using the instrument IP address.
•

2-38

Default Gateway Parameters If the NetDAQ instrument and host PC are on
different subnets and must communicate through a gateway (router), turn the
default gateway feature ON and enter the subnet mask and IP address of the
gateway, as supplied by your network administrator. If you do not require a
gateway, turn the default gateway feature OFF.

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

•

Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a 32-bit binary number expressed as four
3-digit segments, like an IP address. The subnet mask, when masked with the
instrument IP address, determines what the network number is. For example,
if the IP address is 129.196.180.93 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, the
network number is 129.196.180.0.
The subnet mask contains a consecutive set of bits, starting at the highest
order bit, forming a binary mask value. For example, 255.255.0.0 (binary
value FFFF0000 hex) is a valid mask, but 255.255.10.0 (binary value
FFFF0A00 hex) is not a valid mask, because the bits are not consecutive.
0.255.255.0 (binary value 00FFFF00 hex) is also not a valid mask, because
the bits do not begin at the highest order bit.
The subnet mask must also contain a minimum number of bits depending on
the class of the instrument IP address. The minimum number of bits for a class
A address is 255.0.0.0, class B is 255.255.0.0 and class C is 255.255.255.0.
For example, if the IP address is 129.196.180.93, a class B address, a subnet
mask of 255.0.0.0 is not valid, because there are too few subnet mask bits set.

•

Default Gateway IP Address The default gateway IP address is the IP
address of a gateway (router) attached to the same network as the instrument.
When the instrument detects that a host PC is not on the same network (using
the network number), the data is sent through the gateway to reach the host
PC.
The network number of the instrument must match that of the gateway. For
example, if the gateway IP address is 129.196.180.93, and the subnet mask is
255.255.255.0, the network number is 129.196.180.0, and the instrument IP
address must be in the range 129.196.180.0 to 129.196.180.255.

2-39

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
COMM

Press the COMM key to review the parameters, or press and hold the COMM key
for 3 seconds to set the parameters.
Press the up/down arrow keys until dgAtE (default gateway) appears
in the primary display (COMM appears in the secondary display).

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. dgAtE appears in the secondary display, and ON or OFF is
in the primary display.
Press the up/down arrow keys to select either ON or OFF when in set
mode.

ENTER

Press the ENTER key to make the selection (pressing any other key will cancel
set operations.). If you select ON, the subnet mask appears. The subnet mask
display consists of four 3-digit segments: Sub0. Sub1. Sub2. Sub3.
Press the left/right arrow keys to select the desired number in each segment. The
selected digit is highlighted and the segment, for example Sub:0,
appears in the secondary display.
Press the up/down arrow keys to select the desired number 0 to 9, for the
positioned subnet mask digit. In this manner, select all 12 subnet mask
digits.

ENTER

Press the ENTER key to make the selection (pressing any other key will cancel
set operations). If you enter an incorrect subnet mask, Error appears for 2
seconds, and the subnet mask selection stays displayed. Otherwise, the default
gateway IP address appears. The default gateway display consists of four 3-digit
segments: gAt0.gAt1.gAt2.gAt3.
Press the left/right arrow keys to select the desired number in each segment. The
selected digit becomes highlighted and the segment, e.g. gAt:0,
appears in the secondary display.
Press the up/down arrow keys to select the desired number 0 to 9, for the
positioned default gateway IP digit. In this manner, select all 12 default
gateway IP digits.

ENTER

Press the ENTER key to make the selection (pressing any other key will cancel
set operations). If you enter an incorrect default gateway IP, Error displays for 2
seconds, and the default gateway IP selection stays displayed. Otherwise, the
procedure exits.
Figure 2-27. Reviewing and Setting the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway

2-40

Preparing for Operation
Instrument Preparation

Viewing the Instrument Ethernet Address

2-36.

Perform the procedure in Figure 2-28 to view the Instrument Ethernet address.
(See Figure 2-29 for examples.) The network administrator must know the
instrument Ethernet address when the instrument operates on a general network.
You do not need this information when you operate the instrument on an isolated
network. For your convenience, record the Ethernet address inside the rear cover
of this manual.
•

Ethernet Address Format The Ethernet address is a 12-digit hexadecimal
number. For example, 00:80:40:12:34:56. The first 6 hexadecimal digits
represent a manufacturer, for example, 00:80:40 represents Fluke
Corporation. The remaining digits are a sequential number assigned during
manufacturing. Ethernet addresses are always unique; they are never altered,
reused, or duplicated.

•

Ethernet Address Display The Ethernet address display consists of six 2digit segments: Eadr 0 to Eadr 5. In the example above, Eadr0=00, Eadr1=80,
Eadr2=40, Eadr3=12, Eadr4=34, Eadr5=56.

COMM

Press the COMM key to open the communications display because this is a
review process only.
Press the up/down arrow keys until EAdr (Ethernet Address) appears in
the primary display (comm appears in the secondary display).

ENTER

Press the ENTER key. Eadr0 appears in the secondary display, the first 5 digits
of the Ethernet address appears in the primary display (always 00.80.4).
Press the left/right arrow keys to display each byte: Eadr0 (always 00),
Eadr1 (always 80), Eadr2 (always 40), then Eadr3, Eadr4 and Eadr5.

COMM

Press the COMM key again to exit. Record the Ethernet address inside the rear
cover of this manual.
Figure 2-28. Viewing the Instrument Ethernet Address

2-41

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

REVIEW

Communications display for viewing the instrument Ethernet address

REVIEW

Ethernet address display for viewing byte 0 (for the example 00-80-40-12-34-56)

REVIEW

Ethernet address display for viewing byte 2 (for the example 00-80-40-12-34-56)

REVIEW

Ethernet address display for viewing byte 4 (for the example 00-80-40-12-34-56)

REVIEW

Ethernet address display for viewing byte 5 (for the example 00-80-40-12-34-56)
Figure 2-29. Examples for Viewing the Ethernet Address

2-42

Preparing for Operation
Host Computer and Network Preparation

Host Computer and Network Preparation

2-37.

This section contains information for preparing your host computer and setting up
network communication, as summarized in Figure 2-30.

Installing Host Computer Ethernet Adapter

2-38.

Skip this section if you have an Ethernet adapter installed on your computer.
Since the installation procedures for Ethernet adapters change frequently and
without notice, you must follow the instructions supplied with your particular
Ethernet adapter. An external parallel-to-LAN adapter, such as the 246XA-802, is
easier to install and configure than a plug-in card. If your host computer is already
on a network, it probably has an Ethernet adapter already installed.
To install an Ethernet adapter, use the following procedure:
1. Close all applications. Exit Windows and turn the host computer off. This step
is necessary for installing a parallel-to-LAN adapter as well as for installing a
plug-in card.
2. Follow the installation instructions in the manual supplied with your Ethernet
adapter to install the hardware. Do not install driver software at this point.

2-43

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

1
Install
Ethernet
Adapter

Ethernet Card

PCMCIA
Card

Parallel-to-LAN
Adapter

2
Interconnect
Host Computers
and
Instruments

NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Instrument

3
Install
Networking
Software

Windows 95/NT
or
Trumpet
or
NetManage Newt

4
Install
Logging
Software

Fluke NetDAQ
Logger for Windows

5
Install
Trending
Software
(Optional)

Trend Link
for Fluke

Figure 2-30. Preparing for Network Operation

2-44

Preparing for Operation
Host Computer and Network Preparation

Instrument and Host Computer Interconnection

2-39.

You may interconnect NetDAQ instruments and host computer(s) with either
10Base2 (coaxial) or 10BaseT (twisted pair) wiring. If your site is already wired,
you will probably use the wire in place. If your site is not wired, and you are
connecting your instrument directly to your host computer, it is easiest to use the
coaxial cable supplied with your NetDAQ instrument.

Host Computer/Instrument Direct Connection

2-40.

You can connect one or more instruments directly to a host computer using
10Base2 cable. See Interconnection Using 10Base2 (coaxial) Wiring (Figure
2-31).
You can connect a single instrument directly to a host computer using 10BaseT
cable, but you must use a special cable that has its transmit and receive lines
crossed. The crossed lines allow each end to transmit to the receive terminal at the
other end. See Figure 2-32 and “Interconnection Using 10BaseT (Twisted Pair)
Ethernet Wiring”.

2-45

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

A typical isolated network configuration uses 10Base2 Coax for interconnection (shown).

Terminator
Ground Wire
50-Ohm
Terminator
NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Host
Computer 1

Instrument 1

Connect to 10Base2
Coax Port

NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Instrument 2
BNC “T” or “Y”
(Typical)

NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Instrument 3

Host
Computer 2

NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

10Base2 Coaxial
Cable (50-Ohm)

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Instrument 4

Figure 2-31. Interconnection Using 10Base2 (Coaxial) Wiring

2-46

Preparing for Operation
Host Computer and Network Preparation

50-Ohm Terminator

50-Ohm Terminator
with Ground Wire

Ethernet
Coaxial Cable
(50-Ohm)

BNC “T”

BNC “Y”

Ground
Wire
Terminal

10Base2 Coaxial Ethernet Ports

Host
Computer 1

Ground Wire
(Instrument Only)

Instrument

10Base2 Direct Connection
Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cable
WITH RX AND TX LINES REVERSED

10BaseT RJ-45 Ethernet Ports

RJ-45 10BaseT
Outlets (Typical)

Patch Cord
Host
Computer 1

RJ-45
Interface
(Typical)

Instrument

10BaseT Direct Connection

Figure 2-32. Host Computer/Instrument Direct Connection

2-47

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Interconnection Using 10Base2 (Coaxial) Wiring

2-41.

PCaution
Connect the ground lug on the 50-Ohm terminator to the
instrument ground terminal only when there is no other
shield ground connected for the network.
10Base2 interconnection uses 50-Ohm coaxial cables (Belden 9907 or equal) that
loop between equipment items and connect at each station through a BNC "T" or
"Y" connector. Each network endpoint terminates into a 50-Ohm load. The
minimum distance between BNC T connections is 20 inches (0.5 meter) and the
total cable length (without repeaters) must not exceed 600 feet (185 meters).
Complete the following procedure to interconnect the instruments and host
computer using 10Base2 coax (Figure 2-31).
1. Connect a BNC T or Y to the 10Base2 port on each instrument and on each
host computer.
2. Connect approved Ethernet cables (for example, Belden 9907) with BNC
connectors to each BNC T or Y. Be sure you are using 50-Ohm cable!
3. Connect 50-Ohm terminators to the BNC T and Y end points. Be sure you
have installed 50-Ohm terminations even if there is a direct connection
between the host computer and a single instrument. The instrument 50-Ohm
terminator at the network endpoint has a ground wire that is connected to the
instrument ground terminal (adjacent to the BNC connector) only when there
is no other shield ground connected for the network. (See Figure 2-32.)

Interconnection Using 10BaseT (Twisted-Pair) Ethernet Wiring

2-42.

The instruments support connection via twisted-pair Ethernet, usually in
conjunction with a "hub" for multiple instruments (See Figure 2-33). Take care
that you use twisted pair wires designed for 10BaseT network use (phone cables
will not work). Refer interconnection issues to your network administrator. (See
Appendix I, "Network Considerations.")
Direct connection between a single host computer and a single instrument with
10BaseT is possible, but you must use a special cable that has its transmit and
receive lines crossed. (See Figure 2-32.)

2-48

Preparing for Operation
Host Computer and Network Preparation

The typical general network configuration uses 10BaseT Twisted-Pair Ethernet for interconnection
(shown).

Connect to RJ-45
10BaseT Port
NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Instrument 1
Host
Computer 1

10BaseT
Twisted-Pair
Ethernet Hub
(Not Supplied)

NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Instrument 2

NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Instrument 3

Host
Computer 2
RJ-45
10BaseT
Outlets
(Typical)

NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

Patch Cord
RJ-45
Interface
(Typical)

Instrument 4
Twisted-Pair
Patch Cord
(Typical)

Figure 2-33. Interconnection Using 10BaseT (Twisted-Pair) Wiring

2-49

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Installing Host Computer Networking Software

2-43.

To establish Ethernet communication in your host computer, you must do the
following:
•

Install a driver for the adapter

•

Install a TCP/IP protocol stack and Windows Socket (Winsock) software

•

Set host computer networking parameters

This section discusses installing the adapter driver and the TCP/IP protocol stack
and Winsock software. You should install the networking software that is most
appropriate for your operating system.
Windows 95 and Windows NT provide drivers for many Ethernet adapters, in
addition to the protocol and Winsock software. Users of Windows for
Workgroups can get protocol and Winsock software from Microsoft.
For Windows 3.1, use the adapter driver supplied with your adapter. You may also
need to install Trumpet or Newt networking software. The NetDAQ Logger
installation program can automatically install Trumpet networking software and
your adapter driver if you plan to use NetDAQ on an isolated network and your
host computer does not already have a TCP/IP stack.
If you are installing NetDAQ Logger for general network operation on a Windows
3.1 host computer, and your computer does not already have an NDIS or ODI
adapter driver and TCP/IP and Winsock software, install Newt networking
software. See Options and Accessories for ordering information and Appendix I
for installation information.
If you plan to install Trumpet networking software, or if your computer is already
operating on a network (using the TCP/IP protocol), skip this section. To install
Newt networking software (and an appropriate adapter driver) on Windows 3.1,
skip this section and see Appendix I.
Complete the following procedure to load the Ethernet adapter driver and the
TCP/IP protocol stack and Winsock software on Windows 95. Windows NT
installation is similar. The operating system may have already detected the
Ethernet adapter and added it. If so, you can skip steps 2 and 3.
1. Open the Control Panel | Network utility via Start | Settings or My Computer.
2. Click Add...; select Adapter, then click Add....
3. Choose the manufacturer and network adapter. Click OK. The support for the
adapter gets installed.
4. Click Add..., select Protocol then click Add... Select Microsoft TCP/IP. Click
OK. The protocol support gets installed.

2-50

Preparing for Operation
Host Computer and Network Preparation

Setting Host Computer Networking Parameters

2
2-44.

This section discusses how to set your host computer networking parameters after
you install your adapter and networking software. I f you plan to install NetDAQ
Logger for general network operation, and you are just now enabling networking,
you must set the host computer’s IP address, subnet mask, and possibly its default
gateway IP address. Obtain this information from your network administrator.
If you plan to install NetDAQ Logger for isolated network operation (without
Trumpet), you must set the host computer’s IP address to 198.178.246.1xx, and its
subnet mask to 255.255.255.0. You can use any numbers for the last two digits of
the host computer IP address. Each computer on the network must have a unique
number (for example, 198.178.246.101 and 198.178.246.102).
If you plan to install NetDAQ Logger for general network operation and your host
computer is already operating on the network, skip this section.
Complete the following procedure to set the networking parameters on Windows
95 or Windows NT:
1. Open the Control Panel | Network utility via Start | Settings or My Computer.
2. Highlight TCP/IP and click Properties.
3. Select the IP Address tab. Enter the IP address and subnet mask. Click OK.
4. If your network administrator supplied a Default Gateway address, select the
Gateway tab. Enter the New Gateway address, click Add..., and click OK.
5. Click OK to exit Network Setup.
6. Reboot your computer.

2-51

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Installing NetDAQ Logger

2-45.

The NetDAQ Logger setup program automatically determines whether to install
the 32-bit (for Windows 95 and Windows NT) or 16-bit version of the software.
The setup program will ask you to select isolated or general network operation.
See “Operating a NetDAQ Data Acquisition System” in Chapter 1 of this manual
for information on network type. On Windows 3.1, the setup program will offer
you a third option: Isolated Network with Trumpet TCP/IP Stack and Winsock. If
you need to install Trumpet, refer to the section “Installing NetDAQ Logger with
Trumpet” later in this chapter.
To install NetDAQ Logger, complete the following procedure:
1. Insert Disk 1 and run the setup application (setup.exe). Click Next in the first
dialog box.
2. Select Isolated or General Network Type. Click Next.
3. Select the desired destination directory. On 32-bit systems, the default is
c:\Program Files\Fluke\netdaq. On 16-bit systems, the default is c:\netdaq.
Setup and data file storage defaults to the same directory. Use Browse if you
want to change the destination directory.

ds305s.bmp

4. Select the language of the user interface: English, French, German, or
Spanish. Click Next.
5. Select the program folder. The default name of the program folder or program
group is Fluke NetDAQ Logger. You can select or type a different name.
Click Next.
2-52

Preparing for Operation
Host Computer and Network Preparation

6. Check the setup. If the setup is correct, click Next to begin file transfer.
If you want to change the setup, click Back to go to the appropriate screen and
make the changes. Click Next and check the setup again. If it is correct, click
Next to begin file transfer.

Installing NetDAQ Logger with Trumpet

2-46.

To install 16-bit NetDAQ Logger and Trumpet, complete the following procedure:
1. Insert NetDAQ Logger Disk 1 and run the setup application (setup.exe). Click
Next in the first dialog box.
2. Select Isolated with Trumpet TCP/IP Stack and Winsock Network Type. Click
Next.
3. Select the desired destination directory. On 16-bit systems, the default is
c:\netdaq. Setup and data file storage defaults to the same directory. Use
Browse if you want to change the directory.
4. Select the language of the user interface: English, French, German, or
Spanish. Click Next.
5. Select the Ethernet adapter you are using.
Modify the four fields if necessary (see Appendix I for discussion of packet
drivers and the other fields).

ds307s.bmp

2-53

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

6. Tell the setup program whether to modify your autoexec.bat file for the packet
driver. Click Next.

7. Select the program folder. The default name of the program folder or program
group is Fluke NetDAQ Logger. You can select or type a different name.
Click Next.
8. Check the setup. If the setup is correct, click Next to begin file transfer.
If you want to change the setup, click Back to go to the appropriate screen and
make the changes. Click Next and check the setup again. If it is correct, click
Next to begin file transfer.
9. After you install NetDAQ Logger with Trumpet TCP/IP software and modify
the autoexec.bat file accordingly, reboot your computer to enable networking.

Changing from an Isolated Network to a General Network

2-47.

Use the following procedure to change from an isolated network to a general
network:
1. To remove your current NetDAQ Logger installation, click the Uninstall icon.
You may want to copy or backup your setup and data files first.
2. Reinstall NetDAQ Logger software and select General instead of Isolated.
3. Use the front panel procedures discussed earlier in this chapter to set each
NetDAQ instrument for general network operation. Also, if necessary, see

2-54

Preparing for Operation
Testing and Troubleshooting

“Installing Host Computer Networking Software” and “Setting Host
Computer Networking Parameters” to configure the host computer for general
network operation.

Installing Trend Link for Fluke (Optional)

2-48.

The Trend Link setup program automatically determines whether to install the
32-bit (for Windows 95 and Windows NT) or 16-bit version of the software. To
install Trend Link, complete the following procedure:
1. Insert Disk 1 and run the setup application (setup.exe).
2. After clicking Next to get to the second dialog box, select the language of the
User Interface. Click Next.
3. Uncheck components you do not want to install. Use Browse if you want to
change the destination directory.
4. Click Disk Space if you want to find a disk with more space. Choosing
another disk will change the destination disk. Click Next.
5. Select or type a name if you want to change the Program Folder name. Click
Next.
6. Check the installation parameters. If they are correct, click Next to begin file
transfer. If you want to change the parameters, click Back to go to the
appropriate screen and make the change. Then click Next until the file transfer
begins.
If you installed Trend Link in a destination directory other than the default,
complete the following procedure in NetDAQ Logger to locate Trend Link:
1. Open the NetDAQ Logger application and select Plot/Trend | Trend LinkDirectory.
2. Enter the directory location where you installed Trend Link.

Testing and Troubleshooting

2-49.

Use the following testing procedure to check the operation of the NetDAQ
system. Troubleshooting suggestions provide help to identify problems. See
Appendix I for additional information.

Testing the Installation

2-50.

This test procedure includes opening NetDAQ Logger, configuring and verifying
communications with the instrument, and opening Trend Link.
This procedure assumes that you have performed the following relevant steps
described earlier in this chapter:

2-55

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

•

Setting line frequency and network parameters on the instrument if the
defaults are not applicable

•

Installing an Ethernet adapter in your host computer

•

Interconnecting the host computer and the instrument

•

Installing TCP/IP software

•

Installing NetDAQ Logger

•

Installing Trend Link (optional)

Complete the following procedure:
1. Open NetDAQ Logger. The default Main Window appears as shown below.

ds302s.bmp

2-56

Preparing for Operation
Testing and Troubleshooting

2. Select Setup | Communications Config.
3. Click Add to open the Instruments on Network dialog box to add a NetDAQ
instrument to NetDAQ Logger’s list of instruments. Select the instrument
model number and enter the instrument BCN. On a general network, you must
enter the instrument IP address which you previously recorded inside the back
cover of this manual. When you finish, click OK. Repeat this step for each
instrument you are adding.
4. For a general network installation, click the Socket Port button in the
Communications Configuration File dialog box. In the Socket Port dialog box,
modify the socket port number if you cannot use the default of 4369 at your
installation (see your network administrator if you do not know).
5. Select an instrument from the Instruments on Network list. Click Verify.
When the message "Connection Successful!" appears, repeat for the next
instrument. Continue until you verify all connections. If any error messages
appear, see Troubleshooting Network Problems in the next section.
6. Close the Communications Configuration File dialog box and return to the
Main Window.
7. If you installed Trend Link, select Plot/Trend | Show Trend Link. Observe
after a few seconds that the Trend Link application appears. In Trend Link,
select File | Exit.
8. Refer to Chapter 4 Operating NetDAQ Logger for Windows to place the
instrument into operation, or close the application by selecting Setup | Exit
Application.

2-57

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Troubleshooting Network Problems

2-51.

Review the troubleshooting information below to help locate any network
problems. Table 2-4 summarizes network messages reported by NetDAQ Logger
for Windows. Table 2-5 is a summary of how to use the Ethernet LED indicators
on the instrument to identify network problems. Table 2-6 is a summary of
troubleshooting hints for problems not related to error messages or Ethernet
indicators.
Table 2-4. Network Error Messages
Reported Message

Comment

Check

Instrument is in use
by another PC, or
Socket Port number is
incorrect!

Each instrument can be
controlled by only one
host computer.

Verify that socket ports match. See
“Setting the Socket Port” in Chapters 2
and 3 of this manual.

Instrument not found!

The instrument did not
respond to the host
computer.

First, try again. If the message occurs
again, verify the following in the order
listed:
1. Instrument is powered. (The front panel
display, when quiescent, shows the
instrument BCN.)
2. Instrument is connected to the network.
3. Instrument BCN (displayed on the front
panel) matches the BCN displayed on
the Instruments on Network list.
4. Network cabling provides a solid
connection.
5. Instrument is configured for the correct
network type (isolated or general).
6. IP address of instrument matches the
IP address displayed on the
Instruments on Network list (on a
general network).
If the problem persists:
1. Move the instrument adjacent to the
host computer and make a direct
connection between the two. See
“Host Computer/Instrument Direct
Connection” in this chapter.

2-58

Preparing for Operation
Testing and Troubleshooting

Table 2-4. Network Error Messages (cont)
Reported Message

Comment

Check
2. Try Verify Communications. If it still
fails, then either the host computer
Ethernet adapter is not working or the
instrument is defective. If binding
errors occurred during booting, see
Appendix I for more information. Also
refer to "Error and Status Messages"
in Appendix J.

Connection is down!

The host computer
cannot establish
network communication.

1. Make sure the Ethernet adapter driver
and TCP/IP software are installed.
See “Installing Host Computer
Networking Software.”
2. Make sure the host computer IP
address and subnet mask are set
properly.
3. For an isolated network installation on
Windows 95 or Windows NT, the host
computer IP address must be
198.178.246.1xx.
For a general network installation, you
may need to set a default gateway
address also. See “Setting Host
Computer Networking Parameters”
earlier in this chapter.

Unable to initialize
Winsock!

The host computer
software cannot find or
open the Winsock DLL.

Make sure the TCP/IP and Winsock
software are installed. See “Installing Host
Computer Networking Software” in this
chapter.

2-59

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Table 2-5. Ethernet Indicators
Indicator

Description

Instrument (10Base2 Ethernet)
XMT (red)

Transmit Blinks when the instrument is transmitting data
on the network.

RCV (red)

Receive Blinks when there is any network activity. Steady
off means there is no network activity.

LK (amber)

Collision Remains off under normal conditions. The LED
blinks when collisions are detected. Steady blinking usually
indicates an improperly configured network (no 50-Ohm
termination, wrong type of coaxial cable, etc.).

Instrument (10BaseT Ethernet)
XMT (red)

Transmit Normal indication blinks when the instrument is
transmitting data on the network.

RCV (red)

Receive Normal indication blinks when there is any
network activity. Steady off means there is no network
activity.

LK (amber)

Link Remains on when the instrument connects to a hub or
host computer. If off, check the hub connection.

Ethernet Parallel-to LAN Adapter

2-60

Red

Power Lit when power is applied to the adapter. If not lit,
check the power connections. This indicator must be on.

Green

Activity Blinks when there is network activity, transmitting
and receiving. No blinking when the network is active
indicates no connection to the network. Cycle the computer
power to activate automatic port selection.

Preparing for Operation
Testing and Troubleshooting

Table 2-6. Troubleshooting
Problem
The Ethernet Parallel-to-LAN
Adapter is not responding
-orMouse or Keyboard is not
responding, or software
behaves abnormally.

Discussion
If you connect the Ethernet Parallel-to-LAN Adapter to the host
computer while the host computer is powered on, the adapter
will not initialize correctly. This can cause a variety of unusual
conditions. To resolve, power off the computer, check the
adapter installation, and restart the computer. Check if the
mouse interface is using the same IRQ as the parallel port.

Unable to verify
communications with an
instrument.

When you select an instrument from the Network list (using
Setup | Comm Config) to verify communications, you may
need to try verification a second time. If this does not clear the
problem, see Appendix I for more information.

General Protection Faults.

Acknowledge any General Protection faults, then restart
Windows. A General Protection fault can cause unpredictable
operation of Windows applications.

Changed instruments on the
network and the new
instrument do not respond.

If you replace an instrument on your network with the new
instrument duplicating the old instrument IP address (general
network) or BCN (isolated network), the new instrument may
not work.
This occurs because the old and new instruments have
different Ethernet addresses. When you boot the host
computer, the network software links the instrument’s IP
address and the instrument’s Ethernet address (fixed for each
instrument). If you change instruments but reuse the IP
address (general network) or BCN (isolated network) then the
changed instrument may not respond because it has the
"wrong" Ethernet address. The solution is to reboot the
computer to establish the correct link between the addresses.

2-61

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

2-62

Chapter 3

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for
Windows

Contents
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
3-9.
3-10.
3-11.
3-12.
3-13.
3-14.
3-15.
3-16.
3-17.
3-18.
3-19.
3-20.
3-21.
3-22.
3-23.
3-24.
3-25.
3-26.

Introduction ..........................................................................................
Starting NetDAQ Logger .................................................................
The Main Window ...........................................................................
Accessing NetDAQ Logger Commands ..........................................
Configuring Network Communications ...............................................
The Communications Configuration Dialog Box ............................
Adding an Instrument to the Network..............................................
Deleting an Instrument from the Network .......................................
Verifying Network Communications...............................................
Configuring the Current Setup .............................................................
Creating an Instrument Icon.............................................................
Deleting an Instrument Icon.............................................................
Designating Instruments as Group or Asynchronous.......................
Setup Files ............................................................................................
Saving the Current Setup in a File ...................................................
Opening a Setup File........................................................................
Starting NetDAQ Logger with a Setup File.....................................
Starting Logging Automatically.......................................................
NetDAQ Logger Command Line.....................................................
Configuring an Instrument ...................................................................
Dimmed Configuration Commands .................................................
The Instrument Configuration Dialog Box ......................................
Configuring Channels...........................................................................
The Channels Configuration Dialog Box ........................................
Configuring Analog Channel Functions ..........................................
Configuring Computed Channel Functions .....................................

Page
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

3-27.
3-28.
3-29.
3-30.
3-31.
3-32.
3-33.
3-34.
3-35.
3-36.
3-37.
3-38.

3-2

Defining a Computed Channel Equation ....................................
Equation Syntax ..........................................................................
Configuring Mx+B Scaling .............................................................
Configuring Alarms.........................................................................
Assigning Channel Labels ...............................................................
Configuring Mx+B Scaling From a File..............................................
Entering an Instrument’s Description ..................................................
Copying a Channels Configuration......................................................
Default Configuration Settings ............................................................
Using Configuration Lockout ..............................................................
Saving an Instrument’s Configuration as a Text File ..........................
Configuring the netdaq.ini File............................................................

3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-28
3-29

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Introduction

Introduction

3-1.

NetDAQ Logger provides an easy method for building configuration databases,
transferring the configuration to the instrument, collecting data from the
instrument, and managing the collected data.
This chapter provides instructions on managing configuration information for
NetDAQ Logger. Chapter 4 provides details on operating NetDAQ Logger:
starting and stopping the instruments, managing data files, and optimizing
performance. For in-depth details of specific topics, refer to the online help
available through the Help menu.

Starting NetDAQ Logger

3-2.

NetDAQ Logger is a standard Windows application, and is opened in the same
manner as other Windows applications. You can use Start | Programs, doubleclick on a setup file shortcut on the Windows desktop, or double-click on a setup
file name in the Windows Explorer or File Manager.

The Main Window

3-3.

When you open NetDAQ Logger, its Main Window appears, from which you can
access all commands and features. The toolbar provides quick access to
commonly used commands. The icon bar, below the toolbar, contains a NetDAQ
icon for each configured instrument. The icon shows the BCN of the instrument
and indicates whether or not NetDAQ Logger is currently logging data from that
instrument.
NetDAQ Logger stores instrument configuration information in a setup file. The
setup file contains the configuration information for every instrument represented
on the icon bar. See “Setup Files” in this chapter for more information. Figure 3-1
shows the Main Window with the setup file setup02 loaded.
The body of the main window shows the instrument configuration for one
NetDAQ instrument. If you select the icon for another instrument, the main
windows will show its configuration.

Accessing NetDAQ Logger Commands

3-4.

NetDAQ Logger uses standard Windows menus and dialog boxes. This chapter
briefly describes the dialog boxes. The online help file has more detail.

3-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds002s.bmp

Figure 3-1. NetDAQ Logger Main Window

Configuring Network Communications

3-5.

Before you can configure the instruments on your network and create setup files
for these instrument configurations, you must configure your network
communications. This involves identifying the instruments by their BCN numbers
and, on a general network, their IP addresses.
Network configuration data is not saved as part of the setup files but is its own
separate file, ccf.cfg, maintained by NetDAQ Logger. This file is common to
all setup files and any changes you make to the ccf.cfg file affect all setup files.
Each PC on which you install NetDAQ Logger has a ccf.cfg file.

3-4

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Configuring Network Communications

The Communications Configuration Dialog Box

3-6.

Use the Communications Configuration dialog box (Figure 3-2) to record your
network configuration.
To open the Communications Configuration dialog box, select
Setup | Communications Config or click the Communications Configuration
toolbar button.
The dialog box lets you view the instruments currently on the network, modify
them, and add or delete instruments.

ds009s.bmp

Figure 3-2. Communications Configuration Dialog Box

Adding an Instrument to the Network

3-7.

Complete the following procedure to add an instrument to the Instruments on
Network list:
1. Select Setup | Communications Config to open the Communications
Configuration File dialog box. Click Add to open the Instrument On Network
dialog box.
2. Enter the instrument BCN in the Base Channel Number box. Click the correct
model: 2640A or 2645A. For general network operation, enter the instrument
IP Address.

3-5

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds007s.bmp

3. Click OK to return to the Communications Configuration File dialog box,
which now lists the new instrument. For a general network, the IP address
appears after the instrument model number.
4. If you are on a general network, you may need to change the socket port if a
conflict occurs with other network operations.
To change the socket port from its default value of 4369, click Socket Port to
open the dialog box shown below The socket port entry must be a number
between 1024 and 65535. Click OK when finished.

ds010s.bmp

5. Click Close to return to the Main Window.

3-6

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Configuring the Current Setup

Deleting an Instrument from the Network

3-8.

Complete the following procedure to remove an instrument from the Instruments
on Network List, which is common to all setup files. Any instruments you delete
in this procedure will no longer be accessible to any setup file. Do not use this
procedure simply to remove an instrument icon from the Icon Bar. To remove an
instrument icon, see “Deleting an Instrument Icon.”
1. Select Setup | Communications Config to open the Communications
Configuration File dialog box.
2. Highlight the instrument you want to remove.
3. Click Delete to remove a single instrument, or click Delete All to remove all
instruments. A warning message appears asking you to confirm whether you
wish to delete the instruments.
4. Click Close to return to the Main Window.

Verifying Network Communications

3-9.

Complete the following procedure to verify communications with any instrument
on the Instruments on Network List.
1. In the Communications Configuration File dialog box, highlight the
instrument you want to verify in the Instruments on Network List.
2. Click Verify. NetDAQ Logger attempts to connect to the instrument and
displays a message indicating success or failure.
3. Click Close to return to the Main Window.

3-7

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Configuring the Current Setup

3-10.

NetDAQ Logger keeps track of all instrument configuration information (e.g.,
reading rate and measurement functions) for all the instruments represented on the
icon bar. This collection of information is called the current setup. NetDAQ
Logger allows you to save the current setup to a file and open previously saved
setup files. You can start up NetDAQ Logger by opening a setup file. You can
also set up NetDAQ Logger to automatically load a particular setup file and,
optionally, start logging automatically.
When you first start NetDAQ Logger following installation, NetDAQ Logger
displays a default current setup. You can add instruments to the setup from the
Instrument on Network list (see Creating an Instrument Icon) and you can delete
instruments from the current setup (see Deleting an Instrument Icon). You can
also designate two or more instruments as a group instrument.
After you add an instrument to the current setup, you can set the various
configuration parameters for that instrument and you can initiate data logging for
that instrument.
After you remove an instrument from the current setup, NetDAQ Logger discards
that instrument’s configuration information from the current setup. If you add the
instrument back to the current setup, it will have default configuration settings.

Creating an Instrument Icon

3-11.

To create an instrument icon, use the following procedure:
1. Select Setup | Create Instrument Icon to open the Create Instrument Icon
dialog box. If you receive the message, “No instruments are available for
association!,” you must first select Setup | Communication Config. to add
instruments to the Instruments on Network list. See “Configuring Network
Communications” for details.
2. Select the instrument from the Available Instruments list, where the
instruments are listed by BCN number. If the instrument you want to add is
not listed, then either it already has an icon or it is not on the Instruments on
Network List.

3-8

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Configuring the Current Setup

ds004s.bmp

Deleting an Instrument Icon

3-12.

To delete an instrument icon, select Setup | Delete Instrument Icon. A message
appears warning you that the instrument’s configuration will be lost. If you
choose to delete the icon, it will disappear from the Icon Bar in the Main Window.

Designating Instruments as Group or Asynchronous

3-13.

You can designate instruments as grouped or asynchronous (standalone). NetDAQ
Logger treats grouped instruments as one large instrument, logging all their scan
data to one data file. A group consists of one Master instrument, and one or more
Slaves. Scanning for the entire group is controlled by the configuration of the
Master instrument.
For the ASCII and binary file formats, NetDAQ Logger records each Master scan
along with the set of scans from the Slave instruments that match closest in time
to the Master scan. NetDAQ Logger uses the timestamp for the Master as the
timestamp for the whole scan record. NetDAQ Logger can best associate the
Slave data with the correct timestamp when scanning for all the grouped
instruments is properly synchronized. No merging of data is performed when
recording in the TL format but proper synchronization is still important for
accurate correlation of data between instruments. Use the following guidelines to
minimize non-synchronization errors.
•

Wired Group
To reliably synchronize a group instrument, connect the TO (Trigger Out) line
of the Master to the TI (Trigger In) of each Slave (along with a common
connection to the ground terminals). Check the “Group is Externally Wired”
check box in the Group Instruments dialog box. See “External Wiring for a
Group Instruments” in Chapter 2 of this manual.
3-9

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

When a grouped instrument is externally wired, you can select any
combination of trigger types for the Master instrument: Interval Trigger,
External Trigger, or Alarm Trigger. NetDAQ Logger configures the Slaves
for External Trigger so they will respond to the trigger signal from the Master.
•

Unwired Group
If you cannot wire the grouped instrument, select only the Interval Trigger for
the Master. NetDAQ Logger automatically sets all Slaves to use the Interval
Trigger with the same Interval 1 value as the Master. If any additional trigger
types are selected for the Master, then additional scans might be triggered in
the Master that are not triggered in the Slaves. This could cause Slave scan
data to be duplicated with more than one Master scan.
To use this method, uncheck the “Group is Externally Wired” check box in
the Group Instruments dialog box.

To designate a group instrument, complete the following procedure:
1. Select Setup | Group Instruments to open the Group Instruments dialog box.

ds016s.bmp

2. From the Instruments list, designate each instrument as Master, Slave, or
Asynchronous:

3-10

•

Highlight the Master instrument and select the Master button. Designate
the Slaves in a similar fashion. Check the Group is Externally Wired box
if applicable.

•

Highlight the independent instruments, and select the Async button.

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Setup Files

Setup Files

3-14.

NetDAQ Logger allows you to save the current setup in a file. You can open the
setup file later to reestablish the saved setup. Using setup files, you can create any
number of setups in advance and use them when applicable.
You can set up your system so that you can activate NetDAQ Logger by opening
a setup file. With the Windows 95 user interface, you can create shortcuts to setup
files. With the Windows 3.1 user interface, you can associate setup files (.stp file
extension) with NetDAQ Logger.
You can use command line arguments for NetDAQ Logger so that, when
activated, NetDAQ Logger automatically opens a specified setup file. You can
also set it up to start logging when activated.

Saving the Current Setup in a File

3-15.

Each time you change an instrument’s configuration, you change the current
setup. You can save these changes to a setup file. If you want to retain the old
configuration, you can save the current setup under a new name, thereby creating
a new file, leaving the old one intact.
•

To save the current setup to the setup file of the same name, select Setup |
Save Setup or click the Save Setup toolbar button. If the file does not exist, a
standard Windows Save Setup As dialog box appears permitting you to enter
the file name.

•

To save the current setup to a new file, select Setup | Save Setup As. Enter the
desired setup name in the File Name box and modify the directory path as
required. (For example, setup04.stp as shown below.) Click Save.

3-11

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds039s.bmp

Opening a Setup File

3-16.

If NetDAQ Logger is already active, you can load a saved setup into the current
setup by opening a setup file. Before you open a setup file, you must stop logging
on all instruments. Use any of the following methods to open a setup file.

3-12

•

Select Setup | Open Setup to open the Open Setup dialog box. Highlight the
desired setup file from the list of file names, or enter the file name in the File
Name box and click on Open.

•

If the desired setup file has been opened recently, you can simply select its
name in the Setup menu’s list of recently used files.

•

On Windows 95, if you have created a shortcut for the desired setup file, you
can drag the shortcut from the Desktop into NetDAQ Logger to open the setup
file.

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Setup Files

ds001s.bmp

Starting NetDAQ Logger with a Setup File

3-17.

On Windows 95, there are several ways to start NetDAQ Logger and open a
specific setup file at the same time:
•

In the Windows Explorer or My Computer, you can double-click on the name
of the desired setup file. You must start NetDAQ Logger itself once after
installation before you can start it via a setup file.

•

You can double-click on a shortcut to a setup file which you have previously
placed on the Desktop. To create a shortcut in Windows Explorer, complete
the following procedure:
1. Highlight the setup file name and use the right mouse button to create a
shortcut.
2. Drag the shortcut to the desktop. You must start NetDAQ Logger itself
once after installation before you can start it via a setup file shortcut.

•

You can create a shortcut to NetDAQ Logger, place it on the desktop, and
modify the command line in its properties to open a setup file (see “NetDAQ
Logger Command Line” for the command lines). You can then double-click
on the shortcut icon to start NetDAQ Logger. To create and modify the
shortcut, complete the following procedure:
1. Highlight the NetDAQ executable file in the Windows Explorer and use
the right mouse button to create a shortcut.
2. Drag the shortcut to the Desktop and use the right mouse button to access
its properties.

3-13

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

3. On the Shortcut tab, add the setup file name to the end of the command
line in the Target box (see “NetDAQ Logger Command Line” for the
command lines).
•

You can use Start | Settings | Taskbar to modify the command line of NetDAQ
Logger to open a setup file whenever you start NetDAQ Logger from Start |
Programs. Complete the following procedure:
1. In the Taskbar Properties dialog box, select the Start Menu Programs tab
and click Advanced.
2. Find and highlight the NetDAQ Logger shortcut and use the right mouse
button to access its properties.
3. On the Shortcut tab, add the setup file name to the end of the command
line in the Target box (see “NetDAQ Logger Command Line” for the
command lines).

On Windows 3.1, you can start NetDAQ Logger with a setup file as follows:
•

You can double-click on a setup file name in the File Manager. Before this
will work, you must start NetDAQ Logger itself once after installation (from
Program Manager or File Manager) and associate the .stp file extension with
NetDAQ Logger. To associate the .stp file extension, use File Manager to
highlight a setup file. Select File | Associate and click on Browse to enter the
location of the NetDAQ Logger executable.

•

You can modify the command line of NetDAQ Logger so that it will always
open a particular setup file when started from Program Manger or File
Manager (see “NetDAQ Logger Command Line” for the command lines). To
modify the command line, highlight the NetDAQ Logger icon in Program
Manager, select File | Properties, and change the command line.

Starting Logging Automatically

3-18.

In addition to naming a setup file for NetDAQ Logger to open automatically, you
can set a flag telling NetDAQ Logger to start logging automatically for all
instruments in the setup. Use the methods described above to modify the
command line and add the /g flag as shown below.

NetDAQ Logger Command Line

3-19.

The command line for activating NetDAQ Logger has the following format. For
the 16-bit version, the executable name is netdaq as opposed to netdaq32. On
Windows 3.1, the executable name and setup file do not have quotation marks.
“pathname\netdaq32” [“setupfilename”] [/g] [/c]

3-14

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Configuring an Instrument

To activate NetDAQ Logger with the default setup:
“pathname\netdaq32”
To activate NetDAQ Logger with a specific setup file (for example, mysetup.stp):
“pathname\netdaq32” “mysetup.stp”
To activate NetDAQ Logger with a specific setup file and start logging
automatically:
“pathname\netdaq32” “mysetup.stp” /g
To add calibration to the Utilities menu of NetDAQ Logger:
“pathname\netdaq32” /c

Configuring an Instrument

3-20.

Once you have set up the network list, and created icons and grouped instruments
necessary for your setup, you can configure the instruments or instrument group.
You can set instrument-level parameters such as reading rate and trigger types,
and channel parameters such as function, Mx+B scaling, and alarms.
All configuration operations apply to the instrument which is selected on the icon
bar.

Dimmed Configuration Commands

3-21.

Some operations in NetDAQ Logger are mutually exclusive. When a command is
unavailable, its menu entry or toolbar icon will be grayed out. For example you
cannot configure an instrument while it is scanning. Also, checking the
Configuration Lockout command in the Options menu prevents you from
modifying the configuration.

The Instrument Configuration Dialog Box

3-22.

All instrument configuration procedures start with the Instrument Configuration
dialog box shown in Figure 3-3. When you create a new instrument icon, this
dialog box shows the default configuration settings.
Open the Instrument configuration dialog box by double-clicking anywhere in the
Instrument Configuration area of the Main Window (the upper portion), pressing
the Instrument Configuration toolbar button or selecting Setup | Instrument
Configuration. Complete the following procedure to configure the instrument.

3-15

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds017s.bmp

Figure 3-3. Instrument Configuration Dialog Box

1. Select Celsius or Fahrenheit to use as temperature units for thermocouple and
RTD temperature measurements.
2. Select a monitor channel. This channel will automatically be displayed on the
instrument’s front panel when logging is started.
3. Check Totalizer Debounce to prevent false counts that can occur when the
Totalizer input is from contact closures.
4. Select the desired trigger types and enter intervals in seconds (00000.000 to
86400.000).
The NetDAQ instrument performs a scan when it detects a trigger event. The
source of the trigger event depends on the combination of trigger types
configured in the instrument. The characteristics for each trigger type and
trigger type combination are as follows.
•

Interval Only
A scan is triggered immediately after logging starts. Each successive scan
is triggered after Interval 1 elapses since the start of the previous scan.

3-16

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Configuring an Instrument

•

External Only
A scan is triggered immediately after the external trigger input is pulled
low (active). While the external trigger line remains low, each successive
scan is triggered after Interval 2 elapses since the start of the previous
scan.

•

Alarm Only
A scan is triggered when the instrument detects an alarm condition on a
channel being used as an alarm trigger. As long as at least one alarm
trigger channel is in alarm, each successive scan is triggered after Interval
2 has elapsed. The instrument performs background scanning of alarm
trigger channels, according to Interval 5, until it detects an alarm
condition. The Alarm Checking Interval (Interval 3) is configurable in the
netdaq.ini file. Defaults are 1 second (2640A) and 0.1 second (2645A).

When the external trigger is combined with the alarm trigger, scans are
triggered at the Interval 2 rate as long as either the external trigger line is low
or at least one alarm trigger channel is in alarm.
When the interval trigger is combined with the external trigger and/or the
alarm trigger, scans are triggered at the Interval 2 rate when the conditions are
met for the external trigger and/or the alarm trigger, and at the Interval 1 rate
at all other times.
5. Select the slow reading rate for high precision, the fast reading rate for high
speed, or the medium reading for a balance of the two. The actual number of
readings per second depends on the selected functions.
6. Enable Drift Correction to have the instrument automatically correct
measurements for drift due to changes in instrument temperature and
humidity. You can disable Drift Correction to obtain a faster scan rate when
you have set the reading rate to fast, but this may reduce long-term accuracy.
7. Enable Trigger Out (TO) to have the instrument set the rear-panel TO line to
logic low for 125 µs each time a scan starts. Disable Trigger Out if you are not
using it so that the instrument may achieve maximum scanning speeds.
NetDAQ Logger automatically enables the trigger out when an instrument is
the Master of an externally wired group.
8. Enable and enter a value for the duration if you would like NetDAQ Logger to
automatically shut down logging for the instrument after the specified time
has elapsed since the start of logging.

3-17

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Configuring Channels

3-23.

These procedures provide instructions for configuring an instrument’s analog
channels and computed channels. These instructions include selecting the
measurement function, enabling Mx+B scaling, configuring alarms, and entering
channel labels.

The Channels Configuration Dialog Box

3-24.

All channels configuration procedures start with the Channels Configuration
dialog box shown in Figure 3-4.
To open the Channels Configuration dialog box, click
Instrument Configuration | Channels or double-click anywhere in the Channels
Configuration area of the Main Window (the lower portion).

ds020s.bmp

Figure 3-4. Channels Configuration Dialog Box

3-18

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Configuring Channels

Configuring Analog Channel Functions

3-25.

Analog channel functions include volts dc, volts ac, ohms, temperature
(thermocouple and RTD), frequency, and dc current. To configure analog channel
functions, complete the following procedure:
1. Select an analog channel in the Channels Configuration dialog box.
2. Click Function to open the Function Selection dialog box.
3. Select the function and range. If desired, enter a custom nine-character Units
Label. The default units are VDC, VAC, Ohms, °C or °F, Hz, Amps (0-100
mA current range), and Percent (4-20 mA current range).
If the function is Current, you can enter the resistance of the current shunt.
The range is 10 to 250 Ohms and the default is 10 Ohms. If the function is
RTD-2W or RTD-4W, you can enter R0, the RTD Ice point. The range is 10
to 1010 Ohms and the default is 100 Ohms. If the range is Custom-385, you
can enter the RTD probe constant, Alpha. The range is 0.00374 to 0.00393
and the default is 0.00385055 . See Appendix D for more information.
If the function is TC, you can check Open Thermocouple Detect. If selected,
the instrument monitors thermocouple continuity. If continuity is lost, otc
appears on the instrument front panel during monitor for the thermocouple,
“Open TC” appears in the Spy and Quick Plot windows, and the data file
records the value 9.0E+9. If not selected, an open thermocouple may result in
+OL on the instrument front panel during monitor. “+Overload” appears in
the Spy and Quick Plot windows and the data file records the value 1.0E+9.
4. Click OK.

ds018s.bmp

3-19

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Configuring Computed Channel Functions

3-26.

Computed channel functions include average, difference, difference from average,
and equation. To select computed channel functions, complete the following
procedure:
1. Select a computed channel in the Channels Configuration dialog box.
2. Click Function to open the Computed Function dialog box.
3. Select the function, the channels, and, if desired, a custom Units Label. For
example, averaging analog channels 1 and 2 is as shown below.
4. Click OK.

ds019s.bmp

Defining a Computed Channel Equation
To define a mathematical equation for a computed channel, complete the
following procedure:
1. In the Equation field at the bottom of the box, enter the equation. See
“Equation Syntax” for information on entering equations.
2. Click OK to store the equation and return to the Channels Configuration
dialog box.

3-20

3-27.

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Configuring Channels

3. If the equation contains an error, an error message appears. Click OK in the
error message box. If possible, NetDAQ Logger highlights the location of the
error in the equation. Change the equation as necessary and click OK to return
to the Channels Configuration dialog box.
4. Click OK to return to the Instrument Configuration dialog box.
5. If all of the defined equations for this instrument exceed the allowed storage
space (1000 bytes), an error message appears. If this happens, reopen the
Functions dialog box and redefine or eliminate equations as necessary.

Equation Syntax

3-28.

Use the following guidelines to define new equations or modify existing ones.
Each equation can be up to 100 characters in length, and each must include a
reference to at least one other configured channel. Examples of equations are
shown below:
(-2*c21/c2)/(2*(1.32-(c21/c2)*1.32))
20 * log(C1/C2)
Operands can be integer or real constants, or analog or computed channels. Each
channel reference contains the letter ‘c’ followed by a one-or-two-digit channel
number. All referenced channel numbers must be lower-numbered than the
channel being defined.
Examples of operands are shown below. (The decimal point character corresponds
to your Windows International settings.)
1.5e5
-32.407
2.57E-3

c21
C1
c02

Operations are computations or functions performed on the operands. Refer to the
allowed operations below, shown in order of increasing precedence. Operators in
the same row have the same precedence.
+ * /
**
unary +

unary -

abs

exp

int

log

sqr

Delimiting the argument of a function requires parentheses. Use them also to
enforce, override, or clarify precedence. You may nest up to three sets of
parentheses. The following examples demonstrate proper and improper use of
nested parentheses:
3-21

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Allowed

Not Allowed

(-2*c21/c2)/(2*((c1+1)-(c21/c2)*(c1-1)))

(-2*(abs(c1/(c2-c3))))

See Appendix E for syntax definition and more detailed information.

Configuring Mx+B Scaling

3-29.

Mx+B scaling multiplies a measurement by a multiplier (M) and then applies an
offset (B). For example, Mx+B scaling of 100x+50 applied to a measured value of
1.15 would result in a reading of 100(1.15)+50=165.
You can configure both analog and computed channels to use Mx+B scaling.
You can save values for M and B in a separate file and load directly from the file
using Setup | Load Mx+B File. See “Configuring Mx+B Scaling from a File” for
more information.
To configure Mx+B scaling, complete the following procedure:
1. Select the desired channels and click the Mx+B button to open the Mx+B
Configuration dialog box. Enter the M and B values.

ds023s.bmp

2. To have NetDAQ Logger calculate the Mx+B values, click Calculate M, B
from Range Values, and enter the input and scaled range values. Click OK.

3-22

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Configuring Channels

ds024s.bmp

Configuring Alarms

3-30.

Each channel has two alarms, each of which may be set to HI, LO, or OFF. An
alarm condition occurs when a measurement falls below a low alarm value (LO
alarm) or rises above a high alarm value (HI alarm). NetDAQ Logger records all
alarm conditions in the data file.
If a channel is configured for Mx+B scaling, the instrument will scale the
measurement values before comparing that to the alarm limits.
To configure alarms, complete the following procedure:
1. Select the desired channels and click the Alarms button to open the Alarms
Configuration dialog box.

ds025s.bmp

2. Set each alarm to HI, LO, or OFF and enter alarm values.

3-23

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

3. Select a digital output if you would like to associate an alarm with a digital
I/O line. The instrument will set the digital I/O line to a TTL logic low for as
long as the alarm conditions is met.
4. Check Use Channel as Alarm Trigger if you would like an alarm condition on
this channel to trigger scanning. (Alarm Trigger must also be enabled in the
Instrument configuration dialog box.)

Assigning Channel Labels

3-31.

To assign a label for any channel, highlight a channel, type a label (15 characters
maximum) in the Channel Label field, and click Apply Label.
Channel labels appear in the Main Window, the Spy Channel Selection dialog
box, Quick Plot Setup, Quick Plot window, and Trend Link chart.

Configuring Mx+B Scaling From a File

3-32.

Complete the following procedure to load Mx+ B values from a file into the
current setup for the selected instrument.
1. Select the desired instrument icon on the Icon Bar.
2. Select Setup | Load Mx+B File to open the Load Mx+B File dialog box.
3. Select the desired Mx+B file from the File Name list, or enter the file name in
the File name box. Modify the directory path as required. For example, select
mxb01.txt as shown below:

ds006s.bmp

4. Click Open to load the file and return to the Main Window. The Mx+B status
of the Channels Configuration area of the Main Window will be updated
accordingly.

3-24

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Entering an Instrument’s Description

The values in the Mx+B file must have the following format:

Each parameter is separated by spaces or tabs and each definition ends with a
carriage return () and a line feed (). The decimal point character
corresponds to your Windows International settings. For example, a file may
contain the following lines:
2 1.8 32
10 2 1
This sample file indicates that, for the instrument selected on the Icon Bar,
channel 2 has its M value set to 1.8 and its B value set to 32. Channel 10 of the
currently selected instrument has its M value set to 2 and its B value set to 1.
M and B values are not set if the corresponding channel is configured as OFF.
If an error occurs when loading the Mx+B file, NetDAQ Logger displays an error
message and does not load any values for M and B. If possible, the error message
displays the line where the error occurred.
After loading the file, NetDAQ Logger sets M and B values for the channels of
the instrument currently selected on the Icon Bar.

Entering an Instrument’s Description

3-33.

If you provide a textual instrument description, it will appear in the Main
Window. Complete the following procedure to enter an instrument description.
Up to 79 characters are allowed.
1. Highlight the desired instrument icon on the Icon Bar.
2. Select Setup | Instrument Description.
3. Enter the text characters in the Description box as shown in the following
example.

ds033s.eps

4. Click OK to return to the Main Window that now includes the instrument
description.
3-25

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds034s.bmp

Copying a Channels Configuration

3-34.

Complete the following procedure to copy a complete instrument channels
configuration from one instrument to another instrument. This includes channel
Functions, Mx+B Scaling, Alarms, and Channel Labels. For example, if you set
up three instruments with identical channel configurations, you can configure one
instrument and then copy the channels configuration to the other two instruments.
1. Highlight the icon of the source instrument on the Icon Bar.
2. Select Setup | Copy Channels to open the Copy Channels dialog box.
3. Select the destination instrument(s) from the Copy Channels To list. For
example, to copy the channels configuration of instrument 02 to instruments
01 and 03, select instrument 02 as the source instrument (Step 1), then select
instruments 01 and 03 in the Copy Channels dialog box (below).

ds026s.bmp

4. Click OK to copy the configuration and return to the Main Window.
3-26

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Default Configuration Settings

Default Configuration Settings

3-35.

When you create a new instrument icon, NetDAQ Logger initializes the settings
for that instrument to the default parameters. (See Table 3-1.)
Table 3-1. NetDAQ Logger Default Instrument Configuration
Parameter

Default Values

Description:

None

Group Status:

Asynchronous

Trigger Type

Interval Trigger

Interval 1:

1 sec

Interval 2:

0.1 sec

Reading Rate:

Slow (High Res)

Drift Correction:

Enabled

Trigger Out:

Disabled

Duration:

Disabled (Infinite)

Temperature Units:

Celsius

Monitor Chan:

None

Totalizer Debounce:

Yes

Data File:

None

File Comment:

None

File Mode:

Append

File Rollover:

None

Low Disk Space:

Rollover on 1000K bytes

Deadband Values:

All Zero

Batch Name:

None (file name is used)

Batch Definition:

Entire logging session

Channels:

Channels 1-3: VDC 3V
Channels 4-30: OFF
All Off
All Off

MX+B:
Alarms

3-27

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Using Configuration Lockout

3-36.

Use The Configuration Lockout feature to prevent accidental instrument
configuration changes. The following commands in the Setup menu will be
disabled: Create Instrument Icon, Delete Instrument Icon, Group Instruments,
Communications Config, Instrument Description, Instrument Configuration, Load
MxB+ File, and Copy Channels.
Select Options | Configuration Lockout to toggle this feature on and off.

Saving an Instrument’s Configuration as a Text File

3-37.

Complete the following procedure to save the instrument configuration displayed
in the Main Window as a text file. NetDAQ Logger cannot load configuration
data from a configuration text file.
1. Highlight the desired instrument icon on the Icon Bar. The instrument’s
configuration appears in the Main Window.
2. Select Setup | Save Inst. Config. Text to open the Save Instrument
Configuration Text dialog box shown below.

ds040s.bmp

3. Enter the desired text file name in the File Name box and modify the directory
path as required. Click Save.

3-28

Configuring NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Configuring the netdaq.ini File

The configuration file is now saved as an ASCII text file. You can open the text
file for viewing or printing from an application such as Notepad. Refer to Figure
3-5 for a typical text file.
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION - 02
Description:
(None)
Model:
2640A
Trigger Type:
Interval
Interval 1:
1.000 sec
Interval 2:
NA
Reading Rate:
Slow (High Res.)
Drift Correction:
Yes
Duration:
NA
Temp Units:
Celsius
Monitor Chan:
None
Total Debounce:
Yes
Data File:
None
File Mode:
NA
File Format:
NA
Chan
0101
0102
0103

Function
VDC
VDC
VDC

Range
3V
3V
3V

Alarm 1
OFF
OFF
OFF

Alarm 2
OFF
OFF
OFF

Trg
NA
NA
NA

Mx+B
OFF
OFF
OFF

Units
VDC
VDC
VDC

Label
Label
Label
Label

Figure 3-5. Configuration Text File

Configuring the netdaq.ini File

3-38.

You can modify the netdaq.ini file in the same manner as any text file. Exit
and restart NetDAQ Logger to put the changes into effect. Refer to the default
netdaq.ini file shown below.
[Defaults]
MemoryWrapAround=True
AlarmCheckingIntvl_2640A=1.000
AlarmCheckingIntvl_2645A=0.100
AutoScanDisable=True
CommTimeout=10
[TL Defaults]
TLDir=c:\Program Files\Fluke\tl
TLFile=tl32.exe
TLTitle=Trend Link for Fluke

3-29

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

The following describes the parameters in the netdaq.ini file. If you alter any
of the settings, save the old file under a different name in case you want to revert
back to the default settings.
•

MemoryWrapAround=True
This is the instruction for the instrument to follow if its internal scan queue
becomes full. When set to true, the instrument overwrites the oldest readings
in the buffer. When set to false, the instrument discards the latest readings.

•

AlarmCheckingIntvl_2640A=1.000
When you select Alarm Trigger for a 2640A instrument, channels eligible for
alarm triggering are checked for alarms at this interval. The minimum is 0.5
seconds and the maximum is 86400 seconds (24 hours).

•

AlarmCheckingIntvl_2645A=0.100
When you select Alarm Trigger for a 2645A instrument, channels eligible for
alarm triggering are checked for alarms at this interval. The minimum is 0.05
seconds and the maximum is 86400 seconds (24 hours).

•

AutoScanDisable=True
When set to true, an instrument automatically disables scanning if its scan
queue is full and it has not received any commands from the host for 5
minutes. This feature helps extend the lifetime of relays in the instrument.

•

CommTimeout=10
This is the duration NetDAQ Logger allows for an instrument to respond to a
command. If there is no response from an instrument after nn seconds,
NetDAQ Logger displays an error. The minimum is 3 seconds and the
maximum is 1000 seconds.

•

TLDir=c:\Program Files\Fluke\tl
This is the directory for the Trend Link application. If Trend Link is located
somewhere else, you are prompted for the name of the actual directory the
next time you perform Trend Link related activities in NetDAQ Logger. You
may also modify this setting by selecting Plot/Trend | Trend Link Directory.

•

TLFile=tl32.exe
This is the file in TLDir that executes when the you select Plot/Trend | Show
Trend Link.

•

TLTitle=Trend Link for Fluke
This is the title of the Trend window that appears when TLFile executes.

3-30

Chapter 4

Operating NetDAQ Logger for
Windows

Contents
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
4-9.
4-10.
4-11.
4-12.
4-13.
4-14.
4-15.
4-16.
4-17.
4-18.
4-19.
4-20.
4-21.
4-22.
4-23.
4-24.

Introduction ..........................................................................................
Starting and Stopping Logging.............................................................
Starting or Stopping all Instruments at Once ...................................
Starting or Stopping a Group Instrument .........................................
Clearing an Instrument’s Totalizer Value........................................
Simulated Logging ...........................................................................
Selecting an Instrument’s Scanning Duration..................................
Real-Time Displays ..............................................................................
The Logging Status Window ...........................................................
The Readings Table Window...........................................................
The Spy Window .............................................................................
Quick Plot ........................................................................................
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) Operations ...................................
Data Files..............................................................................................
Configuring a Data File....................................................................
Converting Data Files ......................................................................
Viewing and Printing a Data File.....................................................
Optimizing Performance ......................................................................
Optimizing Performance for Speed..................................................
Increasing Scanning Rate ............................................................
Increasing Data Transmission and Storage Rate .........................
Increasing Network Speed ...........................................................
Optimizing Performance for Precision. ...........................................
Using Online Help................................................................................

Page
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-18
4-18
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-21

4-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

4-2

Operating NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Introduction

Introduction

4-1.

This chapter provides instructions for operating your system using NetDAQ
Logger after you have set up communications and configured the instruments.
This includes starting and stopping logging, viewing and storing your data, and
optimizing system performance.

Starting and Stopping Logging

4-2.

You can start or stop logging for an individual instrument, a group instrument (by
starting or stopping the Master), or all instruments.
To start logging for an individual instrument, complete the following procedure:
1. Select the instrument’s icon. If the icon indicates “LOG” or “SIM,” the
instrument is already logging.
2. Select the Logging | Start Instrument or click the Start Instrument button on
the toolbar. If the menu command and button are dimmed, the instrument is
already logging, or it is a Slave instrument and you must start the Master.

ds053s.bmp

4-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

To stop logging for an individual instrument, complete the following procedure:
1. Select the instrument’s icon.
2. Select Logging | Stop Instrument or click the Stop Instrument button on the
toolbar. If the menu command and button are dimmed, the instrument is not
logging, or it is a Slave and you must stop the Master.

Starting or Stopping all Instruments at Once

4-3.

To start logging for all of the instruments in the current setup, select Logging |
Start all Instruments or click the Start all Instruments button on the toolbar. If the
menu command and toolbar button are dimmed, the instruments are already
logging.
To stop logging for all instruments in the current setup, select Logging | Stop All
Instruments or click the Stop All Instruments button on the toolbar. If the menu
command and toolbar button are dimmed, the instruments are not logging.

Starting or Stopping a Group Instrument

4-4.

To start logging for a group instrument, complete the following procedure:
1. Select the icon for the Master instrument. If the icon says “LOG” or “SIM,”
the instrument is already logging.
2. Select Logging | Start Instrument or click the Start Instrument button on the
toolbar. If the menu command and the toolbar button are dimmed, the
instrument is already logging.

ds055s.bmp

To stop logging for a group instrument, complete the following procedure:
1. Select the icon for the Master instrument.
2. Select Logging | Stop Instrument or click the Stop Instrument button on the
toolbar. If the menu command and the toolbar button are dimmed, the
instrument is not logging.

4-4

Operating NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Starting and Stopping Logging

Clearing an Instrument’s Totalizer Value

4-5.

If you check Logging | Clear Totalizer on Start, NetDAQ Logger will clear the
totalizer count in each instrument when you start logging for that instrument.
Otherwise, the totalizer value in the instrument will not be cleared.

Simulated Logging

4-6.

If you check Logging | Simulate Logging on Start, NetDAQ Logger will simulate
all data collection rather than connecting to the instrument(s). When NetDAQ
Logger is simulating data collection for one or more instruments, their icons will
read “SIM” instead of “LOG.”

ds057s.bmp

Selecting an Instrument’s Scanning Duration

4-7.

Complete the following procedure to select a duration for instrument scanning.
NetDAQ Logger will automatically stop logging for the instrument after the
specified interval of time has elapsed since the start of logging.
1. Highlight the desired instrument icon.
2. Select Setup | Instrument Config to open the Instrument Configuration dialog
box (below).

4-5

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds029s.bmp

3. Check Stop Scanning after Interval. Enter the hours/minutes/seconds for the
duration. The maximum entry is 999 hours, 99 minutes, 99 seconds
(999:99:99).
4. Click OK to return to the Main Window.

Real-Time Displays

4-8.

The Real-Time displays let you monitor data as it is being collected. The
following displays are available:

4-6

•

Logging Status displays the status of data collection during real scanning or
simulated scanning.

•

Readings Table displays the latest scan data collected from the currently
selected instrument.

•

Spy triggers and collects its own measurements from up to eight channels
from any combination of instruments. These measurements are performed in
the instrument independent of any scanning.

•

Quick Plot provides a quick visual trend of eight channels.

Operating NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Real-Time Displays

•

Trend Link provides a wide range of features for trending real time data or
previously collected data. See Chapter 5 of this manual for more information
on Trend Link.

•

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) links measurement data to other applications
such as a spreadsheet, with the measurements appearing in other applications
as they are being collected.

•

The instrument front panel provides a display of channel readings, digital I/O
status, or totalizer status. See Chapter 2 of this manual for more information.

The Logging Status Window

4-9.

The Logging Status window, when opened, remains on top of the Main Window.
The Options menu in the Main Window provides three selections for the Logging
Status window:
•

To display the Logging Status window immediately, click Options | Show
Logging Status.

•

To have the Logging Status window appear when logging starts for one or
more instruments, check Show Logging Status on Start.

•

To have the Logging Status window appear when a channel goes into alarm
during scanning, check Show Logging Status on Alarm. This window will
appear on top of all other windows, even if you are in another application.
Note
You must close the Logging Status window before you can access
button or menu commands from the keyboard. To close, press the
key.

4-7

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

AlarmBell is displayed
when at least one
channel is in alarm.
Listing of channels where alarms have
occurred since the last status update.
Number of scans retrieved and recorded.
Number of scans in the instrument scan queue
Instrument listed by BCN
ds073c.eps

The Readings Table Window
The Readings Table provides a numerical display of the most recent data
collected from the currently selected instrument. Complete the following
procedure to use the Readings Table window:
1. Select Options | Show Current Readings to display the Readings Table
window.

4-8

4-10.

Operating NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Real-Time Displays

ds300s.bmp

2. Select the icon of the instrument for which you would like to view incoming
data. If this instrument is not currently logging, select Logging | Start
Instrument.

The Spy Window

4-11.

The Spy Window displays up-to-date measurements whether or not instruments
are scanning. Spy triggers and collects its own measurements from up to eight
channels from any combination of instruments. Off-scale readings are displayed
as +Overload or -Overload. If Open Thermocouple Detect is enabled, an open
thermocouple reading is displayed as “Open TC.”
Complete the following procedure to use the Spy Window.
1. Select Utilities | Spy to open the Spy Channel Selection dialog box. You may
select up to 8 channels, including Digital I/O and Totalizer.
4-9

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds059s.bmp

2. Click OK to display the Spy window. Double-click in the Spy window to
return to the Spy Channel Selection dialog box.

ds060s.eps

4-10

Operating NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Real-Time Displays

Quick Plot

4-12.

Quick Plot provides a quick way to get a simple graphical view of your logging
data. Quick Plot samples the incoming scan data at a specified interval and
displays a graphical trend of the data. For a more detailed view of your data, use
the Trend Link application. Complete the following procedure to set up and
display the Quick Plot window. To return to the Quick Plot Setup dialog box at
any time, double-click in the Quick Plot window. During simulated logging,
Quick Plot shows simulated data.
1. Select Plot/Trend | Quick Plot Setup to open the Quick Plot Setup dialog box
is shown.

ds043s.bmp

2. Select up to eight channels from the Channel list. Enter the Y-Axis scale and
the X-Axis sampling interval. The example above is typical of setting up a
Quick Plot. Click OK.
A summary of Quick Plot attributes is shown below.

4-11

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Off-scale Reading
Y-Axis
Plot Minimum
Plot Maximum

Plot
Symbols

Most Recent Plot Points

Channel
Labels
Plot Channels
(eight maximum)

Units
Labels
Most Recent
Readings

X-Axis
40 data points nn seconds apart where nn is the
Sampling Interval (1 to 3600 seconds)

ds074c.eps

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) Operations
Complete the following procedure to set up typical Dynamic Data Exchange
operations. See Appendix G “Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)” for a DDE
example using Excel.
In the client application (for example, a spreadsheet application), enter the
following values to set up a DDE link:
Application or Service Name: NETDAQ (16-bit) or NETDAQ32 (32-bit)
Topic: BCNnn (nn is the instrument BCN 01 to 99)
4-12

4-13.

Operating NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Data Files

Items: ‘Cnn’ (nn is the channel number 01 to 30)
DIO (Digital I/O status, decimal equivalent of the 8 I/O lines)
Totalizer (Totalizer count, 0 to 4294967295)
Alarm1 (Alarm 1 status, decimal equivalent of the 30 Alarm 1 states)
Alarm2 (Alarm 2 status, decimal equivalent of the 30 Alarm 2 states)
ELDateTime (Scan date/time in Excel/Lotus 1, 2, 3 format)
Begin data collection, observing the data display in the client application. The
timestamps are directly compatible with Excel and Lotus 1,2,3 analysis
applications.

Data Files

4-14.

Data files contain the measurement data collected from the instruments. After the
instrument completes a measurement scan, the data is stored temporarily in the
instrument’s internal memory. NetDAQ Logger retrieves the scan data over the
network and records it into a data file. Data files are recorded in one of three
formats: Fast Binary, ASCII, or Trend Link.
A summary of each data file type is as follows.
• Fast Binary
The Fast Binary data file format provides the fastest way of getting data to
disk and uses the least amount of disk space. Fast Binary is the only data file
format that you can convert directly to the other two data file formats: ASCII
(CSV) and Trend Link. The NetDAQ Logger Utilities menu lists the
conversion utilities for Fast Binary files.
•

ASCII
The ASCII (CSV) data file format stores the data in ASCII characters and is
directly compatible with analysis applications like Excel and Lotus 1,2,3. If
you use a spreadsheet for data analysis, then the ASCII (CSV) data file format
may be the best choice.
You can covert an ASCII file to text. The text data file format is the same as
the ASCII format, except that the timestamps have been converted into
date/time strings using the Converting Data File ASCII Timestamps
procedure (Utilities menu). The default file extension for text data files is
*.txt.

4-13

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

•

Trend Link
The Trend Link data file format requires using the real-time trending
capability offered by the Trend Link trending package. You can record data
into Fast Binary and then convert it into the Trend Link format.
When using the Trend Link format, you may specify a deadband value for
each channel. This value determines the amount of change that a channel
reading value must undergo before an updated value is logged into the file.
The deadband value helps to limit the quantity of data recorded to the data
file.
The Trend Link format also allows you to place data into batches. The Trend
Link application can display data from multiple batches, allowing direct
comparison between current and historical data.

The auto rollover feature provides a means of logging data into a series of files
rather than a single file, for easier data management. NetDAQ Logger will
automatically “rollover” a data file when a specified condition is met, such as file
size. When a rollover occurs, the current data is renamed and a new file is created
with the original filename. ASCII (CSV) and binary files are sequenced as
filename.001, filename.002, etc. In the Trend Link format, data is recorded into
the *.now file and rolled into *.tlg files.

Configuring a Data File

4-15.

Complete the following procedure to configure a data file for recording
instrument measurement data. Each Asynchronous Instrument or Group
Instrument has its own data file.
1. Highlight the instrument icon on the Icon Bar (for a Group Instrument, select
the Master). Open the Instrument Configuration dialog box.
2. Click Data File to open the Data File Configuration dialog box.

ds062s.bmp

4-14

Operating NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Data Files

3. Select the desired File Format. For the Fast Binary or ASCII (CSV) format,
select Append to File or Overwrite File. This file mode determines what
happens when logging starts if a data file of the same name exists. Enter text
characters (79 maximum) into the File Comment box. (The File Comment
text appears in the header of the data file.)
4. Click Select Data File. Enter the file name. The default extensions are *.csv
(ASCII), *.bin (Fast Binary), and *.set (Trend Link). Click Save to save
the name entry of that file. The name of your data file now appears in the Data
File Configuration dialog box.

ds037s.bmp

5. Click Auto Rollover to open the Auto Rollover dialog box.

ds065s.bmp

4-15

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

6. Select the desired Auto Rollover type and its associated value. The data file
may be automatically rolled over when it reaches a specified size, when a
time interval elapses from the last rollover, or at a particular time each day.
To safeguard your data when recording in the Trend Link format, you must
perform a rollover or stop logging data before your disk completely fills up.
The default low disk space value of 1000K will typically be enough to
safeguard your data. Use a larger value when rapidly logging large quantities
of data from several instruments in the Trend Link format.
7. Click OK to return to the Data File Configuration dialog box.
8. For a Trend Link File, click Deadband from the Data File Configuration
dialog box to open the Deadband Values dialog box.

ds063s.bmp

9. Select the desired channels, enter the Deadband Value, and click Apply
Value. A deadband value of zero will result in all data being recorded to the
data file.
10. Review the values and click OK to return to the Data Configuration dialog
box.
11. Click Batch Options in the Data File Configuration dialog box to open the
Batch Options dialog box.

4-16

Operating NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Data Files

ds301.bmp

12. Enter a batch name and the desired batch definition and click OK to return to
the Data File Configuration dialog box.
Use the batch definition to tell NetDAQ Logger when to mark the start and
stop points of batches:
•

Entire logging session.

•

Period while DIO line is low. You can use a DIO input to start and stop
batches. The batch starts when the DIO line goes low (or on start logging
if the DIO line is already low), and stops when the DIO line goes high (or
on Stop Logging if the DIO line remains low).

•

Periodic interval. You can indicate an interval for the start of new batches.
NetDAQ Logger will start a batch on Start Logging and, every time the
interval expires, it will stop the current batch and start a new one. You can
specify a time of day for the first batch to start as an alternative to starting
on Start Logging.

13. Review the Data File Configuration dialog box and click OK if satisfactory to
return to the Instrument Configuration dialog box. Click OK to return to the
Main Window.

4-17

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Converting Data Files

4-16.

You can convert data files to other types for compatibility with your data
management applications. NetDAQ Logger performs the following conversions:
•

Binary to ASCII

•

ASCII to Text (timestamp conversion)

•

Binary to Trend Link

Complete the following procedure to perform one of these conversions. This
conversion does not modify or destroy the original file, but creates an additional
file in the new format.
1. From the Utilities menu select a conversion type to open the conversion
dialog box. The example below shows the Binary to Trend Link dialog box.
2. Click Select Binary File, and select the desired binary file from the File Name
list or enter the file name in the File Name box. Modify the directory path as
required and click Open.
3. Click Select Text File and enter the file name in the File Name box. Modify
the directory path as required and click Save.
4. Verify you have the desired file names. Click Convert to convert the file.

ds046s.bmp

5. Click Close to return to the Main Window.

Viewing and Printing a Data File

4-17.

Complete the following procedure to view and print a data file, which is assumed
to be in text format. (See “Converting Data Files.”)
1. Minimize NetDAQ Logger and open the Notepad application.
2. Select File | Open and enter the file name and directory path.

4-18

Operating NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Optimizing Performance

The example below is a typical data file in text format. Off-scale
measurements are recorded as +1.0E+9 (+overload) and -1.0E+9 (-overload).
Open thermocouple measurements are recorded as +9.0E+9.
Data File Name
Start Time

File Comment

Unit Labels
Channel Names

45 is the
Instrument BCN
Alarm 2 Value
Alarm 1 Value

Measurement
Scan Records
Number of Columns
(An asynchronous instrument
has a single digit for the Number of
Columns. A Group Instrument shows
columns for each instrument,
e.g. 6,4,4,8,12.)

Totalizer Count
Digital I/O (Decimal
equivalent of DO7 to DO0)
Measurement
Date/Time
ds071c.eps

3. The Alarm 1 and Alarm 2 values provide a record of which channels were in
alarm during the scan. These values are formatted as follows.

ds072c.bmp

4-19

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Optimizing Performance

4-18.

You can set up instrument operations to optimize either your system’s data
collection rate or measurement precision, depending on your requirements. The
procedures in this section describe the options for optimizing performance.

Optimizing Performance for Speed

4-19.

To optimize the data collection rate of your system, you can alter the parameters
that affect the instrument’s scanning rate, the data put through from the
instrument to the data file, or the speed of the network.

Increasing Scanning Rate

4-20.

Follow these guidelines to increase the rate at which an instrument collects data.
•

Select the Fast Reading Rate.

•

Use similar functions on contiguous channels. For example, if measuring dc
volts on four channels and thermocouple on four channels, configure channels
1, 2, 3, and 4 for dc volts, and channels 5, 6, 7, and 8 for thermocouples. (See
“Configuring Analog Channel Functions.”)

•

Turn the Drift Correction feature off.

•

Turn the Open Thermocouple Detect feature off.

•

Do not use the Trigger Output function.

•

Do not monitor channel readings, DIO or totalizer status at the instrument
front panel.

The following measurement features can also slow down scanning.
•

Slow measurement functions such as frequency and ac volts.

•

Using Autorange for range selection.

•

The use of computed channels.

•

Mx+B scaling.

•

Channel alarms.

Increasing Data Transmission and Storage Rate
Follow these guidelines to increase the rate of data throughput from the
instrument to the data file.

4-20

•

Select Fast Binary as the data file format.

•

Do not have more instruments logging than are necessary.

4-21.

Operating NetDAQ Logger for Windows
Using Online Help

In addition, try to avoid running other tasks on the computer when you are writing
to the data file. The following suggestions are:
•

Avoid using the Quick Plot, Spy, Readings Table, or Logging Status
windows.

•

Avoid using the Trend Link window in real time.

•

Close any other applications that are open.

•

Avoid the use of screen savers.

•

Avoid file conversion operations during scanning. (See “Data Files.”)

•

Increase the amount of RAM in your computer if possible.

Increasing Network Speed

4-22.

Use these guidelines to increase network speed.
•

Place instruments on an isolated network to avoid high network traffic and
network down time. If you are using a general network, place the instruments
and host computers on the same subnet.

•

Install the Ethernet Card in a 16-bit slot.

Optimizing Performance for Precision

4-23.

More precision can mean sacrificing some of the instrument’s measurement
speed. The guidelines for increasing the data throughput and the network speed do
not affect the precision of your instruments and you can use them during high
precision measurements.
To optimize precision for all measurement methods and functions:
•
•

Select the Slow Reading Rate.
Enable the Drift Correction feature.

Using Online Help

4-24.

NetDAQ Logger includes extensive Online Help. Here are some ways you can use
online assistance more effectively:
•
•
•

Press the F1 key at any time to open the Online Help for information on the
screen you are currently using.
When conducting procedures described in Online Help, reduce the size of the
Help window, and check Always on Top to use help while you operate
NetDAQ Logger.
The front panel graphic (shown below) precedes Help topics concerning use
of the instrument’s front panel.

4-21

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

4-22

Chapter 5

Using Trend Link for Fluke

Contents

Page

5-1. Introduction .......................................................................................... 5-3
5-2.
Displaying a Trend Link Chart During Logging.............................. 5-3
5-3.
Playing Back a Trend Link File in Trend Link................................ 5-4
5-4.
Playing Back a Fast Binary File in Trend Link................................ 5-5
5-5.
Playing Back an ASCII (CSV) File in Trend Link .......................... 5-6
5-6.
Importing Trend Link Data Files ..................................................... 5-6
5-7.
Create a New Trend Link Data Set Directory ............................. 5-6
5-8.
Add the New Folder to the Trend Link infolink.ini File.... 5-6
5-9.
Import the NetDAQ ASCII (CSV) File into Trend Link............. 5-7
5-10.
Display the Trend Link Chart for the Imported File.................... 5-7
5-11.
Title the Trend Link Chart........................................................... 5-8
5-12.
Save the Trend Link Chart........................................................... 5-9
5-13.
Exporting Trend Link Data Files ..................................................... 5-9
5-14.
Deleting Old Trend Link Files ......................................................... 5-11
5-15. Getting the Right Look for Your Trend Link Chart ............................. 5-12
5-16.
Using the Trend Link Control Bar ................................................... 5-12
5-17.
Using the Trend Link Menus ........................................................... 5-15
5-18.
Adjusting the Curve Time Scale (X-axis) ................................... 5-15
5-19.
Adjusting the Curve Amplitude Scale (Y-axis)........................... 5-16
5-20.
Configuring the Curve Status Display......................................... 5-17
5-21.
Curve Preferences........................................................................ 5-18
5-22.
Background Preferences .............................................................. 5-21
5-23.
Real Time Frequency Update ...................................................... 5-23
5-24.
Adding or Changing the Chart Title ............................................ 5-23
5-25.
Using the Note System ................................................................ 5-24
5-26.
Printing a Chart............................................................................ 5-24

5-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

5-2

Using Trend Link for Fluke
Introduction

Introduction

5-1.

Trend Link for Fluke (Trend Link) graphs real time and historical data in the
Microsoft Windows environment. This chapter supports Trend Link operation
with a series of procedures to use in conjunction with NetDAQ Logger. Refer to
the Trend Link for Fluke Reference Manual for complete information. Make sure
that you have installed Trend Link as described in Chapter 2, "Installing Trend
Link.”

Displaying a Trend Link Chart During Logging

5-2.

Complete the following procedure to display a Trend Link chart in real time
during logging. This procedure assumes you have configured the network and
instruments for operation and have selected Trend Link as the data file format.
(See "Data Files" in Chapter 4.)
1. In NetDAQ Logger, select the desired instrument on the Icon Bar. Verify that
Trend Link shows in the File Format field in the Main Window as shown
below.
If the file format is ASCII or Binary, you will not be able to display a Trend
Link chart in real time.

ds121c.bmp

2. Select Logging | Start Instrument (or click the Start Instrument button on the
toolbar) to begin logging data from the instrument to the Trend Link data file.
3. To display the Trend Link chart, select Plot/Trend | Show Trend Link.

5-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Note
If this is the first use of the Trend Link data file, allow a few seconds
for Trend Link to create the folder and files used for the chart.
4. To change the look of the chart, see "Getting the Right Look for your Trend
Link Chart" later in this chapter.
5. Click the Stop Instrument button on the toolbar when you wish to terminate
scanning operations.
6. To save changes to the chart, select File | Save in Trend Link. By saving the
chart, you can play it back at a later time with the same settings.
7. Close Trend Link by selecting File | Exit.

Playing Back a Trend Link File in Trend Link

5-3.

Complete the following procedure to play back a NetDAQ Trend Link data file
using Trend Link.
1. Open Trend Link from Start | Programs or select Plot/Trend | Show Trend
Link in NetDAQ Logger. The figure below shows a typical Trend Link
opening screen.

ds122s.bmp

2. Select File | Open to display the Chart Open dialog box.

5-4

Using Trend Link for Fluke
Introduction

ds123s.bmp

3. Select the chart file to play back. For example, select c:\Program
Files\Fluke\netdaq\_data.set\data.cht
4. Click OK.
5. Observe that the selected chart opens. Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the
chart to display the measurement area of interest.
6. Select Edit | Add Curve to view data from additional channels in the Trend
Link file.
7. After viewing the chart or performing other chart operations, select File | Exit
to exit Trend Link, saving the changes as required.

Playing Back a Fast Binary File in Trend Link

5-4.

Complete the following procedure to play back a NetDAQ Fast Binary file in
Trend Link.
1. In NetDAQ Logger, convert the Binary formatted file to a Trend Link
formatted file by selecting Utilities | Binary to Trend Link Conversion. (See
"Converting Data Files" in Chapter 4.)
2. Complete the "Playing Back a Trend Link File in Trend Link" procedure
(above).

5-5

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Playing Back an ASCII (CSV) File in Trend Link

5-5.

To play back a NetDAQ Logger ASCII (CSV) data file in Trend Link, refer to
“Importing Trend Link Data Files” in this chapter. Specify Fluke Format (*.csv)
for the Import File Type. Be sure you do NOT import the same ASCII (CSV) file
more than once into the same Data Set as this causes a timestamp conflict.
For future NetDAQ Logger data logging, you may prefer to use Fast Binary
instead of ASCII data file format. Fast Binary converts easily to Trend Link
format when you select Utilities | Binary to Trend Link Conversion. Fast Binary
also converts easily to ASCII (CSV) format when you select Utilities | Binary to
ASCII Conversion.

Importing Trend Link Data Files

5-6.

You can import standard *.csv, Iconics Format (*.prn), and Fluke Format
*.csv data files using the Trend Link Import *.CSV File utility. For example
purposes, the procedure below shows how to import a Fluke Format ASCII (CSV)
data file. You can adapt this procedure to standard *.csv and Iconics Format
*.prn as required.

Create a New Trend Link Data Set Directory

5-7.

1. In the Windows Explorer utility, create a new folder for a Trend Link Data
Set in c:\Program Files\Fluke\netdaq by highlighting the
c:\Program Files\Fluke\netdaq folder and then selecting File |
New | Folder. Use the NetDAQ convention for Trend Link Data Set folders by
starting with an underscore, followed by up to seven characters with the
extension *.set. Click OK.
Hint: Use the Configurator program supplied with Trend Link to create a new
Data Set. See Configurator program information in the Trend Link for Fluke
Reference Manual.
2. Observe that Windows Explorer shows the new folder under c:\Program
Files\Fluke\netdaq.

Add the New Folder to the Trend Link infolink.ini File

5-8.

While still in Windows Explorer, select the file c:\Program
Files\Fluke\tl\infolink.ini, which opens the file in the Windows
Notepad accessory. Locate the portion of the file with the heading: [TL Data
Set Paths]. Add a line under this heading with the name and path for the new
Data Set. The format is: Data Set name = Data Set path. For example,
adding the Data Set name data.set to the Data Set path c:\Program
Files\Fluke\netdaq\_data.set results in the entry shown below.
[TL Data Set Paths]
data.set=c:\Program Files\Fluke\netdaq\_data.set
Save the changes and exit Notepad.
5-6

Using Trend Link for Fluke
Introduction

Import the NetDAQ ASCII (CSV) File into Trend Link

5-9.

Open Trend Link from the Programs list. Select Utilities | Import CSV Data to
display the Import *.CSV File dialog box. Make the following selections:
Target Data Set Double-click the Data Set you entered earlier in the Data Sets
box to enter the name in the Target Data Set box. For example, double-click
data.set.
Import File Type Select Fluke Format (*.csv)
Filename Enter the complete path to the NetDAQ ASCII (CSV) file you want to
play back in Trend Link. For example, enter c:\Program
Files\Fluke\netdaq\testdata.csv.
Field Delimiter Verify Custom and comma (,) selections.
Click OK when you have made all selections.
Allow several seconds for importing the NetDAQ ASCII (CSV) file into the
Trend Link Data Set directory you created.

Display the Trend Link Chart for the Imported File

5-10.

Select Edit | Add Curve to open the Add Curve dialog box. Double-click the name
of your Data Set in the Data Set box. Click the desired Tag name (curve) from the
Tags box and then click OK to display the curve. The following example displays
Tag 0101 from the Data Set data.set. Repeat this step for each curve that you
want to examine in Trend Link.

5-7

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds126s.bmp

Examine the chart and perform any standard Trend Link procedures to view, print,
and so forth. (See "Getting the Right Look for Your Trend Link Chart.")

Title the Trend Link Chart

5-11.

To open the Chart Title dialog box, select Preferences | Chart Title. Enter the
desired title and click OK.
Observe that the entered text appears at the top of the chart in the Title Bar.

5-8

Using Trend Link for Fluke
Introduction

ds139s.bmp

Save the Trend Link Chart

5-12.

To save the Trend Link chart, select File | Save As. Enter the path to your Data
Set directory for the *.cht chart. For example, enter c:\Program
Files\Fluke\netdaq\_data.set\data.cht. Click OK.

ds150s.bmp

Exporting Trend Link Data Files

5-13.

Trend Link can export data files into one of three Export File Type formats:
Standard Comma Separated Values (*.csv), MathCad Array Format (*.prn)
and Spread Sheet Column Oriented (*.csv). Note that the Trend Link *.csv
formats are not compatible with the NetDAQ Logger ASCII (CSV) data file
format.
Complete the following procedure to export a data file from Trend Link. This
procedure assumes the NetDAQ Logger data file for export is already in Trend
5-9

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Link format. If this is not the case, see "Playing Back a Fast Binary (BIN) File in
Trend Link" or "Playing Back an ASCII (CSV) File in Trend Link" for conversion
procedures.
1. Open Trend Link from Start | Programs.
2. Select File | Open and select the desired Trend Link chart. Click OK.
3. Adjust the Trend Link chart to display the desired data you wish to export.
Trend Link only exports the data displayed on the chart! The example below
shows 6 minutes of the chart data.cht being exported. (See "Getting The
Right Look For Your Trend Link Chart" to adjust the display to show the
desired data.)

ds128s.bmp

4. Select Utilities | Export CSV Data to open the Export Data dialog box. Select
the Export File Type, Sample Rate time resolution of the exported data file in
the format Hours:Minutes:Seconds, and the name of the exported file. The
example below shows the data.set file exported in Column Heading
Format as file:
c:\Program Files\Fluke\netdaq\_data.set\data.csv
with a sampling interval of 0.5 second. Click OK.

5-10

Using Trend Link for Fluke
Introduction

ds151s.bmp

Deleting Old Trend Link Files

5-14.

NetDAQ Logger creates a *.set file and a directory for every new Trend Link data
file. The directory name is identical to the Trend Link data file name, except for
an underscore "_" character prefix. The actual data resides in this directory.
To delete a Trend Link data file, use Windows Explorer or File Manager to delete
the directory and its contents. Also, delete the *.set file. Then, open the
Configurator application and complete the following steps:
1. Double-click the c:\Program Files\Fluke\tl\infolink.ini file
to display the contents using the Notepad accessory. Delete the line under the
heading [TL Data Set Paths] that relates to the directory you deleted
above.
2. Save the changes to infolink.ini and exit Notepad.
5-11

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

3. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each Trend Link Data Set being deleted.

Getting the Right Look for Your Trend Link Chart

5-15.

When you display a Trend Link chart, you can modify the chart appearance to suit
your application. Use the Control Bar or various menu selections, as described
below.

Using the Trend Link Control Bar

5-16.

The Control Bar in the Trend Link window (below) allows you to quickly modify
the chart display.

ds131s.bmp

See the Trend Link for Fluke Reference Manual for more information on menu
items and other Trend Link capabilities.

5-12

Using Trend Link for Fluke
Getting the Right Look for Your Trend Link Chart

Control Bar

Historical Mode: Click to freeze the chart during the Real Time
Mode, allowing you to use the scroll bar at the bottom of the chart to
back up to any portion on the recorded chart. If you are collecting
measurement data using the Real Time Mode, you do not lose data
while you are in the Historical Mode. Real Time Mode: Click again
to view measurement data collection in real time.
Open an Existing Chart Click the Open Chart button to display the
Chart Open dialog box. Double-click on the desired existing file to
open an existing chart. A prompt asking to save the current chart
appears.
Adding a Curve Click to open the Add Curve dialog box. Doubleclick the desired *.set line in the Data Set box to display the
available Tags. Double-click the desired tag in the Tags box to add
the curve.
Setting Autoscaling To clear a Fixed Range and return to
autoscaling, click the Autoscale button. Notice that the fixed range
you entered in Setting a Fixed Range clears.
Undo and Redo Click the Undo/Redo button to undo any time scale
change.

XY Curve Plot This feature gives you a chart which plots one curve
against another. Click the XY Curve Plot button, which displays an X
symbol. Position the X symbol over a Curve icon and click. The X
symbol changes to a Y symbol. Position the Y symbol over another
Curve icon and click again. This displays the XY Curve Plot window,
which displays a plot of the Y curve against the X curve. Click OK to
return to the chart.
Locking a Time You can press the left mouse button while over the
key and hold it down, you can drag the key in the Control Bar over
one of the locks in the two time displays. By releasing the button
while over one of the locks, you place the key in that lock. A shortcut
to accomplish the same task is by double-clicking the mouse while
over one of the locks. This causes the key to automatically go into the
lock. To unlock a time, simply click over the lock and drag the key off
the lock and release it.

5-13

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Erasing a Curve To erase a curve, click this button, hold the mouse
button down, drag the Eraser icon on top of the Curve icon, and
release the mouse button.
Adding Notes To enable the Note icon on the Control Bar, select
Preferences | Note System. Click the Historical Mode button to freeze
the chart. Drag the Note icon to any point on the curve (it must touch
part of the curve) and release. In the Note dialog box, add your text,
then click OK. Click Yes in the Add Note message box. Double-click
the Note icon on the curve to review your text. Click OK.
Curve Band Bars When this button is down, Trend Link displays the
band bars for all curves on the chart. When the button is up, the band
bars are off. The band bars appear to the left of the curve window as
thin colored bars. They may optionally be displayed with scale
values.
Curve Status Window Click on and off to toggle display of the
Curve Status Window at the bottom of the chart. The Curve Status
Window, which is color-coded to the curve traces and the Curve
Symbol icons, displays information about each curve.
Grid Lines On/Off Click to turn the chart background grid lines on
and off.

Stay on Top Mode Click to display the Trend Link window on top
of all other windows.

Batch Mode Click in to enter Batch Mode. Click out to enter
Continuous Mode.

Measurement Cursor Click and hold the left mouse button
anywhere in the chart display area to display the measurement cursor.
You can then select any data point on the chart for time and
measurement value display.

5-14

Using Trend Link for Fluke
Getting the Right Look for Your Trend Link Chart

Using the Trend Link Menus

5-17.

The Trend Link menus (below) allow you to modify the chart display appearance
and functionality. This section does not discuss menu functions repeated on the
Control Bar. (See "Using the Trend Link Control Bar.") This section only
summarizes the menu functions. Refer to the Trend Link for Fluke Reference
Manual for complete menu information.

ds245s.bmp

This section contains the following common menu procedures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adjusting the Curve Time Scale (X-axis)
Adjusting the Curve Amplitude Scale (Y-axis)
Configuring the Curve Status Display
Curve Preferences
Background Preferences
Real Time Frequency Update
Adding or Changing the Chart Title
Using the Note System
Printing a Chart

Adjusting the Curve Time Scale (X-axis)

5-18.

Complete the following procedure to adjust the curve time scale (X-axis).
1. Double-click the Time Interval Window at the bottom of the chart (see below)
to open the Change Time dialog box.

ds242c.bmp

2. In the Change Time dialog box, enter the time for the curve display, that is,
the time from the left edge to the right edge of the curve. The format is
00:00:00.000 (hours:minutes:seconds.fraction). For example, 00:00:30.000
represents 30 seconds. Click OK. You can only enter a time that is equal to or
less than the overall recorded chart time. For example, if you have been
collecting data for 6 hours, you can enter a number up to 6 hours. (For this
operation, be sure to position the bottom scroll bar to the far-right.)

5-15

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds132s.bmp

To change the default value so that all created charts will have a selected preset
value in the Time Interval Window, use the Notepad accessory to modify
c:\Program Files\Fluke\netdaq\tldef.cht. Find [Section:
Curve Window], and add the line Curve Window Interval
Time=nnnnnnn, where nnnnnnn is the time in milliseconds. For example, for
1 hour, enter 3600000. Save the changes and close Notepad.
To zoom in on a portion of the curve, double-click in the chart at each point that
you want to expand. The chart will display the portion you selected.

Adjusting the Curve Amplitude Scale (Y-axis)

5-19.

Complete the following procedure to adjust the curve amplitude to a fixed scale
(Y-axis).
1. Uncheck Preferences | Dynamic Autoscale.
2. Double-click the Curve icon at the right side of the chart to open the curve
preference dialog box (below). Enter the desired fixed scale in the Scale High
and Low text boxes. Click OK. For more information on the curve preference
dialog box, see "Curve Preferences."

5-16

Using Trend Link for Fluke
Getting the Right Look for Your Trend Link Chart

ds133s.bmp

Configuring the Curve Status Display

5-20.

Complete the following procedure to select the elements of the Curve Status
display. The Curve Status display is the window at the bottom of the chart
containing the parameter information of the curves. Toggle Curve Status on and
off with the Curve Status Window button on the Control Bar. (See "Using the
Trend Link Control Bar.")
1. Select Edit | Curve Status Info to open the Curve Status Information dialog
box (below).

5-17

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds134s.bmp

2. Select the desired features of the Curve Status display by checking or
unchecking each of the Sections Displayed listings. Click OK.

Curve Preferences

5-21.

Complete the following procedure to select the curve preferences. You can
customize various attributes of each curve on the chart. For example, you can
change the color, add a fixed range, and position one curve on top of another.
1. Select Curve | Curve Information to open the Curve Information dialog box.

5-18

Using Trend Link for Fluke
Getting the Right Look for Your Trend Link Chart

ds135s.bmp

2. Click on the desired curve listed in the Tags box, which will then appear in
the Tagname box. Click OK to open the Curve Parameters box (below). (You
can also open this dialog box directly by double-clicking the Curve icon.)

5-19

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds136s.bmp

3. The tag name of the selected curve appears in the dialog box caption. Each
dialog box entry has the following characteristics:
Description This entry will be initialized with the string entered in NetDAQ
Logger for the channel label. (See "Assigning Channel Labels" in Chapter 3.)
Engineering Units This entry will be initialized with the string entered in
NetDAQ Logger for the units label. Enter the Engineering Units characters in
NetDAQ Logger as a units label. (See "Selecting Analog Channel Functions"
and "Selecting Computed Channel Functions" in Chapter 3.)
Scale The High and Low entries set the curve’s vertical scale. (Trend Link
ignores the Scale entries if you have checked Preferences | Dynamic
AutoScale.)
Band Area The High and Low entries define the portion of the curve
window used for the display of the curve. Band values of 100 and 0 represent
the whole curve window, while values of 50 and 0 represent the bottom half
of the curve window. If you check Scale Values, the band bars displayed on

5-20

Using Trend Link for Fluke
Getting the Right Look for Your Trend Link Chart

the left side of the curve window will include a display of scale values.
Otherwise, a band without numbers will appear.
Curve Type Select the type of curve: normal, highlight, shaded, or SPC
(Statistical Processing Control). If you enabled the NetDAQ Logger channel
alarm values, the default curve type is "highlighted" and Trend Link sets limit
values according to the alarm values.
Precision refers to the number of digits appearing to the right of the decimal
point (Curve Status window and Band Bars. For example, a Precision entry of
1 would show values of 70.0 and 80.0 (maximum entry is 7, showing values
of 70.0000000 and 80.0000000.)
Color Click here to select the color of the curve trace.
More Button Click to open the Curve Options dialog box for the Curve Type
selected.
Minimized Button Click to select display options when the dialog is
minimized. A minimized dialog becomes a floating window displaying
various types of information about the curve (tag name, last data value, etc.)
AutoScale Button Click to autoscale the scale values based on the current
data in view in the curve window.
Draw First Button This causes the curve to be drawn on the top over all
other curves.
Draw Last Button This cause the curve to be drawn on the bottom under all
other curves.
Statistics Button Opens the display for the statistics of the curve, including
Histogram, Box Plot, Sum, Mean, and Standard Deviation values.
4. After making your selections in the dialog box, click OK or minimize the
dialog.

Background Preferences

5-22.

Complete the following procedure to select the background preferences.
Background preferences select the curve background color and grid appearance.
1. Select the Preferences | Background to open the Background Preferences
dialog box (below).

5-21

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds137s.bmp

2. The dialog box entries are as follows:
• Bkgrnd Color: Choose the background color.

5-22

•

Grid Color: Choose the grid color.

•

Display Grid: This is the same as selecting Grid Lines On/Off on the
Control Bar.

•

Calculate Interval:Select this option to enter the number of vertical grid
lines to display. Trend Link calculates the time interval represented by
each grid line so that the desired number of grid lines appear on the
display.

Using Trend Link for Fluke
Getting the Right Look for Your Trend Link Chart

•

Constant Interval: Select this option to enter the exact time interval that
a vertical grid line should represent.

•

Pixel Width: Select this option to enter the distance between vertical grid
lines in pixels.

•

Use scale tickmarks: If you select this option, horizontal grid lines draw
to match the tickmark labels on the band bars.

•

Use Pixels: If you select this option, you can enter the distance between
horizontal grid lines in pixels.

3. After making your selections in the Background Preferences dialog box, click
OK.

Real Time Frequency Update

5-23.

Complete the following procedure to modify the frequency update period for the
real time display. The default (and minimum time) is 1 second. The maximum
entry is 1410065 seconds.
1. Select Preferences | Real Time Freq to open the Real Time Interval dialog
box.

ds138s.bmp

2. Enter the desired number of seconds for the real time interval. The range is 1
to 1410065. You cannot enter fractions of seconds. Click OK.

Adding or Changing the Chart Title

5-24.

Complete the following procedure to add or change the title of the chart at the
very top of the chart window. By convention, the title is the name of the Trend
Link file with the *.cht extension, for example, data.cht. However, you can
use this procedure to enter any custom title.

5-23

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

1. Select Preferences | Chart Title to open the Chart Title dialog box. Enter the
chart title name in the text box, for example, station one. Click OK.
2. Observe that the entered text appears at the top of the chart in the Title Bar.

Using the Note System

5-25.

Complete the following procedure to add a text note to a curve. You can add notes
to an historical curve to comment on a particular event (voltage spike, gap in the
data, etc.).
1. Select Preferences | Note System to enable the Note icon on the Control Bar.
2. To add a note to a point on an historical curve, drag the Note icon to a point
on the curve and release. When you release the note, a text box for the note
opens and displays the time and date where the note will be positioned on the
curve.
3. Enter the desired text (up to 1024 characters) in the text box, then click OK.
4. When the message “Add note permanently to curve?” appears, click Yes.
5. As a test, double-click the Note icon you just created to view the note text.
Click OK.

Printing a Chart

5-26.

Complete the following procedure to print a Trend Link chart. Trend Link prints
only the displayed portion of the chart.
1. Bring into view the portion of the chart you wish to print.
2. Select File | Print to open the Print Options dialog box (below).

5-24

Using Trend Link for Fluke
Getting the Right Look for Your Trend Link Chart

ds140s.bmp

You can position and size the printed chart by entering X and Y Offsets and
Width and Height settings. The X and Y Offsets specify the position of the upperleft corner of the printed page, and the Width and Height determine the size of the
printed chart. If you enter impossible values, Trend Link prints a default (fullpage) chart.
For example, X=500, Y=750, and Width=1400, Height=1650 results in the
following printed chart:

5-25

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds141f.bmp

Click OK to print the chart.

5-26

Chapter 6

Maintenance

Contents
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
6-10.
6-11.
6-12.
6-13.
6-14.
6-15.
6-16.
6-17.
6-18.
6-19.
6-20.
6-21.
6-22.
6-23.
6-24.
6-25.
6-26.
6-27.
6-28.

Introduction ..........................................................................................
Self-Test Diagnostics and Error Codes ................................................
Cleaning................................................................................................
Fuse Replacement.................................................................................
Performance Test..................................................................................
Configuring the Performance Test Setup.........................................
Initializing the Performance Test Setup...........................................
Accuracy Performance Tests ...........................................................
Volts DC Accuracy Test (2640A) ...............................................
Volts DC Accuracy Test (2645A) ...............................................
Volts AC Accuracy Test..............................................................
Frequency Accuracy Test. ...........................................................
Analog Channel Integrity Test.....................................................
Computed Channel Integrity Test................................................
Thermocouple Temperature Accuracy Test ................................
Open Thermocouple Response Test ............................................
2-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test (2640A) .................................
2-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test (2645A) .................................
4-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test (2640A) .................................
4-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test (2645A) .................................
RTD Temperature Accuracy Test (Resistance) (2640A) ............
RTD Temperature Accuracy Test (Resistance) (2645A) ............
RTD Temperature Accuracy Test (DIN/IEC 751 RTD) .............
Digital Input/Output Tests ...............................................................
Digital I/O Output Test................................................................
Digital Input Test.........................................................................
Totalizer Tests..................................................................................
Totalizer Count Test ....................................................................

Page
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-6
6-6
6-9
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-20
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-25
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-28
6-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

6-29.
6-30.
6-31.
6-32.
6-33.
6-34.
6-35.
6-36.
6-37.
6-38.
6-39.

6-2

Totalizer Sensitivity Test ............................................................
Master Alarm Output Test...............................................................
Trigger Input Test............................................................................
Trigger Output Test .........................................................................
Calibration ...........................................................................................
Adding Calibration to the Utilities Menu........................................
Instrument Calibration Dialog Box .................................................
Calibration Steps Dialog Box..........................................................
Variations in the Display .....................................................................
Service..................................................................................................
Replacement Parts................................................................................

6-28
6-29
6-30
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-33
6-33
6-34
6-34
6-36

Maintenance
Introduction

Introduction

6-1.

Maintenance for the 2640A/2645A instruments is limited to self-test error code
explanations, cleaning, fuse replacement, performance test, calibration, and a
listing of replacement parts. A Service Manual (PN 942615) is available for
purchase.

Self-Test Diagnostics and Error Codes

6-2.

Self-test diagnostics are performed each time the instrument is powered up. Any
errors encountered during this initial 5-second period are reported on the front
panel, as shown below.

If you encounter an error code, refer to Table 6-1 for a brief description of the
error. For all errors, try cycling the instrument power. If the error persists and you
intend to repair the instrument yourself, refer to the Service Manual, PN 942615.
Otherwise, package the instrument securely (using the original container, if
available), and mail it to the nearest Fluke Service Center. Include a description of
the problem. Fluke assumes no responsibility for damage in transit.
Table 6-1. Self-Test Error Codes
Error Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Error Description
Boot ROM Checksum Error
Instrument ROM Checksum Error
Internal RAM Test Failed
Display Power-Up Test Failed
Display Not Responding
Calibration Constants Corrupted
A-D Not Responding
A-D Self-Test Failed
A-D Zero Offset Test Failed
A-D Reference Balance Test Failed
A-D Overload Detection Test Failed
A-D Open Thermocouple Detection Test Failed
Communication Parameters (e.g., baud, IP address) Corrupted
Ethernet Address Corrupted
Internal RAM Constants Corrupted
Ethernet Chip Test Failed
Uncalibrated or Calibration Incomplete

6-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Cleaning

6-3.
Warning

Keep the instrument dry to avoid electrical shock to
personnel or damage to the instrument. To prevent
damage, never apply solvents to the instrument housing.
Wipe the instrument with a cloth lightly dampened with water or mild detergent.
Do not use aromatic hydrocarbons, chlorinated solvents, or methanol-based fluids.

Fuse Replacement

6-4.

The instrument uses a 15/100 ampere, 250V, time delay line fuse in series with
the power supply. To replace the fuse, refer to Figure 6-1 and the following
procedure:

Warning
To avoid electrical shock, do not operate the instrument
without the cover properly installed.
1. Disconnect all rear panel cables to the instrument power, Universal Input
Module, and I/O connectors.
2. Invert the instrument on a protective surface and remove the four 1/4-inch
6-32 Phillips-head screws on the bottom of the case.
3. Turn the instrument upright and remove the two 1/2-inch 6-32 Phillips-head
screws from the rear panel bezel.
4. Remove the rear panel bezel and case assembly. Do not touch any internal
parts of the instrument!
5. Locate the fuse holder at the back of the chassis near the power input
connector. Using a non-metallic tool, carefully pry the fuse from the holder.
6. Insert the new fuse into the holder. (You must use a 15/100 ampere, 250V
time delay line fuse replacement.)
7. Reinstall the case to its original position (the front has two rubber feet).
8. Reinstall the rear panel bezel (rubber feet towards the bottom) and attach it
with the two 1/2-inch 6-32 phillips-head screws.
9. Invert the instrument on the protective surface and reinstall the four 1/4-inch
6-32 screws on the bottom securing the case.
10. Reinstall the cables removed in Step 1.

6-4

Maintenance
Performance Test

1
Remove
all
Cables

Bottom

Remove
Bottom
Screws
(4 places)

3
Remove
Rear Bezel
Screws
(2 places)

4
Remove
Rear Bezel
and
Case for
Fuse
Access

Top

Fuse (15/100A, 250V
Time Delay)

Figure 6-1. Replacing the Fuse

6-5

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Performance Test

6-5.

When received, the 2640A/2645A is calibrated and in operating condition. The
following Performance Test procedures are provided for acceptance testing upon
initial receipt or to verify correct instrument operation. The performance tests
must be performed in sequence.
If the instrument fails a performance test, the instrument requires service or
repair. To perform these tests, you will need a Fluke 5700A Multifunction
Calibrator and several other pieces of equipment meeting the minimum
specifications given in Table 6-2.
Each of the measurements listed in the following steps assume the instrument is
being tested after a 1/2 hour warm-up, in an environment with an ambient
temperature of 18 to 28°C, and a relative humidity of less than 70%.

Warning
The 2640A/2645A instrument contains high voltages that
can be dangerous or fatal. Only qualified personnel
should attempt to service the instrument.

Configuring the Performance Test Setup

6-6.

Configure the performance test setup as described below. The performance test
requires a complete network connection between the host computer and
instrument under test, including a host computer Ethernet interface and
installation of NetDAQ Logger. If you have not yet configured and tested a
network connection for the host computer and instrument, complete the
appropriate installation procedure for your network configuration before
conducting any performance testing.
1. Connect the Instrument and the Host Computer Connect the supplied
50-ohm coaxial cable, with a BNC "T" or "Y" and 50-ohm terminator,
between the host computer BNC Ethernet port and the instrument BNC
Ethernet port. The 50-ohm terminator with the ground lead is used at the
instrument with the terminator ground lug connected to the ground terminal
adjacent to the BNC port (Figure 6-2). See Chapter 2 for other interconnection
methods.
2. Connect the 5700A to Channel 1 Connect a cable from the Output VA HI
and LO connectors of the 5700A to the Universal Input Module terminals for
channel 1 connecting the 5700A HI to terminal H and LO to terminal L. Insert
the Universal Input Module into the instrument under test (Figure 6-3).

6-6

Maintenance
Performance Test

Table 6-2. Recommended Test Equipment
Instrument Type

Minimum Specifications

Multifunction

Recommended Model

DC Voltage:

Calibrator

Fluke 5700A

Range: 90 mV to 300V dc
Accuracy: 0.002%
AC Voltage:
Frequency

Voltage

Accuracy

1 kHz

29 mV to 300V

0.05%

100 kHz

15 mV to 300V

0.5%

Frequency:
10 kHz

1V rms

0.01%

Ohms:
Ohms

Accuracy

190Ω

0.005%

1.9 kΩ

0.005%

19 kΩ

0.005%

190 kΩ

0.005%

1.9 MΩ

0.005%

Mercury Thermometer

0.02°C Resolution

Princo ASTM-56C

Thermocouple Probe

Type T

Fluke P20T

Oil/Water Bath

Thermos bottle and cap

Digital Multimeter

General Purpose Measurement

Fluke 77

Signal Generator

Sine wave. 0.5 to 1V rms, 10 Hz to 5 kHz

Philips PM5193

Alternative Equipment List
Instrument Type

Recommended Model

DC Voltage Calibrator

Fluke 5440B

DMM Calibrator

Fluke 5100B (AC Volts Only)

Function/Signal Generator

Philips PM5139 or HP33120A

Decade Resistance Source

General Resistance RDS 66A

6-7

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Ethernet Coaxial Cable (50-ohm)
Minimum cable length
is 20 inches (0.5 m).

BNC “T”
NetDAQ
NETWORKED DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

COMM

DIO

MON

ENTER

50-ohm
Terminator

50-ohm
Terminator
Host
Computer

Instrument

Terminator Ground Wire

Figure 6-2. Performance Test Setup

SOURCE
INPUT
MODULE

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL

(4-WIRE)

SENSE
(4-WIRE)

5700A
OUTPUT
VΩA

SENSE
VΩ
WIDEBAND

HI
AUX
GUARD GROUND
CURRENT

Figure 6-3. 2-Wire Connections to 5700A

6-8

Maintenance
Performance Test

Initializing the Performance Test Setup

6-7.

Complete the following procedure to initialize the performance test setup. It is
assumed you have configured the host computer and instrument as described in
"Configuring the Performance Test Setup" (above). Testing begins with the
instrument and host computer unpowered. This assures that at power-up self-tests
are completed successfully, the correct host computer Ethernet port is activated,
the host computer configuration is accurately reflected, and other background
operations are completed. This procedure clears the instrument of any existing
BCN, Line Frequency, and Network settings.
1. Apply Instrument Power with Configuration Reset Hold down the
COMM key on the instrument front panel and apply power to the instrument.
After the instrument beeps and momentarily displays "rESEt" (Reset), release
the COMM key. If any self-test errors are reported on the front panel display,
refer to "Self-Test Diagnostics and Error Codes" in this chapter.
Configuration Reset sets the instrument to the default parameters: BCN=1,
Line Frequency=60, and Isolated Network.
2. Set the Line Frequency If the ac power applied to your instrument is 60 Hz
(default), continue to Step 3. If the ac power applied to your instrument is 50
Hz, complete this step.
Press the COMM key for three seconds, until a beep is heard and the SET
annunciator in the display is lit. Press the up/down arrow keys until LinE
(Line Frequency) is displayed in the primary display. Press the ENTER key.
Press the up/down arrow keys until 50 (50 Hz) is displayed in the primary
display. Press the ENTER key.
3. Apply Host Computer Power Apply power to the host computer.
4. Open NetDAQ Logger You can use Start | Programs, double-click on a setup
file shortcut on the Windows desktop, or double-click on a setup file name in
the Windows Explorer or File Manager.
5. Add Instrument Select the Communications Config command from the
Setup menu to open the Communications Configuration File dialog box.
Observe the Instruments on Network list. If the list includes instrument 01
with the correct model number (model 2640A or model 2645A), continue to
Step 6.
If instrument 01 is listed but with the wrong model number, select (highlight)
the instrument on the Instruments on Network list and click the Modify
button. Select the correct model and click OK. If instrument 01 is not listed,
click the Add button and add instrument 01 with the correct model number.
Click OK.

6-9

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

6. Verify Communications With the Communications Configuration File
dialog box still open, select instrument 01 on the Instruments on Network list
and click the Verify button. The message Connection Successful! is returned
for successful communications between the instrument and host computer. If
you receive an error message, refer to "Error and Status Messages" in
Appendix J. Click OK in the message box and then the Close button in the
Communications Configuration File dialog box to return to the Main
Window.
7. Configure Icon Note the Icon Bar in the Main Window. If the Icon Bar
shows instrument 01, complete Delete Instrument Icon below. If it does not
show instrument 01, complete Create Instrument Icon below.
Delete Instrument Icon Select Instrument 01 in the Icon Bar and then select
Delete Instrument Icon from the Setup menu. Click Yes in the warning
message. Complete Create Instrument Icon below. This sequence causes
NetDAQ Logger to reset the current setup for Instrument 01 to default
settings.
Create Instrument Icon Select the Create Instrument Icon from the Setup
menu. Select instrument 01 on the Available Instruments List. Click OK.
8. Select Reading Rate and Trigger Out Select Setup | Instrument
Configuration to open the Instrument Configuration dialog box. Select
Reading Rate = Slow, and check the Trigger Out box. Click OK to return to
the Main Window.
9. Connect DIGITAL I/O Test Leads Remove the 10-position DIGITAL I/O
connector from the instrument rear panel or from the connector kit supplied
with the instrument. Connect a test lead to each DIO line 0 to 7, plus a test
lead to the Σ (Totalizer) input and the common GND line. Reinstall the
DIGITAL I/O connector. (See "Digital I/O Connections" in Chapter 2 of this
manual)
10. Connect ALARM/TRIGGER I/O Test Leads Remove the 8-position
ALARM/TRIGGER I/O connector from the instrument rear panel. Connect a
test lead to each line, MA (Master Alarm), TO (Trigger Output), TI (Trigger
Input), plus a test lead to the common GND line. (See "Alarm/Trigger I/O
Connections" in Chapter 2 of this manual.)

6-10

Maintenance
Performance Test

Accuracy Performance Tests

6-8.

This accuracy performance test assumes you have completed "Initializing the
Performance Test Setup" above. Do not begin this test until the instrument has
been temperature stabilized for a minimum of 30 minutes. Do not use the
instrument front panel monitor function for performance testing; use the higher
resolution Spy window at the host computer, as specified in procedures. The
Accuracy Performance Tests include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Volts DC Accuracy Test
Volts AC Accuracy Test
Frequency Accuracy Test
Analog Channel Integrity Test
Computed Channel Integrity Test
Thermocouple Temperature Accuracy Test
Open Thermocouple Response Test
2-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test
4-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test
RTD Temperature Accuracy Test (Resistance Source)
RTD Temperature Accuracy Test (DIN/IEC 751 RTD Source)

Specific tests for current dc are not included since these functions are derived
from volts dc.

Volts DC Accuracy Test (2640A)

6-9.

Complete the following procedure to test the accuracy of the volts dc function for
the 2640A. Measurement accuracy applies to all channels, not just the channel
used for the test.
1. Configure Channel 1 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger, configure channel 1
for volts dc, 90 mV range. (See "Configuring Analog Channel Functions" in
Chapter 3 of this manual.)
2. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
channel 0101 (instrument 01, channel 01) from the Channel list. Click OK to
open the Spy window.

6-11

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

3. Verify Accuracy Configure the 5700A for the output values below and
verify the Spy window measurement is between the minimum and maximum
values. Change the channel 1 range as required (see Step 1).
Volts DC Range

5700A Output

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

90 mV

Short Circuit (Zero)

-0.000008V

+0.000008V

90 mV

+90 mV

+0.089980V

+0.090020V

90 mV

-90 mV

-0.090020V

-0.089980V

300 mV

Short Circuit (Zero)

-0.000017V

+0.000017V

300 mV

+300 mV

+0.299944V

+0.300056V

300 mV

-300 mV

-0.300056V

-0.299944V

Short Circuit (Zero)

-0.00015V

+0.00015V

+3V

+2.99946V

+3.00054V

-3V

-3.00054V

-2.99946V

30V

Short Circuit (Zero)

-0.0017V

+0.0017V

30V

+30V

+29.9944V

+30.0056V

30V

-30V

-30.0056V

-29.9944V

300V

Short Circuit (Zero)

-0.017V

+0.017V

300V

+300V

+299.944V

+300.056V

300V

-300V

-300.056V

-299.944V

4. Close Spy Window.

Volts DC Accuracy Test (2645A)

6-10.

Complete the following procedure to test the accuracy of the volts dc function for
the 2645A. Measurement accuracy applies to all channels, not just the channel
used for the test.
1. Configure Channel 1 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger, configure channel 1
for volts dc, 90 mV range. (See "Configuring Analog Channel Functions" in
Chapter 3 of this manual.)
2. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
channel 0101 (instrument 01, channel 01) from the Channel list. Click OK to
open the Spy window.

6-12

Maintenance
Performance Test

5700A Output

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

90 mV

Short Circuit (Zero)

-0.000023V

+0.000023V

90 mV

+90 mV

+0.089965V

+0.090035V

90 mV

-90 mV

-0.090035V

-0.089965V

300 mV

Short Circuit (Zero)

-0.00005V

+0.00005V

300 mV

+300 mV

+0.29991V

+0.30009V

300 mV

-300 mV

-0.30009V

-0.29991V

Short Circuit (Zero)

-0.0004V

+0.0004V

+3V

+2.9992V

+3.0008V

-3V

-3.0008V

-2.9992V

30V

Short Circuit (Zero)

-0.005V

+0.005V

30V

+30V

+29.991V

+30.009V

30V

-30V

-30.009V

-29.991V

50V

Short Circuit (Zero)

-0.04V

+0.04V

50V

+50V

+49.95V

+50.05V

50V

-50V

-50.05V

-49.95V

4. Close Spy Window.

Volts AC Accuracy Test

6-11.

Complete the following procedure to test the accuracy of the volts ac function for
both the 2640A and 2645A. Measurement accuracy applies to all channels, not
just the channel used for the test.
1. Configure Channel 1 for Volts AC In NetDAQ Logger, configure channel 1
for volts ac, 300 mV range. (See “Configuring Analog Channel Functions" in
Chapter 3 of this manual.)
2. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
channel 0101 (instrument 01, channel 01) from the Channel list. Click OK to
open the Spy window.

6-13

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

5700A Output

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

300 mV

20 mV@1 kHz

0.0197V

0.0203V

300 mV

20 mV@100 kHZ

0.0185V

0.0215V

300 mV

300 mV@1 kHz

0.29885V

0.30115V

300 mV

300 mV@100 kHz

0.2845V

0.3155V

3V@1 kHz

2.9885V

3.0115V

30V

30V@1 kHz

29.885V

30.115V

300V [2640A only]

300V@1 kHz

298.85V

301.15V

4. Close Spy Window.

Frequency Accuracy Test

6-12.

Complete the following procedure to test the accuracy of the frequency function
for the 2640A and 2645A. Measurement accuracy applies to all channels, not just
the channel used for the test.
1. Configure Channel 1 for Frequency In NetDAQ Logger, configure channel
1 for frequency. There is no range selection for frequency as all frequency
measurements use Autoranging. (See “Configuring Analog Channel
Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
2. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
channel 0101 (instrument 01, channel 01) from the Channel list. Click OK to
open the Spy window.
3. Verify Accuracy Configure the 5700A for the output values below and
verify the Spy window measurement is between the minimum and maximum
values. Change the channel 1 range as required (see Step 1).
Frequency Range

5700A Output

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

Autorange Only

1V@10 kHz

9.994 kHz

10.006 kHz

4. Close Spy Window.

6-14

Maintenance
Performance Test

Analog Channel Integrity Test

6-13.

Complete the following procedure to test the integrity of each analog channel (2
to 20) to verify each analog channel is capable of making measurements.
1. Configure Channel for Ohms In NetDAQ Logger, configure channels 2
(then 3, then 4, etc. as this step is repeated) to 20 for Ohms-2W, 300 range
[2640A] or 30K range [2645A]. (See “Configuring Analog Channel
Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
2. Connect Test Leads Remove the Universal Input Module from the
instrument, disconnect the test leads and connect them to the channel under
test (starting with channel 2). Reinstall the Universal Input Module in the
instrument.
3. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
the analog channel under test. Click OK to open the Spy window.
4. Verify Reading Alternately open and short the test leads observing the
measurement for the analog channel under test in the Spy window shows
Overload for opened leads and very low resistance for shorted leads (less than
10 ohms for the 2640A, or less than 1k ohms for the 2645A).
5. Repeat Test for each Channel Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each channel (3, 4, 5,
and so forth to channel 20).

Computed Channel Integrity Test

6-14.

Complete the following procedure to test the integrity of each computed channel
(21 to 30) to verify each computed channel is capable of making measurements.
1. Configure Channels 1 and 2 for Ohms In NetDAQ Logger, configure
channels 1 and 2 for Ohms-2W, 30k range. (See “Configuring Analog
Channel Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual)
2. Configure Channel for Average In NetDAQ Logger, configure channels 21
to 30 for ChanA - ChanB (Difference) with the difference channels being
analog channel 1 and analog channel 2. (See "Configuring Computed Channel
Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
3. Connect Test Leads Remove the Universal Input Module from the
instrument and connect test leads to channels 1 and 2. Reinstall the Universal
Input Module in the instrument.
4. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
the computed channels 21 to 28. Click OK to open the Spy window.
5. Verify Reading Alternately open and short both sets of test leads observing
the measurement for the computed channel under test in the Spy window
shows +Overload for opened leads and very low resistance for shorted leads.
6. Repeat Test Repeat steps 4 to 5 for channels 29 and 30.
6-15

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Thermocouple Temperature Accuracy Test

6-15.

Ensure that the Accuracy Tests (above) have been completed before performing
this test.
1. Connect a Thermocouple Remove the Universal Input Module from the
instrument and connect the supplied type T thermocouple to the channel 1
terminals with the blue lead to the H terminal and red lead to the L terminal.
Reinstall the Universal Input Module.
2. Configure Channel 1 for Thermocouples In NetDAQ Logger, configure
channel 1 for Thermocouples with Range (thermocouple type) T. (See
“Configuring Analog Channel Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
3. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
analog channel 01. Click OK to open the Spy window.
4. Verify Accuracy Insert the thermocouple and a mercury thermometer in a
room-temperature bath. Allow 20 minutes for thermal stabilization. The value
displayed on the mercury thermometer should equal the value in the Spy
Window + 0.5°C (2640A) or + 0.95°C (2645A) plus any sensor inaccuracies.
5. Close Spy Window.

Open Thermocouple Response Test

6-16.

This test checks the Open Thermocouple response.
1. Connect an 820 Ohm Test Resistor Remove the Universal Input Module
from the instrument and connect an 820 ohm resistor to the channel 1
terminals. Reinstall the Universal Input Module.
2. Configure Channel 1 for Thermocouples In NetDAQ Logger, configure
channel 1 for Thermocouples with Range (thermocouple type) K. (See
“Configuring Analog Channel Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
3. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
analog channel 1. Click OK to open the Spy window. The value displayed
should approximate the ambient temperature.
4. Connect a 10k Ohm Test Resistor Remove the Universal Input Module
from the instrument and connect a 10k ohm resistor to the channel 1 terminals
to simulate an open thermocouple condition. Reinstall the Universal Input
Module.
5. Verify Open Thermocouple The Spy window indicates an open
thermocouple detect condition by displaying Open TC in place of a
temperature reading.
6. Close Spy Window.

6-16

Maintenance
Performance Test

2-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test (2640A)

6-17.

Complete the following procedure to test the accuracy of the resistance function
for the 2640A using 2 terminals. Measurement accuracy applies to all channels,
not just the channel used for the test. (The 4-wire resistance accuracy test is more
rigorous and you may wish to skip this step and continue to “4-Wire Resistance
Accuracy Test.”)
1. Connect the Resistance Source to Channel 1 Remove the Universal Input
Module from the instrument and connect a cable from the Decade Resistance
Source to the Universal Input Module terminals for channel 1. Reinstall the
Universal Input Module. You may also use the 5700A resistance calibration
output instead of the Decade Resistance Source. Tables are provided for both
connections.
2. Configure Channel 1 for Ohms In NetDAQ Logger, configure channel 1 for
Ohms-2W, 300 range. (See "Configuring Analog Channel Functions" in
Chapter 3 of this manual.)
3. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
channel 0101 (instrument 01, channel 01) from the Channel list. Click OK to
open the Spy window.
4. Verify Accuracy Configure the Decade Resistance Source for the output
values below and verify the Spy window measurement is between the
minimum and maximum values. Change the channel 1 range as required (see
Step 2).
Resistance Range*
300Ω
300Ω
3 kΩ

Decade Resistor
Short Circuit (Zero)
290Ω
Short Circuit (Zero)

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

0Ω

10Ω

289.86Ω

300.14Ω

0Ω

10.5Ω

3 kΩ

2.9 kΩ

2.8986 kΩ

2.9114 kΩ

30 kΩ

29 kΩ

28.983 kΩ

29.027 kΩ

300 kΩ

290 kΩ

289.61 kΩ

290.39 kΩ

3 MΩ

2.9 MΩ

2.8914 MΩ

2.9086 MΩ

* The resistance accuracy in this table makes allowance for up to 0.1Ω of lead wire resistance
plus 0.01% decade resistance tolerance. You must add any additional lead wire resistance
present in your setup to the resistance values given in this table.

6-17

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Resistance Range*
300Ω
300Ω
3 kΩ

5700A
Short Circuit (Zero)
190Ω
Short Circuit (Zero)

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

0Ω

10Ω

189.91Ω

200.09Ω

0Ω

10.5Ω

3 kΩ

1.9 kΩ

1.8991 kΩ

1.9109 kΩ

30 kΩ

19 kΩ

18.989 kΩ

19.021Ω

300 kΩ

190 kΩ

189.75 kΩ

190.26 kΩ

3 MΩ

1.9 MΩ

1.8942 MΩ

1.9058 MΩ

* The resistance accuracy in this table makes allowance for up to 0.1Ω of lead wire resistance.
You must add any additional lead wire resistance present in your setup to the resistance
values given in this table..

5. Close Spy Window.

2-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test (2645A)

6-18.

Complete the following procedure to test the accuracy of the resistance function
for the 2645A using 2 terminals. Measurement accuracy applies to all channels,
not just the channel used for the test. (The 4-wire resistance accuracy test is more
rigorous and you may wish to skip this step and continue to “4-Wire Resistance
Accuracy Test.”)
1. Connect the Resistance Source to Channel 1 Remove the Universal Input
Module from the instrument and connect a cable from the Decade Resistance
Source to the Universal Input Module terminals for channel 1. Reinstall the
Universal Input Module. You may also use the 5700A resistance calibration
output instead of the Decade Resistance Source. Tables are provided for both
connections.
2. Configure Channel 1 for Ohms In NetDAQ Logger, configure channel 1 for
Ohms-2W, 30k range. (See “Configuring Analog Channel Functions" in
Chapter 3 of this manual.)
3. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
channel 0101 (instrument 01, channel 01) from the Channel list. Click OK to
open the Spy window.
4. Verify Accuracy Configure the Decade Resistance Source for the output
values below and verify the Spy window measurement is between the
minimum and maximum values. Change the channel 1 range as required (see
Step 2).

6-18

Maintenance
Performance Test
Resistance Range*

Decade Resistor

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

30 kΩ

Short Circuit (Zero)

700Ω

1 kΩ

30 kΩ

29 kΩ

29.681 kΩ

30.019 kΩ

300 kΩ

290 kΩ

289.07 kΩ

292.63 kΩ

3 MΩ

2.9 MΩ

2.8607 MΩ

2.9410 MΩ

* The resistance accuracy in this table makes allowance for up to 0.1 Ohm of lead wire
resistance plus 0.01% decade resistance tolerance. You must add any additional lead wire
resistance present in your setup to the resistance values given in this table.
Resistance Range*

5700A

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

30 kΩ

Short Circuit (Zero)

700Ω

1 kΩ

30 kΩ

19 kΩ

19.686 kΩ

20.014 kΩ

300 kΩ

190 kΩ

189.60 kΩ

192.10 kΩ

3 MΩ

1.9 MΩ

1.8740 MΩ

1.9277 MΩ

* The resistance accuracy in this table makes allowance for up to 0.1 Ohm of lead wire
resistance. You must add any additional lead wire resistance present in your setup to the
resistance values given in this table.

5. Close Spy Window.

6-19

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

4-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test (2640A)

6-19.

Ensure that the Accuracy Tests (above) have been completed before performing
this test on the 2640A.
1. Connect the Resistance Source to Channels 1 and 11 Remove the
Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect a cable from the
Decade Resistance Source to the Universal Input Module terminals for
channel 1 (Sense) and channel 11 (Source) as shown in Figure 6-4. Reinstall
the Universal Input Module. You may also use the 5700A resistance
calibration output instead of the Decade Resistance Source. Tables are
provided for both connections. Refer to Figure 6-5 for the 5700A 4-wire
connections.
2. Configure Channel 1 for Resistance In NetDAQ Logger, configure channel
1 for Ohms-4W, 300 range. (See “Configuring Analog Channel Functions" in
Chapter 3 of this manual.)
3. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
analog channel 01. Click OK to open the Spy window.
4-Wire (4W) Connection

SOURCE

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL

(4-WIRE)

SENSE

Input
Module
HL

HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL

(4-WIRE)

5700A, Decade Resistance Box
or
DIN/IEC75/RTD
Figure 6-4. 4-Wire Connections to the Universal Input Module (Resistor)

6-20

Maintenance
Performance Test

SOURCE

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL

(4-WIRE)

SENSE

INPUT
MODULE
HL

HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL

(4-WIRE)

5700A
OUTPUT
V ΩA

SENSE
VΩ

WIDEBAND

AUX
CURRENT

GUARD

GROUND

EX SNS

: ON

EX GRD

: OFF

2-WIRE
COMP
OFF

Sense
Source
UUT

5700A
Source
Sense

Figure 6-5. 4-Wire Connections to the Universal Input Module (5700A)

6-21

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

4. Verify Accuracy Configure the Decade Resistance Source for the output
values below and verify the Spy window measurement is between the
minimum and maximum values. Change the channel 1 range as required (see
Step 2).
Resistance Range
300Ω
300Ω
3 kΩ

Decade Resistor
Short Circuit (Zero)
290Ω
Short Circuit (Zero)

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

0Ω

0.05Ω

289.861Ω

290.139Ω

0Ω

0.5Ω

3 kΩ

2.9 kΩ

2.89849 kΩ

2.90137 kΩ

30 kΩ

29 kΩ

28.9834 kΩ

29.0166 kΩ

300 kΩ

290 kΩ

289.621 kΩ

290.379 kΩ

3 MΩ

2.9 MΩ

2.89146 MΩ

2.90854 MΩ

The resistance accuracy in this table makes allowance for up to 0.01% decade resistance
tolerance.

Resistance Range

5700A

300Ω

Short Circuit (Zero)

300Ω

190Ω

3 kΩ

Short Circuit (Zero)

3 kΩ

Maximum Reading

0Ω

0.030Ω

189.912Ω

190.088Ω

0Ω

0.30Ω

1.9 kΩ

1.89912 kΩ

1.90088 kΩ

30 kΩ

19 kΩ

18.9893 kΩ

19.0107 kΩ

300 kΩ

190 kΩ

189.750 kΩ

190.250 kΩ

3 MΩ

1.9 MΩ

1.89425 MΩ

1.90575 MΩ

5. Close Spy Window.

6-22

Minimum Reading

Maintenance
Performance Test

4-Wire Resistance Accuracy Test (2645A)

6-20.

Ensure that the Accuracy Tests (above) have been completed before performing
this test on the 2645A.
1. Connect the Resistance Source to Channels 1 and 11 Remove the
Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect a cable from the
Decade Resistance Source to the Universal Input Module terminals for
channel 1 (Sense) and channel 11 (Source) as shown in Figure 6-4. Reinstall
the Universal Input Module. You may also use the 5700A resistance
calibration output instead of the Decade Resistance Source. Tables are
provided for both connections. Refer to Figure 6-5 for the 5700A 4-wire
connections.
2. Configure Channel 1 for Resistance In NetDAQ Logger, configure channel
1 for Ohms-4W, 300 range. (See “Configuring Analog Channel Functions" in
Chapter 3 of this manual.)
3. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
analog channel 01. Click OK to open the Spy window.
4. Verify Accuracy Configure the Decade Resistance Source for the output
values below and verify the Spy window measurement is between the
minimum and maximum values. Change the channel 1 range as required (see
Step 2).
Resistance Range

Decade Resistor

300Ω

Short Circuit (Zero)

300Ω
3 kΩ

290Ω
Short Circuit (Zero)

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

0Ω

0.1Ω

289.81Ω

290.19Ω

0Ω

1.0Ω

3 kΩ

2.9 kΩ

2.8981 kΩ

2.9019 kΩ

30 κΩ

29 kΩ

28.981 kΩ

29.019 kΩ

300 κΩ

290 kΩ

288.37 kΩ

291.63 kΩ

3 MΩ

2.9 MΩ

2.8600 MΩ

2.9400 MΩ

The resistance accuracy in this table makes allowance for up to 0.01% decade resistance
tolerance.

6-23

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Resistance Range

5700A

300Ω

Short Circuit (Zero)

300Ω
3 kΩ

190Ω
Short Circuit (Zero)

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

0Ω

0.1Ω

189.86Ω

190.14Ω

0Ω

1.0Ω

3 kΩ

1.9 kΩ

1.8986 kΩ

1.9014 kΩ

30 kΩ

19 kΩ

18.986 kΩ

19.014 kΩ

300 kΩ

190 kΩ

188.90 kΩ

191.10 kΩ

3 MΩ

1.9 MΩ

1.8733 MΩ

1.9267 MΩ

5. Close Spy Window.

RTD Temperature Accuracy Test (Resistance) (2640A)

6-21.

The following RTD accuracy test applies to the 2640A and uses the 4-wire
connection (see Figure 6-4).
1. Connect the Decade Resistance Source to Channels 1 and 11 Remove the
Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect a cable from the
Decade Resistance Source to the Universal Input Module terminals for
channel 1 (Sense) and channel 11 (Source) as shown in Figure 6-4.
2. Configure Channel 1 for RTD-4W In NetDAQ Logger, configure channel 1
for RTD-4W, Fixed-385 range, with RTD R0 set to 100 Ohms. (See
“Configuring Analog Channel Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
3. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
analog channel 01. Click OK to open the Spy window.
4. Verify Accuracy Configure the Decade Resistance Source for the output
values below and verify the Spy window simulated temperature measurement
is between the minimum and maximum values.
Decade Resistance
Source Value

Simulated
Temperature (°C)

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

100

0°C

-0.13°C

+0.13°C

200

266.34°C

266.13°C

266.55°C

300

557.70°C

557.40°C

558.00°C

5. Close Spy Window.

6-24

Maintenance
Performance Test

RTD Temperature Accuracy Test (Resistance) (2645A)

6-22.

The following RTD accuracy test applies to the 2645A and uses the 4-wire
connection (see Figure 6-4).
1. Connect the Decade Resistance Source to Channels 1 and 11 Remove the
Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect a cable from the
Decade Resistance Source to the Universal Input Module terminals for
channel 1 (Sense) and channel 11 (Source) as shown in Figure 6-4.
2. Configure Channel 1 for RTD-4W In NetDAQ Logger, configure channel 1
for RTD-4W, Fixed-385 range, with RTD R0 set to 100 Ohms. (See
“Configuring Analog Channel Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
3. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
analog channel 01. Click OK to open the Spy window.
4. Verify Accuracy Configure the Decade Resistance Source for the output
values below and verify the Spy window simulated temperature measurement
is between the minimum and maximum values.
Decade Resistance
Source Value

Simulated
Temperature (°C)

Minimum Reading

Maximum Reading

100

0°C

-0.31°C

+0.31°C

200

266.34°C

265.94°C

266.74°C

300

557.70°C

556.07°C

558.33°C

5. Close Spy Window.

RTD Temperature Accuracy Test (DIN/IEC 751 RTD)

6-23.

The following RTD accuracy test applies to both the 2640A and 2645A, and uses
the 4-wire connection (see Figure 6-4).
1. Connect the RTD Source to Channels 1 and 11 Remove the Universal
Input Module from the instrument and connect the RTD to the Universal
Input Module terminals for channel 1 (Sense) and channel 11 (Source) as
shown in Figure 6-4.
2. Configure Channel 1 for RTD-4W In NetDAQ Logger, configure channel 1
for RTD-4W, Fixed-385 range, with RTD R0 set to 100 Ohms (assuming the
reference R0=100; enter the correct value for R0). (See “Configuring Analog
Channel Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
3. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
analog channel 01. Click OK to open the Spy window.

6-25

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

4. Verify Accuracy Insert the RTD and a mercury thermometer in a roomtemperature bath. Allow 20 minutes for thermal stabilization. The value
displayed on the mercury thermometer should equal the value in the Spy
Window +0.25°C (2640A) or +0.80°C (2645A) plus sensor inaccuracies.
5. Close Spy Window.

Digital Input/Output Tests

6-24.

The Digital Input/Output Tests check the eight Digital I/O lines on the DIGITAL
I/O connector for output and input functions.

Digital I/O Output Test

6-25.

This test checks the Digital I/O lines when used as outputs.
1. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
01DIO. Click OK to open the Spy window.
2. Verify Digital I/O Output for all Unset Lines The Spy window summarizes
the 8 DIO binary lines as a decimal equivalent, i.e., 255 for the present
condition of all lines unset (11111111).
3. Measure DIO Lines Using a digital multimeter, measure the output of each
DIO line, referenced to the GND line, for a voltage greater than +3.8V dc.
4. Close Spy Window.
5. Configure Channels 1 to 8 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger, configure
channels 1 to 8 for Volts dc, 3V range. (See “Configuring Analog Channel
Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
6. Configure Channels 1 to 8 for Alarms In NetDAQ Logger, configure each
channel 1 to 8 for an Alarm 1 with Alarm Sense=LO, Alarm Value=1 and
Digital Outputs assigned as below. (See "Configuring Alarms" in Chapter 3 of
this manual.)
Channel 1 - Digital Output DO0
Channel 2 - Digital Output DO1
Channel 3 - Digital Output DO2
Channel 4 - Digital Output DO3
Channel 5 - Digital Output DO4
Channel 6 - Digital Output DO5
Channel 7 - Digital Output DO6
Channel 8 - Digital Output DO7
7. Verify Channels and Alarm Configuration After Steps 5 and 6 are
completed, the portion of the Main Window for channels and alarms
configuration will appear as shown below.

6-26

Maintenance
Performance Test

8. Short Channel Inputs Remove the Universal Input Module from the
instrument and apply a short to channels 1 through 8. Reinstall the Universal
Input Module.
9. Start Instrument Scanning Select Logging | Start Instrument to start the
instrument scanning. The instrument must be scanning to set the DIO lines.
10. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
01DIO. Click OK to open the Spy window.
11. Verify Digital I/O Output for all Set Lines The Spy window summarizes
the 8 DIO binary lines as a decimal equivalent, i.e., 0 for the present condition
of all lines set (00000000).
12. Measure DIO Lines Using a digital multimeter, measure the output of each
DIO line, referenced to the GND line, for a voltage less than +0.8V dc.
13. Close Spy Window.
14. Stop Instrument Scanning Select Logging | Stop Instrument to stop
instrument scanning.

Digital Input Test

6-26.

This test checks the Digital I/O lines when used as inputs.
1. Connect Test Leads to DIGITAL I/O Connector Remove the 10-position
DIGITAL I/O connector from the instrument rear panel. Connect a test lead to
each DIO line 0 to 7, plus a test lead to the GND line. Also connect a test lead
to the Σ (Totalizer) output. Reinstall the connector.
2. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
01DIO. Click OK to open the Spy window.

6-27

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

3. Verify Digital I/O Input for all Set Lines In sequence, individually ground
each DIO line to the GND line using the DIO wires connected in Step 1. Note
the change in the DIO status reported in the Spy window as follows:
None grounded Reported DIO Status = 255
DIO0 grounded Reported DIO Status = 254
DIO1 grounded Reported DIO Status = 253
DIO2 grounded Reported DIO Status = 251
DIO3 grounded Reported DIO Status = 247
DIO4 grounded Reported DIO Status = 239
DIO5 grounded Reported DIO Status = 223
DIO6 grounded Reported DIO Status = 191
DIO7 grounded Reported DIO Status = 127
4. Close Spy Window.

Totalizer Tests

6-27.

The Totalizer Tests check the Totalizer feature for counting and sensitivity.

Totalizer Count Test

6-28.

This test checks the ability of the Totalizer feature to count.
1. Enable Totalizer Debounce In NetDAQ Logger, select Setup | Instrument
Configuration to open the Instrument Configuration dialog box. Check
Totalizer Debounce if it is not already checked and click OK.
2. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
01TOTAL. Click OK to open the Spy window.
3. Increase Totalizer Count Connect the ∑ (Totalizer) test lead to the GND
line and disconnect again. Each time this is done, the Totalizer count should
increase one.
4. Verify Totalizer Count The Spy window displays the new Totalizer count
which is equal to the number of contacts between totalizer and ground.
5. Close Spy Window.

Totalizer Sensitivity Test

6-29.

This test checks the ability of the Totalizer feature to count voltage transition at a
particular sensitivity level.
1. Disable Totalizer Debounce In NetDAQ Logger, select Setup | Instrument
Configuration to open the Instrument Configuration dialog box. Uncheck
Totalizer Debounce if it is currently checked and click OK.
6-28

Maintenance
Performance Test

2. Connect Test Leads At the DIGITAL I/O connector, connect the Σ
(Totalizer) test lead and GND test lead to a signal generator’s output
terminals. Adjust the signal generator for an output of 1.5V rms sine wave at
10 Hz.
3. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
01TOTAL. Click OK to open the Spy window.
4. Verify Totalizer Count The Spy window displays the Totalizer count.
Verify the totalizer count is advancing at approximately 10 counts per spy
window update (nominal 1 second intervals).
5. Close Spy Window.

Master Alarm Output Test

6-30.

This test checks the Master Alarm output for a logic low when a channel is in
alarm.
1. Connect Test Leads to ALARM/TRIGGER I/O Connector Remove the
8-position ALARM/TRIGGER I/O connector from the instrument rear panel.
Connect a test lead to each line, MA (Master Alarm), TO (Trigger Output), TI
(Trigger Input), plus a test lead to the GND line. (See Figure 2-6.) Reinstall
the connector.
2. Measure MA Line Using a digital multimeter, measure the output of the
unset MA test lead, referenced to the GND test lead, for a voltage greater than
+3.8V dc.
3. Verify Configuration Channel 1 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger, verify
channel 1 is configured for Volts dc, 3V range. (See “Configuring Analog
Channel Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
4. Verify Configuration Channel 1 for Alarms In NetDAQ Logger, verify
channel 1 is configured for an Alarm 1 with Alarm Sense=LO, Alarm
Value=1 and Digital Output=DO0. (See "Configuring Alarms” in Chapter 3 of
this manual.)
5. Start Instrument Scanning Click the Start Instrument button on the Button
Bar to start instrument scanning. Scanning is initiated to enable the Master
Alarm output.
6. Measure MA Line Using a digital multimeter, measure the output of the set
MA test lead, referenced to the GND test lead, for a voltage less than
+0.8V dc.
7. Stop Scanning Select Logging | Stop Instrument to stop instrument scanning.

6-29

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Trigger Input Test

6-31.

This test checks the ability of the Trigger Input line to trigger measurement
scanning.
1. Configure Trigger Input In NetDAQ Logger, configure the scan parameters
for External Trigger with an Interval 2 of 1 second. Be sure Interval Trigger
and Alarm Trigger are not enabled. (See “Trigger Input” in Chapter 3 of this
manual.)
2. Verify Configuration Channel 1 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger, verify
channel 1 is configured for Volts dc, 3V range. (See "Configuring Analog
Channel Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
3. Start Instrument Scanning Click the Start Instrument button on the Button
Bar to enable instrument scanning, although no measurement scanning takes
place because the external Trigger Input is not set.
4. Open Logging Status Window Select the Show Logging Status command
from the Options menu to display the Logging Status window.
5. Verify Logging Status Note in the Logging Status window that the
Retrieved Scans count is zero and not incrementing.
6. Set Trigger Input While monitoring the Logging Status window, connect
the TI (Trigger Input) test lead to the GND test lead. Note in the Logging
Status window, the Retrieved Scans count increments at 1-second intervals.
Disconnect the TI and GND test lead connection.
7. Stop Scanning Click the Stop Instrument button on the Button Bar to stop
instrument scanning.

Trigger Output Test

6-32.

This test checks the Trigger Output (125µs logic low) that occurs each time the
instrument scans.
1. Configure Interval Trigger In NetDAQ Logger, configure the scan
parameters for Interval Trigger with an Interval 1 of 1 second. (See “The
Instrument Configuration Dialog Box” in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
2. Verify Configuration Channel 1 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger, verify
channel 1 is configured for Volts dc, 3V range. (See "Configuring Analog
Channel Functions" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
3. Measure Unset Trigger Output Line Using a digital multimeter, measure
the output of the unset TO test lead, referenced to the GND test lead, for a
voltage greater than +3.8V dc.

6-30

Maintenance
Calibration

4. Verify Trigger Output is Enabled In NetDAQ Logger, select Setup |
Instrument Config. In the Instrument Configuration dialog box, verify the
Trigger Out box is checked. Click OK to return to the Main Window. (See
“The Instrument Configuration Dialog Box" in Chapter 3 of this manual.)
5. Connect Trigger Output Connect the TO test lead on the
ALARM/TRIGGER IO connector to the Σ (Totalizer) test lead on the
DIGITAL I/O connector. This allows each Trigger Output pulse to be counted
by the Totalizer.
6. Start Instrument Scanning Click the Start Instrument button on the Button
Bar to enable instrument scanning.
7. Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu. Select
01TOTAL. Click OK to open the Spy window.
8. Verify Totalizer Count The Spy window displays the Totalizer count. Note
the Totalizer is incrementing at 1-second intervals as it counts the Trigger
Output pulse at the start of each scan.
9. Close Spy Window.
10. Stop Scanning Click the Stop Instrument button on the Button Bar to stop
instrument scanning.

Calibration

6-33.
Note

Refer to the Service Manual (PN 942615) for calibration
procedures. The instrument must be stabilized in an environment
with an ambient temperature of 22°C to 24°C and a relative
humidity of less than 70%, and must have been powered at least 30
minutes prior to calibration.
The instrument features closed-case calibration, that is, calibration that is
completed over the RS-232 interface. Using known reference sources, closed-case
calibration has many advantages. There are no parts to disassemble, no
mechanical adjustments to make, and the instrument can be calibrated by an
automated instrumentation system.
The instrument should normally be calibrated on a regular cycle, typically every
90 days to 1 year. The chosen calibration cycle depends on the accuracy
specification you wish to maintain. The instrument should also be calibrated if it
fails the performance test or has undergone repair.

6-31

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Note
Do not press CAL ENABLE unless you have a copy of the Service
Manual and intend to calibrate the instrument. If you have activated
calibration and wish to exit, press CAL ENABLE until the CAL
annunciator is removed from the display (or turn the power off).

Adding Calibration to the Utilities Menu

6-34.

To add calibration to the Utilities menu, complete the following procedure:
1. Exit NetDAQ Logger.
2. Add /c switch to the NetDAQ Logger command line. If you do not know how
to add the switch, see “Starting NetDAQ Logger with a Setup File” and
“NetDAQ Logger Command Line” in Chapter 3 of this manual.

ds070.bmp

3. Start NetDAQ Logger and the Instrument Calibration command is now listed
in the Utilities menu.

6-32

Maintenance
Calibration

Instrument Calibration Dialog Box

6-35.

The Instrument Calibration dialog box (below) sets up the RS-232 port for
calibrating the instrument and provides calibration function selection. See the
Service Manual (PN 942615) for the calibration procedure.

ds306s.bmp

RS-232 Port Click the scroll arrow to list the RS-232 port choices: COM1 to
COM4. Default is COM1. This is the Host Computer port connected to the
instrument.
Baud Rate Click the scroll arrow to list the baud rate choices: 4800, 9600, 19.2K,
and 38.4K. Default is 19.2K this rate must match the rate selected as the
instrument front panel.
Volts dc Click to perform volts dc calibration.
Volts ac Click to perform volts ac calibration.
Resistance Click to perform resistance calibration.
Frequency Click to perform frequency calibration.

Calibration Steps Dialog Box

6-36.

The Calibration Steps dialog box (below) performs the calibration steps for volts
dc, volts ac, resistance, or frequency. The calibration procedure is provided in the
Service Manual (PN 942615).

6-33

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ds308s.bmp

Apply Displays the suggested value to apply to the instrument from the calibrator.
Actual Enter the actual value applied to the instrument from the calibrator. Use a
value as close as possible to the suggested value for best calibration results.
Perform Calibration Step Apply the calibrator output to the instrument and then
click this button to perform the calibration.

Variations in the Display

6-37.

Under normal operation, the display presents various combinations of brightly and
dimly lit annunciators and digits. However, you may encounter other, random
irregularities across different areas of the display under the following
circumstances:
• After prolonged periods of displaying the same information.
• The display has not been used for a prolonged period
This phenomenon can be cleared by activating the entire display and leaving it on
overnight (or at least for several hours). Use the following procedure to keep the
display fully lit:
1. Turn the instrument power off.
2. Press the front panel

key and then apply power. Continue to hold the

key until the instrument beeps. The entire front panel display comes on
and stays on.
3. When you wish to return the display to normal, press any front panel key.

Service

6-38.

If the instrument fails to operate, check that operating instructions presented
earlier in this manual are being followed. If the problem cannot be remedied, send
the instrument, postage paid, to the nearest Fluke Service Center. A list of Service
6-34

Maintenance
Service

Centers is provided in Appendix K of this manual. Be sure to pack the instrument
securely; use the original container if available. Include a description of the
problem. Fluke assumes no responsibility for damage in transit.
For application or operation assistance or information on Fluke products,
telephone:
1-800-44-FLUKE (1-800-443-5853) in USA and Canada
31 40 2 678200 in Europe
1-206-356-5500 from other countries
For written assistance or information, contact:
Fluke Corporation
Fluke Europe B.V.
Post Office Box 9090
Post Office Box 1186
Everett, WA
5602 B.D
98206-9090
Eindhoven
USA
The Netherlands

6-35

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Fluke offers a 1-year warranty for the 264XA-801 (Ethernet plug-in card) and
264XA-802 (Ethernet Parallel-to-LAN adapter), and 264XA-803 (PCMCIA
Adapter) options. Defective units may be returned to either Fluke or to the option
manufacturer for repair or replacement. The original equipment manufacturer may
offer warranties beyond the warranty supplied by Fluke.

Replacement Parts

6-39.

Replacement parts are listed in Table 6-3. To order replacement parts in the USA,
call 1-800-526-4731. To order parts from outside the USA, contact the nearest
Fluke Service Center. (See Appendix K, “Fluke Service Centers.”). Other
instrument models, options and accessories are listed in Table 1-1.
Table 6-3. Replacement Parts
Part Number

6-36

Description

343723

Power Cable

851712

RS-232 Cable (for calibration) 9-pin socket to 25-pin socket

875877

ALARM/TRIGGER I/O Connector

875880

DIGITAL I/O Connector

926126

Replacement Fuse 15/100A, 250V, Time Delay (lot of 5 pieces)

926134

Replacement Fuse 15/100A, 250V, Time Delay (lot of 25 pieces)

942615

NetDAQ Service Manual

942813

BNC "Y" Connector

942834

BNC 50-Ohm Termination without Ground Wire for 10Base2

943600

4-meter 10Base2 Coaxial Ethernet Cable

944538

BNC 50-Ohm Termination with Ground Wire for 10Base2

944629

Replacement Fuse 15/100A, 250V, Time Delay

Appendices

Appendix
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

Title
Specifications .......................................................................................
Noise, Shielding, and Crosstalk Considerations ..................................
True-RMS Measurements ....................................................................
RTD Linearization................................................................................
Computed Channel Equations ..............................................................
Data File Format...................................................................................
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) ..........................................................
Ethernet Cabling...................................................................................
Network Considerations .......................................................................
Error Messages & Exception Condition...............................................
Fluke Service Centers...........................................................................

Page
A-1
B-1
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
H-1
I-1
J-1
K-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Appendix A

Specifications

Introduction

A-1.

Specifications are divided into three sections. The first section contains the
combined specifications that apply equally to both the 2640A and 2645A
instruments. The second section contains specifications that apply only to the
2640A instrument. The third section contains specifications that apply only to the
2645A instrument.

2640A/2645A Combined Specifications

A-2.

The following specifications apply equally to both the 2640A and 2645A
instruments. The topics include:
•
•
•

2640A/2645A General Specifications
2640A/2645A Environmental Specifications
2640A/2645A Digital I/O and Totalizer Interface

2640A/2645A General Specifications

A-3.

Table A-1 provides the general specifications for the 2640A and 2645A
instruments.

A-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Table A-1. 2640A/2645A General Specifications
Specification

Characteristic

Channel Capacity

I/O Lines Total

Size

9.3 cm high, 21.6 cm wide, 36.2 cm deep
(3.67 in high, 8.5 in wide, 14.28 in deep)

Weight

Net, 4 kg (8.8 lb.)
Shipping, 6.0 kg (13.2 lb.)

Power

107 to 264V ac (no switching required), 50 and
60 Hz, 15VA maximum
9V dc to 16V dc, 6W maximum
If both sources are applied simultaneously, ac
voltage is used if it exceeds approximately 8
times the dc voltage.
Automatic switchover occurs between ac and
dc without interruption.

A-2

Safety Standards

Both instruments comply with:
IEC 1010-1
UL 1244
CSA Bulletin 556B.
ANSI/ISA-S82.01-1994
CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1-92

EMC Standards

When shielded cables are used, both
instruments comply with:
Vfg. 243/1991
FCC-15B, at the Class B level
EN 50081-1
EN 50082-1

Serial Interface (RS-232C)

Connector: 9 pin male (DI-9P)
Signals: TX, RX, DTR, RTS, GND
Modem Control: full duplex
Baud rates: 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
Data format: 8 data bits, no parity bit, one stop
bit
Flow control: XON/XOFF
Echo: Off

Common Mode Voltage

2640A 150V (300V on channels 1 and 11)
2645A 50V dc or 30V ac rms.

Specifications
2640A/2645A Combined Specifications

Table A-1. 2640A/2645A General Specifications (cont)
Specification
Maximum Measurement Speed (Scanning
Rates)

Characteristic
2640A
Slow - 6 readings per second
Medium - 45 readings per second (60 Hz)
Fast - 143 readings per second
(20 configured channels)
2645A
Slow - 54 readings per second (60 Hz)
Medium - 200 readings per second
Fast - 1000 readings per second
(20 configured channels)
Fast single Channel - 400 readings per second

Accuracy of Medium Scanning Rate

= (Fast Accuracy + Slow Accuracy)/2

Additional error if “Automatic drift correction” is
turned off.

If the instrument was fully warmed-up at the
time drift correction was disabled, i.e. turnedon at least 1 hour earlier; 1/10 of the 90 day
specification per °C change in ambient
temperature from the temperature when drift
correction was disabled.
If the instrument was NOT fully warmed-up at
the time drift correction was disabled; Add an
error equal to the 90 day specification for
instrument warm-up + 1/10 of the 90 day
specification per °C change in ambient
temperature from the temperature when drift
correction was disabled.

2640A/2645A Environmental Specifications

A-4.

Table A-2 provides a summary of the environmental specifications for the
2640A/2645A.

A-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Table A-2. 2640A/2645A Environmental Specifications
Specification

Characteristic

Warm-up Time

1 hour to rated specifications -or- 15 minutes if relative
humidity (non-condensing) is 50% or less.

Operating Temperature

-20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)

Storage Temperature

-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F)

Relative Humidity

90% maximum for -10°C to 28°C (14°F to 82.4°F)
75% maximum for 28°C to 35°C (82.4°F to 95°F)
50% maximum for 35°C to 60°C (95°F to 140°F)
(3 MΩ range, reduce humidity rating by 25% for 1 hour
warm-up. 3 MΩ range meets full humidity ratings with 2
hour warm-up.)

Altitude

Operating: 2,000m (6,561 ft) maximum
Non-operating: 12,200m (40,000 ft) maximum

Vibration

0.7g at 15 Hz
1.3g at 25 Hz
3g at 55 Hz

Shock

30g half sine per Mil-T-28800E
Bench handling per Mil-T-28800E

2640A/2645A Input/Output Capabilities

A-5.

The following specifications include the input/output functions, including the
Digital I/O, Trigger Out, Trigger In, and Master Alarm output.

Digital I/O

A-6.

Table A-3 provides a summary of the Digital I/O specifications for the 8 Digital
I/O lines (0 to 7). Digital I/O is located on the DIGITAL I/O connector, terminals
0 to 7, and GND.
Table A-3. 2640A/2645A DIGITAL I/O Specification
Specification

A-4

Characteristic

Maximum Input Voltage

30V

Minimum Input Voltage

-4V

Isolation

None (dc coupled)

Threshold

1.4V

Hysteresis

500 mV

Specifications
2640A/2645A Combined Specifications

Table A-3. 2640A/2645A DIGITAL I/O Specification (cont)
Specification

Characteristic

Output Voltage - TTL Logical Zero

0.8V maximum for an I out of -1.0 mA (1 LSTTL
load)

Output Voltage - TTL Logical One

3.8V minimum for an I out of 0.05 mA (1 LSTTL
load)

Output Voltage - Non-TTL Load Zero

1.8V maximum for an Iout of -20 mA

Output Voltage - Non-TTL Load One

3.25V maximum for an Iout of -50 mA

Trigger In

A-7.

Table A-4 provides a summary of the Trigger In specifications. The Trigger In
input is located on the ALARM/TRIGGER I/O connector, terminals TI and GND.
Table A-4. 2640A/2645A Trigger In (TI) Specification
Specification

Characteristic

Logical High - Trigger not set

Minimum: 2.0V
Maximum: 7.0V

Logical Low - Trigger set

Minimum: -0.6V
Maximum: +0.8V

Compatibility

TTL or Contact Closure

Isolation

None (dc coupled)

Minimum Pulse Width

5 µs

Maximum Frequency

Nominal 400 Hz

Repeatability

3 ms

A-5

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Trigger Out

A-8.

Table A-5 provides a summary of the Trigger Out specifications. The Trigger Out
output is located on the ALARM/TRIGGER I/O connector, terminals TO and
GND.
Table A-5. 2640A/2645A Trigger Out (TO) Specification
Specification

Characteristic

TTL Logical Zero - Trigger Out Set

0.8V maximum for an Iout of -1.0 mA (1 LSTTL
load)

TTL Logical One - Trigger Out Not Set

3.8V minimum for an Iout of 0.05 mA (1 LSTTL
load)

Non-TTL Logical Zero - Trigger Out Set

1.8V maximum for an Iout of -20 mA

Non-TTL Logical One - Trigger Out Not Set

3.25V maximum for an Iout of -50 mA

Pulse Duration (Logic Low)

125 µs

Isolation

None

Master Alarm

A-9.

Table A-6 provides a summary of the Master Alarm specifications. The Master
Alarm output is located on the ALARM/TRIGGER I/O connector, terminals MA
and GND.
Table A-6. 2640A/2645A Master Alarm (MA) Specification
Specification

A-6

Characteristic

TTL Logical Zero - Master Alarm Set

0.8V maximum for an Iout of -1.0 mA (1 LSTTL
load)

TTL Logical One - Master Alarm Not Set

3.8V minimum for an Iout of 0.05 mA (1 LSTTL
load)

Non-TTL Logical Zero - Master Alarm Set

1.8V maximum for an Iout of -20 mA

Non-TTL Logical One - Master Alarm Not Set

3.25V maximum for an Iout of -50 mA

Isolation

None

Specifications
2640A Specifications

2640A/2645A Totalizer

A-10.

Table A-7 provides a summary of the Totalizer specifications. The Totalizer input
is located on the DIGITAL I/O connector, terminals ∑ and GND.
Table A-7. 2640A/2645A Totalizer Specification
Specification

Characteristic

Maximum Input Voltage

30V

Minimum Input Voltage

-4V

Minimum Peak Voltage

Isolation

None (dc coupled)

Threshold

1.4V

Hysteresis

500 mV

Input Debouncing

None or 1.75 ms (selectable)

Maximum Transition Rate

5 kHz (Debounce disabled)
500 Hz (Debounce enabled)

Maximum Count

4,294,967,295

2640A/2645A Real-Time Clock and Calendar

A-11.

Table A-8 provides a summary of the battery powered real-time clock and
calendar.
Table A-8. 2640A/2645A Real-Time Clock and Calendar
Specification

Characteristic

Accuracy

1 minute per month for 0°C to 50°C range

Battery Life

>15 unpowered instrument years for -20°C to
28°C (32°F to 82.4°F).
>6 unpowered instrument years for -20°C to
50°C (32°F to 122°F).
>4 unpowered instrument years for 50°C to
70°C (122°F to 158°F).

2640A Specifications

A-12.

This section includes specifications specific to the 2640A instrument by
measurement function.
A-7

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

2640A DC Voltage Measurement Specifications

A-13.

Tables A-9 to A-11 provide 2640A specifications for the dc voltage measurement
function.
Table A-9. 2640A DC Voltage Measurement General Specifications
Specification

Characteristic

Input Impedance

100 MΩ in parallel with 150 pF maximum for
ranges ≤3V
10 MΩ in parallel with 100 pF maximum for ranges
>3V

Normal Mode Rejection

50dB minimum at 50 Hz/60 Hz ±0.1%, Slow Rate

Common Mode Rejection

120dB minimum at dc, 50 Hz/60 Hz ±0.1%, 1 kΩ
imbalance, Slow Rate
80dB minimum at dc, 50 Hz/60 Hz ±0.1%, 1 kΩ
imbalance, Medium and Fast Rates

Channel-to-Channel Crosstalk

120dB minimum Slow Rate (e.g., 30V dc on
channel 1 may cause a 30µV error on channel 2)
100dB minimum Medium and Fast Rates (e.g., 1V
dc on channel 1 may cause a 10 µV error on
channel 2)

Temperature Coefficient

Add 1/10th the 90-day specification per °C above
28°C or below 18°C. (Generally, only the %input
portion is affected.)

Accuracy at -20°C

Multiply the -10°C to + 60°C accuracy specification
by 2. After 1 hour warm-up. For accuracy between
-10°C and -20°C, interpolate linearly.

Maximum Input Voltage

150V (300V for channels 1 and 11) to any input
terminal.

Table A-10. 2640A DC Voltage Range and Resolution Specifications
Resolution
Range

Slow

90 mV
.3 µV
300 mV
1 µV
3V
10 µV
30V
100 µV
150V/300V
1 mV
Note 300V range applies to channels 1 and 11 only.

A-8

Fast
1 µV
3 µV
30 µV
300 µV
3 mV

Specifications
2640A Specifications

Table A-11. 2640A DC Voltage Accuracy Specifications
Accuracy, 3σ ± (% input + V)
18°C to 28°C
Range

90 Day
Slow

-10°C to 60°C
1 Year

Fast

Slow

1 Year
Fast

Slow

Fast

90 mV

.01%+7 µV

.01%+17 µV

.013%+8 µV

.013%+18 µV

.042%+18.2µV .042%+44.2µV

300 mV

.01%+15 µV

.01%+30 µV

.013%+17 µV

.013%+35 µV

.042%+39 µV

.01%+.1 mV

.01%+.2 mV

.013%+.15 mV

.013%+.2 mV

.042%+.26 mV .042%+.52mV

30V

.01%+1.5 mV

.02%+3 mV

.013%+1.7 mV

.026%+3.5 mV

.042%+3.9 mV .084%+7.8mV

150/300V

.01%+15 mV

.04%+30 mV

.013%+17 mV

.052%+35 mV

.042%+39 mV

.042%+78 µV

.168%+78 mV

Note 300V range applies to channels 1 and 11 only.

2640A AC Voltage Measurement Specifications

A-14.

Tables A-12 to A-14 provide 2640A specifications for the ac voltage measurement
function.
Table A-12. 2640A AC Voltage General Specifications
Specification

Characteristic

Input Impedance

1 MΩ in parallel with 100 pF

Maximum Crest Factor

3.0 Maximum
2.0 for rated accuracy

Crest Factor Error

For non-sinusoidal input signals with crest factors
between 2 and 3 and pulse widths ≥100 µs, add
0.2% to the accuracy specifications.

Common Mode Rejection

80 dB minimum at dc, 50 Hz/60 Hz ±0.1%, 1 kΩ
imbalance, Slow Rate

A-9

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Table A-12. 2640A AC Voltage General Specifications (cont)
Specification

Characteristic

Maximum Input Voltage

The lesser voltage of:
300V ac rms from any terminal on channels 1 and
11 to earth.
150V ac rms from any terminal on channels 2
through 10, and 12 through 20 to earth.
300V ac rms from any terminal on channels 1 and
11 to any other terminal.
150V ac rms from any terminal on channels 2
through 10 and 12 through 20 to any other input
terminal.

Maximum Volt-Hertz Product

2x106 Volt-Hertz product on any range, normal
mode input.
1x106 Volt-Hertz product on any range, common
mode input.

Temperature Coefficient

Linear interpolation between 2 applicable points for
temperatures between 28ºC and 60ºC, or -10ºC
and 18ºC, e.g., if the applicable specification at
28ºC is 2% and the specification at 60ºC is 3%,
then the specification at 40ºC is
(3%-2%)x(40-28)/(60-28)+2%=2.375%.

Accuracy at -20°C

Multiply the -10°C to + 60°C accuracy specification
by 2. After 1 hour warm-up. For accuracy between
-10°C and -20°C, interpolate linearly.

DC Component Error

The presence of a dc voltage will cause an
indeterminate error in the reading of the ac voltage
on the input.

Table A-13. 2640A AC Voltage Range and Resolution Specifications
Resolution

Range
Slow

Full Scale
±30,000
300 mV
10 µV
3V
100 µV
30V
1 mV
150/300V
10 mV
Note 300V range applies to channels 1 and 11 only.

A-10

Fast

Minimum Input for
Rate Accuracy

±3,000
100 µV
1 mV
10 mV
100 mV


20 mV
200 mV
2V
20V

Specifications
2640A Specifications

Table A-14. 2640A AC Voltage Accuracy Specifications
1 Year Accuracy + (%input + V)*
Range

Frequency

18ºC to 28ºC
Slow

300 mV

30V

150/300V

Fast

-10ºC to 60ºC
Slow

Fast

20 to 50 Hz

3%+.25 mV

6%+.5 mV

3.5%+.25 mV

7%+.5 mV

50 to 150 Hz

0.4%+.25 mV

1%+.5 mV

0.5%+.25 mV

1.5%+.5 mV

150 Hz to 10 kHz

0.3%+.25 mV

1%+.5 mV

0.4%+.25 mV

1.5%+.5 mV

10 kHz to 20 kHz

0.4%+.25 mV

1%+.5 mV

0.7%+.25 mV

1.5%+.5 mV

20 kHz to 50 kHz

2%+.3 mV

3%+.5 mV

3%+.3 mV

4%+.5 mV

50 kHz to 100 kHz

5%+.5 mV

5%+1 mV

7%+.5 mV

8%+1 mV

20 to 50 Hz

3%+2.5 mV

6%+5 mV

3.5%+2.5 mV

7%+5 mV

50 to 150 Hz

0.4%+2.5 mV

1%+5 mV

0.5%+2.5 mV

1.2%+5 mV

150 Hz to 10 kHz

0.3%+2.5 mV

1%+5 mV

0.4%+2.5 mV

1.2%+5 mV

10 kHz to 20 kHz

0.4%+2.5 mV

1%+5 mV

0.5%+2.5 mV

1.2%+5 mV

20 kHz to 50 kHz

1%+3 mV

1.5%+6 mV

1.5%+3 mV

2%+6 mV

50 kHz to 100 kHz

2%+5 mV

3%+10 mV

3%+5 mV

4%+10 mV

20 to 50 Hz

3%+25 mV

6%+50 mV

3.5%+25 mV

7%+50 mV

50 to 150 Hz

0.4%+25 mV

1%+50 mV

0.5%+25 mV

1.2%+40 mV

150 Hz to 10 kHz

0.3%+25 mV

1%+50 mV

0.5%+25 mV

1.2%+40 mV

10 kHz to 20 kHz

0.4%+25 mV

1%+50 mV

0.5%+25 mV

1.2%+40 mV

20 kHz to 50 kHz

1%+30 mV

1.5%+60 mV

1%+30 mV

2%+50 mV

50 kHz to 100 kHz
V<20V

2%+50 mV

3%+100 mV

2.5%+50 mV

4%+100 mV

20 to 50 Hz

3%+.25V

6%+.50V

3.5%+.25V

7%+.50V

50 to 150 Hz

0.4%+.25V

1%+.5V

0.5%+.25V

1.2%+.40V

150 Hz to 2 kHz
V*Hz>2*106

0.3%+.25V

1.2%+.5V

0.5%+.25V

1.4%+.40V

2 kHz to 20 kHz
V<100V

0.4%+.25V

1.6%+.5V

0.5%+.25V

1.8%+.40V

20 kHz to 50 kHz
V<40V

1%+.30V

2%+.6V

1.2%+.30V

2.5%+.50V

* Sine wave inputs>6% of scale. Accuracy for signals with crest factors <2.

A-11

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

2640A 4-Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications

A-15.

Tables A-15 to A-17 provide 2640A specifications for the 4-wire resistance
measurement function. The 4-wire measurements use 2 input channels a decade
apart, e.g., channels 4 and 14.
Table A-15. 2640A 4-Wire Resistance Temperature Coefficient
Specification

Characteristic

Temperature Coefficient

Add 1/10th the 90 day specification per ºC
above 28ºC or below 18ºC.

Accuracy at -20°C

Multiply the -10°C to + 60°C accuracy
specification by 2. After 1 hour warmup. For
accuracy between -10°C and -20°C, interpolate
linearly.

Table A-16. 2640A 4-Wire Resistance Range and Resolution Specifications
Resolution
Range
300Ω
3 kΩ
30 kΩ
300 kΩ
3 MΩ

Slow

Fast

Current
Applied

1 mΩ
10 mΩ
100 mΩ
1Ω
10Ω

3 mΩ
30 mΩ
300 mΩ
3Ω
30Ω

1 mA
100 µA
10 µA
10 µA
1 µA

Full Scale
Voltage

Maximum voltage
applied by instrument

300 mV
300 mV
300 mV
3.0V
3.0V

3.5V
3.5V
3.5V
3.5V
3.5V

Table A-17. 2640A 4-Wire Resistance Accuracy Specifications
Accuracy, 3σ + (% input + V)
18ºC to 28ºC
Range

90 Day
Slow

-10ºC to 60ºC
1 Year

Fast

Slow

1 Year
Fast

Slow

Fast

300Ω

.015%+20 mΩ .02%+80 mΩ

.02%+50 mΩ

.02%+120 mΩ .084%+126 mΩ

.084%+336 mΩ

3kΩ

.02%+.3Ω

.02%+.8Ω

.02%+.5Ω

.02%+1.2Ω

.084%+1.26Ω

.084%+3.36Ω

30 kΩ

.03%+3Ω

.04%+10Ω

.03%+5Ω

.04%+15Ω

.126%+12.6Ω

.168%+42Ω

300 kΩ

.1%+40Ω

. 2%+100Ω

.1%+60Ω

.2%+150Ω

.42%+168Ω

.84%+420Ω

3 MΩ*

.25%+800Ω*

.5%+10kΩ*

.25%+1 kΩ*

.5%+1.5kΩ*

1.05%+3.36Ω

2.1%+4.2 kΩ*

* The 3 MΩ range is susceptible to the absorption of humidity under extreme conditions. If the instrument is
operated normally within its specified temperature-humidity range, the 3 MΩ range meets its accuracy
specifications. However, if the instrument is “soaked” at 50°C, 90% RH the 3MΩ range may require 1 hour
of “dry-out” time at 25°C, <40% RH for each hour of “soak” time in order to achieve its specified accuracy.

A-12

Specifications
2640A Specifications

2640A 2-Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications

A-16.

The 2640A specifications for the 2-wire resistance measurement function is based
on the 4-wire resistance measurement specification (above) except you add a
nominal 5-Ohm (10-Ohm maximum) positive offset. This value varies for each
channel and with temperature (nominal +1%/ºC).

2640A RTD’s 4-Wire, per ITS-1990 Measurement Specifications

A-17.

Tables A-18 and A-19 provide 2640A specifications for the 4-wire ResistanceTemperature Detector (RTD) measurement function. The 4-wire measurements
use 2 input channels a decade apart, e.g., channels 4 and 14.
Table A-18. 2640A 4-Wire RTD Temperature Coefficient
Specification

Characteristic

Temperature Coefficient

To calculate RTD accuracy for temperatures
between 28°C and 60°C, or -10°C and 18°C,
use a linear interpolation between the two
applicable points. e.g. if the applicable spec at
28°C is .2 and the spec at 60°C is .75, then the
specification at 40°C = (.75-.2)x(40-28)/(6028)+.2=.55*(12/32) + .2 = .406.

Accuracy at -20°C

Multiply the -10°C to + 60°C accuracy
specification by 2. After 1 hour warm-up. For
accuracy between -10°C and -20°C, interpolate
linearly.

Table A-19. 2640A 4-Wire RTD Specifications
Accuracy, 3σ ±ºC
Temperature

Resolution

90 Day, 18ºC to
28ºC

1 Year,
18ºC to
28ºC

1 Year, -10ºC to
60ºC

Slow

Fast

Slow

Fast

Slow

Fast

-200ºC (Note1)

0.003ºC

0.007ºC

0.06ºC

0.16ºC

0.09ºC

0.33ºC

0.63ºC

0ºC (Note 1)

0.003ºC

0.007ºC

0.09ºC

0.20ºC

0.13ºC

0.53ºC

0.86ºC

100ºC

0.003ºC

0.007ºC

0.10ºC

0.23ºC

0.16ºC

0.63ºC

0.97ºC

300ºC

0.003ºC

0.007ºC

0.14ºC

0.3ºC

0.21ºC

0.83ºC

1.2ºC

600ºC

0.003ºC

0.007ºC

0.19ºC

0.53ºC

0.30ºC

1.2ºC

1.6ºC

1. The Custom 385 range is not recommended for use below -80ºC. (See Appendix D)

A-13

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

2640A RTD’s 2-Wire per ITS-1990 Measurement Specifications

A-18.

The 2640A specifications for the 2-wire Resistance-Temperature Detector (RTD)
measurement function is based on the 4-wire RTD measurement specification
(above) except you add a nominal 5-Ohm (roughly 13ºC ) positive offset. This
value varies for each channel and temperature gradient (nominal +0.4%/ºC). Also
note that the resistance of the RTD wiring adds directly to the error. After 100
million operations of a measurement channel, the offset will increase at an
indeterminate rate.

2640A Thermocouple per ITS-1990 Measurement Specifications A-19.
Tables A-20 to A-21 provide 2640A specifications for the thermocouple
measurement function per ITS-1990.
Table A-20. 2640A Thermocouple General Specifications
Specification

A-14

Characteristic

Input Impedance

100 MΩ minimum in parallel with 300 pF

Open Thermocouple Detect

Operates by injecting a small ac signal into the
input after each measurement. A thermocouple
resistance greater than 1kΩ to 10kΩ is
detected as an open input.

Temperature Coefficient

To calculate thermocouple accuracy for
temperatures between 28ºC and 60ºC, or -10ºC
and 18ºC, use a linear interpolation between
the two applicable points. e.g., if the applicable
spec at 28ºC is .6 and the spec at 60ºC is 1.1,
then the spec at 40ºC = (1.1-.6)*(40-28)/(6028)+.6= .5* (12/32) + .6 = .7875.

Accuracy at -20°C

Multiply the -10°C to + 60°C accuracy
specification by 2. After 1 hour warm-up. For
accuracy between -10°C and -20°C, interpolate
linearly.

Specifications
2640A Specifications

Table A-21. 2640A Thermocouple Specifications
Accuracy ± ºC
Thermocouple

Resolution

18ºC to 28ºC
90 Day

Type
J

Temperature ºC
-100 to 80
80 to 230
230 to 760
-100 to -25
-25 to 120
120 to 800
800 to 1372
-100 to -25
-25 to 120
120 to 1000
1000 to 1300
-100 to -25
-25 to 20
20 to 600
600 to 1000
-100 to 0
0 to 150
150 to 400
250 to 600
600 to 1500
1500 to 1767
250 to 1000
1000 to 1400
1400 to 1767
600 to 900
900 to 1200
1200 to 1820
0 to 150
150 to 650
650 to 1000
1000 to 1800
1800 to 2316

-10ºC to 60ºC

1 Year

Slow

Fast

Slow

Fast

.03
.02
.02
.04
.03
.03
.03
.05
.05
.04
.03
.03
.02
.02
.02
.04
.03
.02
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
.05
.05
.05

0.45
0.35
0.40
0.55
0.40
0.50
0.70
0.65
0.55
0.45
0.55
0.45
0.35
0.30
0.40
0.60
0.40
0.30
0.90
0.80
0.85
0.95
0.80
1.00
1.20
0.90
0.75
0.80
0.65
0.65
1.00
1.60

0.50
0.50
0.50
0.60
0.50
0.65
1.00
0.75
0.60
0.60
0.75
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.50
0.65
0.50
0.40
1.00
0.90
0.85
1.10
1.00
1.30
1.40
1.00
1.00
0.90
0.75
0.85
1.30
2.10

0.80
0.70
0.70
0.90
0.80
0.90
1.30
1.20
1.00
0.90
1.00
0.80
0.60
0.60
0.70
1.00
0.80
0.60
2.10
1.80
1.90
2.30
1.90
2.20
3.10
2.20
1.90
1.60
1.40
1.40
2.10
3.20

0.60
0.60
0.80
0.70
0.60
1.00
1.60
0.80
0.70
1.00
1.20
0.60
0.50
0.50
0.90
0.70
0.60
0.60
1.20
1.30
1.70
1.30
1.40
1.80
1.50
1.20
1.30
1.00
1.00
1.20
2.10
3.40

0.80
0.80
0.90
1.00
0.90
1.20
1.90
1.30
1.10
1.20
1.50
0.80
0.70
0.80
1.00
1.10
0.90
0.80
2.20
2.00
2.50
2.40
2.30
2.80
3.20
2.40
2.20
1.70
1.50
1.80
2.80
4.60

A-15

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

2640A Frequency Measurement Specifications

A-20.

Tables A-22 to A-23 provide 2640A specifications for the frequency measurement
function.
Table A-22. 2640A Frequency Accuracy Specifications
Frequency Measurement Accuracy, 1 Year, -10ºC to 60ºC
Accuracy ±(% input + Hz)

Resolution

Range
Slow

Fast

Slow

Fast

15 Hz to 900 Hz

0.01 Hz

0.1 Hz

0.05%+0.02 Hz

0.05%+0.2Hz

900 Hz to 9 kHz

0.1 Hz

1 Hz

0.05%+0.1 Hz

0.05%+1 Hz

9 kHz to 90 kHz

1 Hz

10 Hz

0.05%+1 Hz

0.05%+10 Hz

90 kHz to 900 kHz

10 Hz

100 Hz

0.05%+10 Hz

0.05%+100 Hz

1 MHz

100 Hz

1 kHz

0.05%+100 Hz

0.05%+1 kHz

Table A-23. 2640A Frequency Sensitivity Specifications
Frequency Measurement Sensitivity (Sine Wave)
Frequency Range

Minimum Signal

15 Hz to 70 Hz

100 mV rms

70 Hz to 100 kHz

100 mV rms

20V rms

100 kHz to 200 kHz

150 mV rms

10V rms

200 kHz to 300 kHz

150 mV rms

7V rms

300 kHz to 1 MHz

Linearly increasing from 150V
rms at 300 kHz to 2V rms at 1
MHz

* 300V range applies to channels 1 and 11 only.

A-16

Maximum Signal
V<150/300V rms* (depends on
6
channel used) and V*Hz<2*10

Linearly decreasing from 7V rms
at 300 kHz to 2V rms at 1 MHz

Specifications
2645A Specifications

2645A Specifications

A-21.

This section includes specifications specific to the 2644A instrument by
measurement function.

2645A DC Voltage Measurement Specifications

A-22.

Tables A-24 to A-26 provide 2645A specifications for the dc voltage measurement
function.
Table A-24. 2645A DC Voltage Measurement General Specifications
Specification
Input Impedance

Normal Mode Rejection
Common Mode Rejection

Channel-to-Channel Crosstalk

Temperature Coefficient

Accuracy at -20°C

Maximum Input Voltage

Characteristic
100MΩ in parallel with 300 pF maximum for ranges
≤3V
10MΩ in parallel with 100 pF maximum for ranges
>3V
50dB minimum at 50 Hz/60 Hz +0.1%, Slow Rate
120dB minimum at dc, 50 Hz/60 Hz +0.1%, 1kΩ
imbalance, Slow Rate
80dB minimum at dc, 60 dB at 50 Hz/60 Hz +0.1%,
1kΩ imbalance, Medium and Fast Rates
120dB minimum Slow Rate (e.g., 30V dc on
channel 1 may cause a 30 µV error on channel 2)
80dB minimum Medium and Fast Rates (e.g., 1V
dc on channel 1 may cause a 10 µV error on
channel 2)
For % input: Add 1/10th the 90-day specification
per ºC above 28ºC or below 18ºC.
For floor error (V): add 1/20th the 90-day
specification per ºC above 28ºC or below 18ºC
Multiply the -10°C to + 60°C accuracy specification
by 2. After 1 hour warm-up. For accuracy between
-10°C and -20°C, interpolate linearly.
The lesser voltage of:
50V dc or 30V ac rms from any input terminal to
earth
-or50V dc or 30V ac rms from any input terminal to
any other input terminal

A-17

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Table A-25. 2645A DC Voltage Resolution and Repeatability Specifications
Resolution
Range

Slow

Fast

90 mV

3 µV

6 µV

300 mV

10 µV

20 µV

100 µV

200 µV

30V

1 mV

2 mV

50V/300V*

10 mV

20 mV

* 300V range applies to channels 1 and 11 only.
Table A-26. 2645A DC Voltage Accuracy Specifications
Accuracy, 3σ ± (% input + V)
18ºC to 28ºC
Range

A-18

90 Day

-10ºC to 60ºC
1 Year

1 Year

Slow

Fast

Slow

Fast

90 mV

.01%+20 µV

.01%+50 µV

.013%+23 µV

.013%+50 µV

.042%+52 µV

.042%+130 µV

300 mV

.01%+40 µV

.01%+90 µV

.013%+49 µV

.013%+93 µV

.042%+104 µV

.042%+234 µV

.01%+.3 mV

.01%+.6 mV

.013%+.38 mV

.013%+.64 mV .042%+.78 mV

30V

.01%+4 mV

.02%+8 mV

.013%+4.9 mV

.026%+9.5 mV .042%+10.6 mV .084%+20.3 mV

50V

.01%+30 mV .04%+60 mV .013%+40 mV

.052%+64 mV

Slow

.042%+78 mV

Fast

.042%+1.56 mV

.168%+156 mV

Specifications
2645A Specifications

2645A AC Voltage Measurement Specifications

A-23.

Tables A-27 to A-29 provide 2645A specifications for the ac voltage measurement
function.
Table A-27. 2645A AC Voltage General Specifications
Specification

Characteristic

Input Impedance

1 MΩ in parallel with 100 pF

Maximum Crest Factor

3.0 Maximum
2.0 for rated accuracy

Crest Factor Error

For non-sinusoidal input signals with crest factors
between 2 and 3 and pulse widths ≥100 µs, add
0.2% to the accuracy specifications.

Common Mode Rejection

80dB minimum at dc, 50 Hz/60 Hz ±0.1%, 1 kΩ
imbalance, Slow Rate

Maximum Input Voltage

The lesser voltage of:
30V ac rms from any input terminal to earth.
30V ac rms from any terminal input to any other
input terminal.

Maximum Volt-Hertz Product

2x106 Volt-Hertz product on any range, normal
mode input.
1x106 Volt-Hertz product on any range, common
mode input.

Temperature Coefficient

Accuracy at -20°C

Multiply the -10°C to + 60°C accuracy specification
by 2. After 1 hour warm-up. For accuracy between
-10°C and -20°C, interpolate linearly.

DC Component Error

The presence of a dc voltage will cause an
indeterminate error in the reading of the ac voltage
on the input.

A-19

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Table A-28. 2645A AC Voltage Range and Resolution Specifications
Resolution

Range
Slow

Fast

Minimum Input for
Rate Accuracy

Full Scale

±30,000

±3,000



300 mV

10 µV

100 µV

20 mV

100 µV

1 mV

200 mV

30V

1 mV

10 mV

Table A-29. 2645A AC Voltage Accuracy Specifications
1 Year Accuracy ± (%input + V)*
Range

Frequency

18ºC to 28ºC
Slow

300 mV

30V

Fast

Slow

Fast

20 to 50 Hz

3%+.25 mV

6%+.5 mV

3.5%+.25 mV

7%+.5 mV

50 to 150 Hz

0.4%+.25 mV

0.8%+.5 mV

0.5%+.25 mV

1%+.5 mV

150 Hz to 10 kHz

0.3%+.25 mV

0.8%+.5 mV

0.4%+.25 mV

1%+.5 mV

10 kHz to 20 kHz

0.4%+.25 mV

1%+.5 mV

0.7%+.25 mV

1.5%+.5 mV

20 kHz to 50 kHz

2%+.3 mV

3%+.5 mV

3%+.3 mV

4%+.5 mV

50 kHz to 100 kHz

5%+.5 mV

5%+1 mV

7%+.5 mV

8%+1 mV

20 to 50 Hz

3%+2.5 mV

6%+5 mV

3.5%+2.5 mV

7%+5 mV

50 to 150 Hz

0.4%+2.5 mV

0.8%+5 mV

0.5%+2.5 mV

1%+5 mV

150 Hz to 10 kHz

0.3%+2.5 mV

0.6%+5 mV

0.4%+2.5 mV

1%+5 mV

10 kHz to 20 kHz

0.4%+2.5 mV

0.8%+5 mV

0.5%+2.5 mV

1%+5 mV

20 kHz to 50 kHz

1%+3 mV

1.5%+6 mV

1.5%+3 mV

2%+6 mV

50 kHz to 100 kHz

2%+5 mV

3%+10 mV

3%+5 mV

4%+10 mV

20 to 50 Hz

3%+50 mV

6%+100 mV

3.5%+50 mV

7%+100 mV

50 to 150 Hz

1%+50 mV

1.5%+100 mV

1.2%+50 mV

2%+100 mV

150 Hz to 10 kHz

0.4%+25 mV

0.6%+50 mV

1.2%+25 mV

1.3%+40 mV

10 kHz to 20 kHz

0.4%+25 mV

0.8%+50 mV

1.2%+25 mV

1.3%+40 mV

20 kHz to 50 kHz

1%+30 mV

1.5%+60 mV

1.2%+30 mV

2%+50 mV

50 kHz to 100 kHz
V<20V

2%+50 mV

3%+100 mV

2.5%+50 mV

4%+100 mV

* Sine wave inputs>6% of scale and signals with crest factors <2.

A-20

-10ºC to 60ºC

Specifications
2645A Specifications

2645A 4-Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications

A-24.

Tables A-30 to A-32 provide 2645A specifications for the 4-wire resistance
measurement function. The 4-wire measurements use 2 input channels a decade
apart, e.g., channels 4 and 14.
Table A-30. 2645A 4-Wire Resistance Temperature Coefficient
Specification

Characteristic

Temperature Coefficient

Add 1/10th the 90 day specification per ºC
above 28ºC or below 18ºC.

Accuracy at -20ºC

Multiply the -10°C to + 60°C accuracy
specification by 2. After 1 hour warm-up. For
accuracy between -10°C and -20°C, interpolate
linearly.

Table A-31. 2645A 4-Wire Resistance Range and Resolution Specifications
Resolution
Range

Current
Applied

Full Scale
Voltage

Maximum
Voltage
Applied

Slow

Fast

300Ω

10 mΩ

30 mΩ

1 mA

300 mV

3.5V

3 kΩ

100 mΩ

300 mΩ

100 µA

300 mV

3.5V

30 kΩ

1Ω

3Ω

10 µA

300 mV

3.5V

300 kΩ

10Ω

30Ω

10 µA

3.0V

3.5V

3 MΩ

100Ω

300Ω

1 µA

3.0V

3.5V

Table A-32. 2645A 4-Wire Resistance Accuracy Specifications
Accuracy, 3σ ± (% input + V)
18ºC to 28ºC
Range

90 Day
Slow

-10ºC to 60ºC
1 Year

Fast

Slow

1 Year
Fast

Slow

Fast

300Ω

.02%+60 mΩ

.02%+.1Ω

.02%+.2Ω

.084%+.25Ω

.084%+.42Ω

3 kΩ

.02%+.6Ω

.02%+2Ω

.02%+1Ω

.02%+3Ω

.084%+2.5Ω

.084%+8.4Ω

30 kΩ

.02%+6Ω

.2%+200Ω

.02%+10Ω

.2%+300Ω

.084%+25Ω

.84%+840Ω

300 kΩ .5%+80Ω

1%+2 kΩ

.5%+150Ω

1%+3 kΩ

2.1%+336Ω

4.2%+8.4 kΩ

3 MΩ

2%+120 kΩ

1.3%+2 kΩ

2%+200 kΩ

5.46%+4.2 kΩ 8.4%+200 kΩ

1.3%+1 kΩ

A-21

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

2645A 2-Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications

A-25.

The 2645A specifications for the 2-wire resistance measurement function is based
on the 4-wire resistance measurement specification (above) except you add a 700
to 1000 Ohm positive offset. This value varies for each channel and temperature
gradient (nominal +1%/ºC).

2645A 4-Wire RTD per ITS-1990 Measurement Specifications

A-26.

Tables A-33 and A-34 provide 2645A specifications for the 4-wire ResistanceTemperature Detector (RTD) measurement function. The 4-wire measurements
use 2 input channels a decade apart, e.g., channels 4 and 14.
Table A-33. 2645A 4-Wire RTD Temperature Coefficient
Specification

Characteristic

Temperature Coefficient

To calculate RTD accuracy for temperatures
between 28ºC and 60ºC, or -10ºC and 18ºC,
use a linear interpolation between the two
application points. e.g., if the applicable spec at
28ºC is .2 and the spec at 60ºC is .75, then the
specification at 40ºC is (.75-.2)*(40-28)/(60-28)
+ .2 = .55*(12/32)+.2 = .406.

Accuracy at -20°C

Multiply the -10°C to + 60°C accuracy
specification by 2. After 1 hour warm-up. For
accuracy between -10°C and -20°C, interpolate
linearly.

Table A-34. 2645A 4-Wire RTD Specifications
Accuracy, 3σ ± ºC
Temperature

Resolution

90 Day, 18ºC to
28ºC

1 Year,
18ºC to
28ºC

1 Year, -10ºC to
60ºC

Slow

Fast

Slow

Fast

Slow

Fast

-200ºC*

0.03ºC

0.06ºC

0.16ºC

0.25ºC

0.62ºC

1.10ºC

0ºC*

0.03ºC

0.06ºC

0.20ºC

0.31ºC

0.85ºC

1.30ºC

100ºC

0.03ºC

0.06ºC

0.23ºC

0.34ºC

0.95ºC

1.40ºC

300ºC

0.03ºC

0.06ºC

0.30ºC

0.41ºC

1.18ºC

1.70ºC

600ºC

0.03ºC

0.06ºC

0.53ºC

0.63ºC

1.62ºC

2.12ºC

* The Custom-385 range is not recommended for use below -80ºC. See Appendix D.

A-22

Specifications
2645A Specifications

2645A Thermocouple per ITS-1990 Measurement Specifications A-27.
Tables A-35 to A-36 provide 2645A specifications for the thermocouple
measurement function per ITS-1990.
Table A-35. 2645A Thermocouple General Specifications
Specification

Characteristic

Input Impedance

100 MΩ minimum in parallel with 150 pF

Open Thermocouple Detect

Operates by injecting a small ac signal into the
input after each measurement. A thermocouple
resistance greater than 1 kΩ to 10 kΩ is
detected as an open input.

Temperature Coefficient

To calculate Thermocouple accuracy for
temperatures between 28ºC and 60ºC, or -10ºC
and 18ºC, use a linear interpolation between
the two applicable points. e.g., if the applicable
spec at 28ºC is .6 and the spec at 60ºC is 1.1,
then the spec at 40ºC is (1.1-.6)*(40-28)/(6028)+.6 = .5*(12.32) + .6 = .7875.

Accuracy at -20°C

Multiply the -10°C to + 60°C accuracy
specification by 2. After 1 hour warm-up. For
accuracy between -10°C and -20°C, interpolate
linearly.

Table A-36. 2645A Thermocouple Specifications
Accuracy ± ºC
Thermocouple

18ºC to 28ºC

Resolution
90
Day

Type

Temperature ºC

-100 to 80
80 to 230
230 to 760
-100 to -25
-25 to 120
120 to 1000
1000 to 1372
-100 to -25
-25 to 120
120 to 1000
1000 to 1300

.3
.2
.2
.4
.3
.3
.3
.5
.5
.4
.3

-10ºC to 60ºC

1 Year

Slow

Fast

Slow

Fast

0.8
0.7
0.7
1.0
0.8
0.9
1.2
1.4
1.1
1.0
1.0

0.9
0.8
0.8
1.1
0.9
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.1
1.2

1.6
1.4
1.3
2.0
1.7
1.8
2.3
2.8
2.3
2.0
1.9

0.9
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.3
1.2
1.6

1.7
1.5
1.5
2.1
1.8
2.2
2.9
2.9
2.4
2.1
2.4

A-23

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Table A-36. 2645A Thermocouple Specifications (cont)
Accuracy ± ºC
Thermocouple

18ºC to 28ºC
Resolution

Type
E

A-24

Temperature ºC
-100 to -25
-25 to 20
20 to 600
600 to 1000
-100 to 0
0 to 150
150 to 400
250 to 600
600 to 1500
1500 to 1767
250 to 1000
1000 to 1400
1400 to 1767
600 to 1200
1200 to 1550
1550 to 1820
0 to 150
150 to 650
650 to 1000
1000 to 1800
1800 to 2316

.3
.2
.2
.2
.4
.3
.2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
.5
.5
.5

90
Day

-10ºC to 60ºC

1 Year

Slow

Fast

Slow

Fast

0.8
0.7
0.6
0.6
1.1
0.9
0.7
2.4
2.0
2.0
2.6
2.0
2.3
3.6
2.1
2.0
1.9
1.6
1.4
2.0
3.1

0.9
0.7
0.7
0.8
1.2
1.0
0.8
2.7
2.3
2.3
2.8
2.3
2.7
3.9
2.4
2.3
2.0
1.7
1.7
2.5
3.8

1.5
1.2
1.1
1.2
2.2
1.7
1.4
5.6
4.6
4.5
5.9
4.6
5.3
8.5
5.0
4.7
4.0
3.5
3.2
4.5
6.8

1.0
0.8
0.8
1.1
1.3
1.0
0.8
2.8
2.4
2.8
2.9
2.6
3.3
4.0
2.6
2.7
2.1
1.8
2.0
3.2
5.1

1.6
1.3
1.2
1.5
2.3
1.8
1.5
5.7
4.8
5.1
6.0
5.0
5.9
8.6
5.2
5.0
4.2
3.6
3.5
5.3
8.1

Specifications
2645A Specifications

2645A Frequency Measurement Specifications

A-28.

Tables A-37 to A-38 provide 2645A specifications for the frequency measurement
function.
Table A-37. 2645A Frequency Accuracy Specifications
Frequency Measurement Accuracy, 1 Year, -10ºC to 60ºC
Resolution

Range

Accuracy + (% input + Hz)

Slow

Fast

Slow

Fast

15 Hz to 900 Hz

0.01 Hz

0.1 Hz

0.05%+0.02 Hz

0.05%+0.2 Hz

900 Hz to 9 kHz

0.1 Hz

1 Hz

0.05%+0.1 Hz

0.05%+1 Hz

9 kHz to 90 kHz

1 Hz

10 Hz

0.05%+1 Hz

0.05%+10 Hz

90 kHz to 900 kHz

10 Hz

100 Hz

0.05%+10 Hz

0.05%+100 Hz

1 MHz

100 Hz

1 kHz

0.05%+100 Hz

0.05%+1 kHz

Table A-38. 2645A Frequency Sensitivity Specifications
Frequency Measurement Sensitivity (Sine Wave)
Frequency Range

Minimum Signal

Maximum Signal

15 Hz to 70 kHz

100 mV rms

30V rms

70 kHz to 100 kHz

100 mV rms

20V rms

100 kHz to 200 kHz

150 mV rms

10V rms

200 kHz to 300 kHz

150 mV rms

7V rms

Linearly increasing from 150V
ms at 300 kHz to 2V rms at 1
MHz

Linearly decreasing from 7V
rms at 300 kHz to 2V rms at 1
MHz

300 kHz to 1 MHz

A-25

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

A-26

Appendix B

Noise, Shielding, and Crosstalk
Considerations

Introduction

B-1.

This appendix supplies information on how you can setup your instruments to
minimize measurement errors. The topics include static versus dynamic
measurement, noise and shielding, and how to minimize crosstalk effects

Static Versus Dynamic Measurements

B-2.

Some signals change value slowly. Other change rapidly. At some point things
change quickly enough that we call the signals dynamic rather than static.
Frequently, one wishes to analyze dynamic signals in the frequency domain.
However, if you wish to do that, you must use an anti-aliasing filter (a low pass
filter with a sharp cutoff above the highest frequency of interest) ahead of every
input that is to be digitized and you must sample at a frequency at least two times
that of the transition band of the filter..
The 2640A/2645A instruments do not have an anti-aliasing filter built-in. They
are not suitable for digitizing dynamic signals unless you put a suitable antialiasing filter in series with each input. Note that a suitable anti-aliasing filter is a
low-pass filter with at least 3 poles and a fairly sharp cutoff characteristic. Good
anti-aliasing filters have as many as 8 poles.

Noise and Shielding

B-3.

An additional manifestation of aliasing can appear even in static readings. If there
is noise coupled into the signal wiring from power mains wiring, it usually
appears as noise in the readings. However, it is possible to accidentally combine a fast
B-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

reading rate and scan interval that is an exact multiple of the power line period
and cause line frequency noise to be aliased to a very low frequency, where it
appears as drift, or instability, in the readings. For example, if the instrument is set
to Reading Rate = Fast and a scan interval of 100 ms, line frequency noise is
aliased because the scan interval is an exact multiple of the period of the power
line.
One way to see whether your measurement setup has a potential problem like this
is to pick a scan interval like 98 ms or 102 ms, that is not an exact multiple of the
power line period. If the readings appear noisier with this scan interval than with
an interval of 100 ms, there is a problem with the measurement setup. Possible
solutions to this problem are:
1. Use shielded wiring to prevent power line noise pickup from mixing with the
signal. Be sure the shield is connected to an earth ground.
2. Route signal wiring away from power mains wiring.
3. Remove noise from the signal using filters before the signal is applied to the
instrument.
4. Select Reading Rate = Slow, which allows the instrument to filter out the
noise.
5. Ensure that the chassis of the instrument is connected to earth ground. This is
desirable for reasons of safety as well as noise.

Crosstalk Considerations

B-4.

The accuracy of low voltage measurements (e.g., thermocouples), low voltage ac
measurements and resistance measurements above 3 kΩ can be greatly affected by
undesired pickup from ac voltage sources (crosstalk). To reduce the effects of
crosstalk, consider each of the following:
1. Reading Rate Do not use Reading Rate = Fast when mixing vac or frequency
inputs with low level vdc, thermocouple, and/or resistance inputs. If you must
use Reading Rate = Fast, compare a set of readings taken with Reading Rate =
Slow against a set of readings taken on the Fast rate to determine the effects
of crosstalk on your setup. Measurements made at the Fast reading rate are
more susceptible to crosstalk than readings taken at the Slow reading rate.
Note
When you use the Fast rate, it is very easy to get noise into your
readings. The Fast rate makes it possible to look at rapidly changing
events, but it requires extreme care to keep the readings clean.
2. Shielded Wiring Crosstalk can occur outside the instrument as well as inside
the instrument. Use shielded wiring and tie the shields to an earth ground to
prevent noise from being coupled into your measurements. Be careful about
B-2

Noise, Shielding, and Crosstalk Considerations
Crosstalk Considerations

the routing of your input wiring: keep it away from or shielded from all ac
power mains wiring and other sources of noise.
3. Channel Spacing When possible, leave as many unused channels as possible
between your ac voltage channel inputs and your low level inputs.
Crosstalk from a VAC or frequency signal on a 2645A channel to an adjacent
channel using the Slow reading rate is as shown in Table B-1:
Table B-1. 2645A Crosstalk Specifications.
VAC/Frequency

Volts DC

Resistance

Temperature
(100 Ohm RTD)

Temperature
(Thermocouple)

<100 Hz

-80 dB

.2%/V if R>3k

.04°/V

.1°/V

100 Hz

-100 dB

.1%/V if R>3k

.02°/V

.003°/V

500 Hz

-100 dB

.1%/V if R>3k

.02°/V

.03°/V

1 kHz

-50 dB

.1%/V if R>3k

.02°/V

.3°/V

2 kHz

-60 dB

.05%/V if R>3k

.02°/V

.1°/V

5 kHz

-66 dB

.1%/V if R>3k

.02°/V

.1°/V

10 kHz

-80 dB

.01%/V

.02°/V

.1°/V

20 kHz

-50 dB

.02%/V

.05°/V

.1°/V

50 kHz

-40 dB

.05%/V

.1°/V

.5°/V

100 kHz

-40 dB

.1%/V

.2°/V

1°/V

>100 kHz

-40 dB

.1%/V

.4°/V

2°/V

Note 1 The temperature ranges are particularly susceptible to crosstalk at frequencies above 20
kHz, and that the error goes up as the square of the voltage, e.g., 2V ac at 100 kHz can cause a
4 degree error on a thermocouple. Because of this sensitivity, it is not advisable to mix
temperature signals and high frequency signals in the same 2645A.

B-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Crosstalk from a VAC or frequency signal on a 2640A channel to an adjacent
channel using the slow reading is as shown in Table B-2.
Table B-2. 2640A Crosstalk Specifications

Frequency

VDC 1 kΩ
source

Resistance
R <20 kΩ

100Ω RTD

Thermocouple

R >20 kΩ

<100 Hz

-120 dB

.001%/V

.01%/V*MΩ

.001°/V

100 Hz

-120 dB

.001%/V

.05%/V*MΩ

.001°/V

.003°/V

500 Hz

-120 dB

.001%/V

.05%/V*MΩ

.001°/V

.01°/V

1 kHz

-100 dB

.001%/V

.05%/V*MΩ

.001°/V

.01°/V

2 kHz

-60

.001%/V

.1%/V*MΩ

.001°/V

.01°/V

5 kHz

.01 mV/V

10 kHz

.01 mV/V

20 kHz

.05 mV/V

50 kHz

.1 mV/V

.005%/V

Not recomm.

.001°/V

.005%/V

Not recomm.

.01°/V

.01%/V

Not recomm.

.01°/V

.01%/V

Not recomm.

.01°/V

.01%/V

.1%/V

100 kHz

.1 mV/V

>500 kHz

.1 mV/V

.01°/V

.05°/V

Not recomm.

.01°/V

Not recomm.

.01°/V

For frequencies below 5 kHz, the 2640A is roughly 10 times more susceptible to crosstalk at
frequencies that are exact multiples of 300 Hz than it is at the frequencies shown above. e.g., the
sensitivity at 3 kHz will be about 10 times worse than at 2 kHz or 5 kHz.
The above table indicates the amount of crosstalk interference caused by applying VAC to one other
channel. If VAC (or frequency) inputs are applied to multiple channels, multiply the value in the table
by the number of channels with VAC (or frequency) applied.

B-4

Appendix C

True-RMS Measurements

Introduction

C-1.

The instrument measures the true rms value of ac voltages. In physical terms, the
rms (root-mean-square) value of an waveform is the equivalent dc value that
causes the same amount of heat to be dissipated in a resistor. True rms
measurement greatly implies the analysis of complex ac signals. Since the rms
value is the dc equivalent of the original waveform, it provides a reliable basis for
comparing dissimilar waveforms.

Effects of Internal Noise in AC Measurements

C-2.

With the input shorted and the instrument set for ac volts (VAC) measurement,
internal amplifier noise causes a typical display reading of approximately 0.50 mV
ac. Since the instrument is a true rms responding measurement device, this noise
contributes minimally to the readings at the specified floor of each range. When
the rms value of the two signals (internal noise and range floor) is calculated, the
effect of the noise is shown as:
2

Total rms digits = Square Root of (0.50 + 15.00 ) = 15.008
The display will read 15.01. At the 28.00 mV input level on the 300.00 mV range
in the slow rate, the display will read 28.00 with no observable error.

Waveform Comparison (True RMS vs Average Responding)

C-3.

Figure C-1 illustrates the relationship between ac and dc components for common
waveforms and compares readings for true-rms measurements (NetDAQ) and
average-responding measurements. For example, consider the first waveform, a
1.41421V (zero-to-peak) sine wave. Both the instrument and rms-calibrated
average-responding measurement devices display the correct rms reading of
C-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

1.0000V ac (the dc component equals 0). However, consider the 2V (peak-topeak) square wave.
Both types of measurement correctly display the dc component (0V), but the
NetDAQ instrument also correctly measures the ac component (1.0000V). The
average-responding device measures 1.11V, which amounts to an 11% error.
Average-responding measurement devices have been in use for a long time; you
may have accumulated test or reference data based on such instruments. The
conversion factors in Figure C-1 can help in converting between the two
measurement methods.

C-2

True-RMS Measurements
Waveform Comparison (True RMS vs Average Responding)
PEAK VOLTAGES
AC-COUPLED
INPUT
WAVEFORM
SINE

MEASURED VOLTAGES
AC COMPONENT ONLY

PK-PK

0-PK

RMS CAL*

HYDRA

DC AND AC
TOTAL RMS

DC
COMPONENT TRUE RMS =
ONLY
ac 2 + dc 2

2.828
1.414

1.000
PK-PK

1.000
0.000
1.000

RECTIFIED SINE
(FULL WAVE)

1.414
1.414
0.421
0.436

0.900

PK-PK
0

1.000

RECTIFIED SINE
(HALF WAVE)

2.000
2.000
0.779

0.771
PK-PK

0.636
1.000

SQUARE

2.000
1.000

1.111

1.000

PK-PK

0.000
1.000

RECTIFIED
SQUARE

1.414
1.414
0.785

PK-PK

0.707
0.707
1.000

0
RECTANGULAR
PULSE

2.000
2.000

PK
X

4.442 K 2

PK-PK

D = X/Y

2 D

K = D-D 2
TRIANGLE
SAWTOOTH
PK
0

3.464
1.732
0.962
1.000

PK-PK

0.000
1.000

* RMS CAL IS THE DISPLAYED VALUE FOR AVERAGE RESPONDING INSTRUMENTS THAT ARE CALIBRATED
TO DISPLAY RMS FOR SINE WAVES

Figure C-1. Comparison of Common Waveforms

C-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

C-4

Appendix D

RTD Linearization

Introduction

D-1.

This appendix discusses Fixed-385 and Custom-385 RTD measurements with
NetDAQ.

Fixed-385 RTD

D-2.

The Fixed-385 RTD linearization uses segmented polynomials to approximate the
Callendar Van-Dusen equation for a 385 RTD. R0 may be specified via NetDAQ
Logger but α, δ, and β are fixed. These fixed coefficients are the modified DIN
43760 coefficients that conform to ITS90:
α = 0.00385055
δ = 1.49978574
β = 0.10863383
The accuracy specifications of Fixed-385 measurements with a 385 RTD that
matches the above coefficients are shown in Table A-34 in Appendix A.

D-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Custom-385 RTD

D-3.

The Custom-385 RTD linearization solves the Callendar Van-Dusen equation for
positive temperatures and uses a polynomial approximation to the Callendar VanDusen equation for negative temperatures. In addition to R0 , α may also be
specified via NetDAQ Logger. δ nd β are fixed. These fixed coefficients are the
modified DIN 43760 coefficients that conform to ITS90:
δ = 1.49978574
β = 0.10863383
Figure D-1 shows the accuracy envelope for a 385 RTD that has δ and β that
match the above coefficients. Because of the error introduced by the linearization
at low temperatures, it is recommended that use of the Custom-385 RTD type be
limited to temperatures between -100 and 600°C.

Accuracy Envelope: Custom RTD, 385 Probe
1 Year Slow: 18-28 Degrees C
Alpha: 0.00385055 Delta: 1.49978574 Beta: 0.10863383
1.5

Error - Degrees C

1.0

0.5

0.0

-0.5

-1.0
2645A
2640A

-1.5
-100

100
200
300
400
Temperature - Degrees C

Figure D-1. 385 RTD

D-2

500

600

RTD Linearization
Custom-385 RTD

Using the Custom-385 RTD with Other Platinum RTDs

D-4.

Although the Custom-385 RTD linearization uses a β and δ from a 385 RTD,
other RTD types can be used. The Custom-385 linearization will compensate for
the change in α, but errors will be introduced due to the difference in the δ and β
coefficients of the RTD and the fixed coefficients. Figure D-2 shows the accuracy
envelope for a 375 RTD. Because of the error introduced by the approximation
and the difference in δ it is recommended that the use of the 375 RTD be limited
to temperatures between -100°C and 300°C. Figure D-3 shows the accuracy
envelope for a 391 RTD and Figure D-4 shows the accuracy envelope for a 392
RTD. Due to errors introduced by the approximation and the difference in δ it is
recommended that the use of the 391 RTD and 392 RTD be limited to
temperatures between -100°C and 600°C.

Accuracy Envelope: Custom RTD, 375 Probe
1 Year Slow: 18-28 Degrees C
Alpha: 0.00375 Delta: 1.605 Beta: 0.16

1.0

Error - Degrees C

0.5

0.0

-0.5

-1.0

-1.5

2645A
2640A

-2.0
-100

-50

50
100
150
Temperature - Degrees C

200

250

300

Figure D-2. 375 RTD

D-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Accuracy Envelope: Custom RTD, 391 Probe
1 Year Slow: 18-28 Degrees C
Alpha: 0.00391071 Delta: 1.49576611 Beta: 0.10822857

1.5

Error - Degrees C

1.0

0.5

0.0

-0.5

-1.0
2645A
2640A

-1.5
-100

100
200
300
400
Temperature - Degrees C

Figure D-3. 391 RTD

D-4

500

600

RTD Linearization
Custom-385 RTD

Accuracy Envelope: Custom RTD, 392 Probe
1 Year Slow: 18-28 Degrees C
Alpha: 0.0039261 Delta: 1.49512239 Beta: 0.10188228

1.5

Error - Degrees C

1.0

0.5

0.0

-0.5

-1.0
2645A
2640A

-1.5
-100

100

200
300
400
Temperature - Degrees C

500

600

Figure D-4. 392 RTD

D-5

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

D-6

Appendix E

Computed Channel Equations

Introduction

E-1.

An equation is converted into a stored binary format which is sent to the
instrument where the calculations are performed during the processing of each
scan. Constants are passed to the instrument as single precision (4 byte) floating
point numbers which have a maximum magnitude of 3.402823E38. Calculations
and intermediate values in the instrument use double precision (8 bytes) in order
to preserve resolution. The resulting computed channel value is a single precision
floating point number. When the result is >9999.9E+6 or<-9999.9E+6, NetDAQ
Logger displays +OL or -OL for that channel, and changes the channel value to
+1.0E+9 or -1.0E+9, according to the sign.
The instrument traps math errors such as divide by zero and log (0) and returns a
non-numeric result which the logger reports as +OL. If a the value of a reference
channel is non-numeric (indicating an open thermocouple or overload), that value
will be returned for the computed channel.
Computed channel equations must observe the following syntax:
•

White space is allowed, but not required, between symbols.

•

White space and parentheses do contribute to the 100-character limit for the
text string, but do not contribute to the size of the stored binary equation (all
stored binary equations for an instrument cannot exceed 1000 bytes).

•

Alphabetic characters may be in upper or lower case.

The symbols used in the syntax definition have the following meanings:
<>
{}
[]
|

enclose an element which needs further definition
enclose elements that may be present zero or more times
enclose elements that may be present zero or one time
separates alternative elements
E-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

″ ″ enclose literal characters or strings which must appear as shown (except for
case)
() enclose groups of elements to clarify the scope of other symbols

E-2

=
=
=
=
=

=
=
=

{ (“+” | “-”) }
}
{ (“**” }
[ (“+” | “-”) ]
|
|
|
“(“ “)”
“C” [ ]
[ ]
( { }“.” { } ) |
( {} [“.” {}] )
“E” [ “+” | “-” ] { }
“(“ “)”
“ABS” | “EXP” | “INT” | “LN” | “LOG” | “SQR”

Appendix F

Data File Format

Introduction

F-1.

The ASCII (CSV) data file is maintained in comma-separated ASCII format. The
ASCII format is compatible with data analysis and management tools running
simultaneously in other computers on a network. A conversion utility, Binary to
ASCII Conversion (Utilities menu) is provided for converting data files recorded
in Fast Binary (BIN) to ASCII (CSV).

File Format

F-2.

The comma separated ASCII file format is as follows ( means “end of
line”, a sequence):
"File name string"
"Date and time file was created"
"File Comment" (< 70 character string)
Number of Columns (including timestamp)
Channel Units string (comma-separated strings)
Scan Record 1
.
.
Scan Record n

F-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Data files from an asynchronous instrument contain channel readings from
one instrument only. Data files from a group of instruments contain the time
tag from the Master instrument and data from all the instruments in the group.
Each scan record consists of the instrument time tag and a comma separated
list of channel readings (including the DIO word, totalizer, alarm1 and
alarm2). The time tag format (Excel/Lotus) is:
For example, 14453.652384270 - indicates 04/29/94 15:39:26.001
Strings in the data file are quoted to allow direct importation into Microsoft Excel
and other data analysis and presentation packages.

F-2

Appendix G

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)

Introduction

G-1.

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) provides NetDAQ Logger data to other Windows
applications in real time. For example, with a DDE connection, data collected by
NetDAQ Logger can be displayed in a spreadsheet as it is being collected from the
instruments. This appendix includes a reference section for DDE and an example
using the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet application.

DDE Links Reference

G-2.

DDE reference includes the Service Name, Topics, and Items:
Service Name
NETDAQ for 16-bit
NETDAQ32 for 32-bit

Topics
BCNnn
(nn is the instrument BCN
between 01 and 99.)

Items
’Cnn’
(nn is the channel number
between 01 and 30.)
DIO
(The status of the eight Digital
I/O lines are summarized in a
decimal number between 0
and 255.)
Totalizer
(The status of the Totalizer is
a number between 0 and
4294967294.)

G-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

DDE reference includes the Service Name, Topics, and Items: (cont)
Service Name

Topics

NETDAQ for 16-bit

Items
Alarm1
(The status of Alarm 1 for all
30 channels is summarized as
a 30-bit binary number
expressed in decimal.)

NETDAQ32 for 32-bit

Alarm2
(The status of Alarm 2 for all
30 channels is summarized as
a 30-bit binary number
expressed in decimal.)
ELDateTime
(The scan timestamp in Excel
format.)
System

Topics
(System,BCN01, BCN02, etc)
SysItems
(Topics, SysItems, Formats)
Formats
(TEXT)

DDE Example Using Excel

G-3.

Complete the following procedure to make a DDE connection between NetDAQ
Logger and an Excel spreadsheet. This is presented as an example where
instrument BCN=25, is logging data from three configured channels, 13, 14, and
15 into Excel cells A1, A2, and A3 respectively.
1. In NetDAQ Logger, click the Start Instrument button to begin data collection.
You do not have to be recording to a data file to use DDE.
2. Open Excel from the Applications group in Program Manager or from Start |
Programs.

G-2

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
DDE Example Using Excel

3. Select cell A1 on the spreadsheet, move the cursor to the Formula Bar and
enter the remote reference formula to link cell A1 to instrument 25 channel
13, then . (See below.)

Select cell A1
Type the formula and then

Equal Sign
Service Name
Pipe Character

Item (channel number)
Exclamation Point
Topic (instrument BCN)

If the instrument is scanning, measurement data is displayed in cell A1.
4. In the same manner, select cell A2 and enter formula
=NETDAQ32|bcn25!’c14’ ; then select cell A3 and enter formula
=NETDAQ32|bcn25!’c15’ .

G-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

5. Continue by entering the following:
Cell

Formula

=NETDAQ32|bcn25!DIO

=NETDAQ32|bcn25!Totalizer

=NETDAQ32|bcn25!Alarm1

=NETDAQ32|bcn25!Alarm2

=NETDAQ32|bcn25!ElDateTime

6. Your entries will appear on the spreadsheet as shown below for the conditions
entered in this example.
Note
The Excel formatting commands allow the Scan Time cell to display
as a date/time (for example, 3/4/96, 12:04:00)

Channel 13
Channel 14
Channel 15
Digital I/O Status
Totalizer Status
Alarm 1 Value
Alarm 2 Value
Scan Time in Excell Format
ds312c.eps

G-4

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
DDE Example Using Excel

A note about the Alarm 1 and Alarm 2 values reported in Excel:
The alarm value is the decimal equivalent of a 30-bit binary number
represents the alarm conditions for each of the 30 instrument channels (20
analog and 10 computed channels).
In the simplest case, all 30 channel alarms are off and alarm value is 0. In the
most complex case, all 30 channel alarms are on and the alarm value is
1073741823. See the following chart for Alarm Value examples.

ds072c.bmp

G-5

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

7. Continue with other Excel functions to show charts and features. (See your
Excel documentation.)
For example, select cells A1, A2, and A3 (click on each cell while holding
down the key), then select the New command from the File menu.
Click on Chart and then OK. A chart is displayed for the three channels,
which updates with each new measurement at a maximum rate of once per
second (see the example below).

G-6

Appendix H

Ethernet Cabling

Introduction

H-1.

This appendix details the unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cables used for 10BaseT
Ethernet interconnection. UTP cable configurations are summarized in Figure H1.

UTP Cables

H-2.

There are two types of UTP cables: patch cord cables and direct connection
cables.
Patch cord cables connect an instrument or host computer to an existing 10BaseT
hub, usually via a network outlet. A patch cord cable is characterized by pin-topin conformity (see Figure H-1).
Direct connection cables are used to make a direct connection between an
instrument and a host computer. A direct connection cable is characterized by
crossing the receive (RX) and transmit (TX) signals lines. This allows the RX line
input to become a TX output, and vice versa (see Figure H-1). This signal reversal
is a requirement when making a direct connection between an instrument and host
computer. Be sure you use twisted-pairs for the RX and TX lines.

H-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
8
8
1
1

Key
Receptacle
8-Pin RJ-45 Pinout Connections
(Reversed TX/RX)

8-Pin RJ-45 Pinout Connections
Receptacle
Function
TX+
TX–
RX+

RX–

Pin #

Key
Pin #

1
2
3

4
5

6
7

Receptacle
Function
TX+
TX–
RX+

RX–

Pin #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Figure H-1. 10BaseT Ethernet Cables

H-2

Key
Pin #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Appendix I

Network Considerations

Introduction

I-1.

This is a tutorial on commonly used Network communication technology and how
to get started using the NetDAQ instruments. It’s not necessary to know the details
of Network communication methods in order to use NetDAQ effectively.
However, there are such a wide variety of Network techniques and technology in
use that you can become lost in the jargon used by Network Professionals.
This tutorial will attempt to take some of the mystery out of Networking. After all,
Networking is just a way of communicating digital information from one point to
another. Computer Networks are very similar to a postal service. Just like in postal
services, in networks you can:
•

Write a message.

•

Assign a destination address.

•

Add a return address on the message in case of delivery problems.

•

Specify a delivery method (overnight, two day, etc.)

•

Drop the message into the network.

•

Expect the message to arrive at its destination some time later.

The software, hardware, and wiring of a network ensures that a message with
proper addressing and type gets to its destination, and that errors are detected.

NetDAQ and Network Communication Techniques

I-2.

In the past, Fluke data acquisition instruments depended on RS-232 and IEEE-488
communication methods. This was OK with limited channel measurement rates,

I-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

low system data throughput because of the processing rate of host computers and
disk systems, and instruments that are physically close to the host computer.
Now, the increased processing capability of affordable host computers, increased
channel measurement rates, and pressure to place the instruments close to the
signal source have made support of high-speed, long distance communication
techniques necessary. At the same time, many companies are installing network
wiring to support general client/server processing on Personal Computers.
Using networking techniques to communicate between the PC and the instrument
has many advantages (and a few disadvantages). Advantages include:
•

High data transfer rates

•

Standard wiring methods and use of in-place wiring

•

Standard protocols

•

Low cost interface boards

Disadvantages include:
•

Increased setup complexity

•

Increased instrument power consumption (compared to RS-232)

•

Additional interface in the PC

The NetDAQ instrument and host computer software use Ethernet wiring and low
level protocols, TCP/IP high level protocols, and the WINSOCK application
interface layer. These are all public domain, non-proprietary standards with
multiple-company support. Use of these non-proprietary protocols and hardware
ensures that NetDAQ instruments and software will operate on most installed
networks and have the lowest possible cost using off-the-shelf commercial
networking products. Read “Network Primer” in this appendix for more
information on these standards.

NetDAQ and Your Network Administrator

I-3.

If you plan to communicate between your host PC and the NetDAQ instruments
on a network that is totally isolated from any other network communication
devices, you can install the network and set up the devices without consulting
Network Administration. However, if you're going to communicate on an existing
network, you need to coordinate this with your Network Administrator.
Specifically, you need to ask the following questions before installing and setting
up your instruments and host PC:
1. What values should I use for my IP addresses, Socket Port Number, and
Subnet Mask?

I-2

Network Considerations
Network Primer

2. Does the network contain more than one subnet? If so, what’s the IP address of
my default gateway or router device?
3. Will all the routers route IP packets?
4. What are my domain and host names (optional)?
The minimum information you need to get is the IP Addresses for the PC and the
instruments. If your network contains more than one subnet and you want to place
the PC and one or more instruments in different subnets, you must also set the
default gateway address and subnet mask on both the NetDAQ instrument and the
PC.
Your Network Administrator may also need to know the Ethernet addresses of the
PC Ethernet adapter and each NetDAQ instrument that you will attach to the
network. Obtain the Ethernet address of the PC by running the hardware setup
program supplied with the adapter hardware. Obtain the address of the NetDAQ
instruments by using the front panel controls.
Please read “Network Primer” in this appendix for more information on IP
addressing and the other information needed to operate NetDAQ on a general
network.

Network Primer

I-4.

In the early days of computer networking, vendors used many proprietary
communication schemes. These forced users to purchase equipment and software
from one or a few companies. As networking became more popular, users placed
pressure on vendors to establish standards to allow interoperation of various types
of computers, operating system software, and interface hardware.
One of these standardization efforts was started by the DARPA agency of the U.S.
Defense department. Another was headed up by the DEC and Xerox companies.
This effort resulted in the Ethernet wiring and low-level protocol scheme. The
DARPA effort resulted in the TCP/IP high-level protocols. Ethernet became an
international standard by the efforts of the IEEE-802.3 committee. TCP/IP is the
protocol used on the international Internet Network and is supported by consensus
of the users of that network (many thousands of hosts).
The Sockets API was developed at U.C. Berkeley and was widely adopted by the
UNIX community to support direct Host-to-Host communication within a TCP/IP
network. WINSOCK is an MS Windows Dynamic Link Library (DLL) version of
the original UNIX Sockets library and has been standardized by a large number of
PC Software and Hardware Vendors.
To reduce the complexity of network schemes and to encourage interoperation
between varieties of networks, the protocols are built up of several layers that are
isolated from each other by well-described interfaces. Usually, the lowest layers of
the protocol are implemented in hardware logic on the interface circuits used by
I-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

the computers and other devices attached to the network wiring. The Ethernet
standard consists of a set of low-level addressing and data transmission protocols
that run on several different wiring schemes.
Computers on a network are usually referred to as a “host.” The NetDAQ
instruments are hosts in this context. Devices that facilitate communication
between different sections of a network are called by names that indicate their
function, for example, routers, bridges, repeaters, etc.

Physical Layer Wiring Schemes Supported by NetDAQ

I-5.

NetDAQ supports two of the most common wiring schemes used in Ethernet
networks: 10BaseT (or UTP), and 10Base2 (thin coax).
The 10Base2 wiring method uses coaxial cable (similar to cable TV wire). This
simple wiring method supports many connections to the cable, allowing multiple
instruments to be directly connected to the PC. The only trick to 10Base2 wiring is
that a terminator must be connected to the cable at each open end. Fluke supplies a
terminator with each NetDAQ instrument and wiring kit.
The 10BaseT wiring method uses two or four pairs of twisted wires. It is also
referred to as Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) wiring. This wiring method supports
only two connections to any one run of wire. To support more than two
connections, an active device called a "hub" must be used.
A hub is an active device that supports multiple 10BaseT connections. The
network host attached to each connection of the hub may communicate with every
other host attached to the hub. Hubs also typically allow other types of cable
connections, such as 10Base2 and 10Base5 (fat coax). This is done to allow a hub
to communicate with other network hosts, such as other hubs, routers, bridges, etc.
If you want to use 10BaseT wiring without a hub (to connect one NetDAQ and
one PC), you must use a special 10BaseT cable. This is necessary because both
hosts transmit and receive on the same pair of wires within the cable. To operate
correctly in a direct wiring situation, these pairs must be crossed in the cable, so
that the transmitter on one end is connected to the receiver on the other.
The 10BaseT wiring method is becoming very popular because the wire is
inexpensive to purchase and install, the use of a hub allows some protection from
malfunctioning network hosts, and this type of wiring is easier for network
administrators to manage and control.

Network Interconnection Devices
The following five basic devices are used in networks to extend, partition, and
interconnect networks:

I-4

I-6.

Network Considerations
Network Primer

•

A Repeater is a device used to physically isolate and extend the length of a
network segment, but it does not divide the network into subnets.

•

A hub is a device that allows communication among multiple 10BaseT
network hosts and allows these hosts to communicate with other Ethernet
wiring. Some hubs also perform Router functions.

•

A Bridge is used on Ethernet networks to isolate two portions of the network
at the Frame level (see “Basic Network Packet and Frame Contents” in this
appendix). This is done to minimize transmission collisions, but the two
portions isolated by a Bridge remain on the same subnet. A Bridge also acts as
a Repeater.

•

A Router is used to isolate two portions of the network into subnets, as
described in “IP Addresses and Segmented Networks” in this appendix. A
Router also acts as a Bridge. Make sure your Router will route IP packets if
you want to place the PC and NetDAQ instruments in different subnets.

•

A Gateway is used to connect two networks with different architecture and
protocols. For example, a Gateway could be used to connect an Ethernet to an
X.25 net running on public telephone wiring. Gateways also perform Router,
Bridge, and Repeater functions.

The operation of NetDAQ software and instruments should be unaffected by a
properly designed network using any of these network devices. However, you
must use extra care when setting up PCs and NetDAQ instruments in a network
containing multiple subnets (net containing one or more routers and/or gateways).
The IP addresses assigned to the PC and instruments must be carefully selected in
this case. See “IP Addresses and Segmented Networks” for more information on
IP address assignment.
When a Bridge, Router, or Gateway is used in a network containing NetDAQ
instruments and hosts, be sure to reboot the host PC whenever an instrument is
moved from one section of the net to another. This is required to allow the
network hardware devices to initialize bridging and routing tables.
Also, when NetDAQ is used in a different subnet from the PC, the Routers and
Gateways used to connect the subnets must be able to route IP packets. The
default gateway addresses on the NetDAQ and PC must be set properly.

Basic Network Packet and Frame Contents

I-7.

Network messages consist of short (mostly less than 1K byte) hunks of data,
surrounded by header and error detection information used by the protocols. The
message, together with the protocol information, is called a "Packet." When
physical network information (clock synchronization, error detection, etc.) is
wrapped around the packet, it is called a "Frame." The interface hardware adds and

I-5

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

strips off the Frame information around the packet. So, unless you’re doing lowlevel analysis of network traffic, you never need to deal with Frame information.
For any protocol, the Packet consists of a destination address, a source address,
some protocol type information, a message length field, and error detection
information.
The TCP/IP protocol adds additional fields to the packet for message sequence
determination and application port ID. The sequence number allows multi-packet
messages to be assembled into the correct order. The port ID specifies which
application running on a system is sending or receiving the message. Support of
port IDs allow multi-tasking within a computer system, with messages being sent
and received from the individual task.
In the TCP/IP protocol, error detection is supported by adding a checksum of the
data in the packet to the end of each packet. Using this checksum, the receiving
system can detect a bad packet and request a re-transmit (using the source
address).
Each Host (device attached to the network wiring) in an Ethernet network has a
unique address that is assigned by the interface hardware vendor. Each vendor is
assigned a block of addresses and it is required that each device produced have a
unique Ethernet address. Users of the TCP/IP protocol very rarely need to know or
deal with the Ethernet address.
When TCP/IP is used, each host is also assigned a unique IP address, but this
address is assigned by the user when the TCP/IP protocol software is initialized.
In contrast to the Ethernet address, IP addresses have a structure that can be used
by Network Management to facilitate breaking the network into segments
(subnets) that make better use of the available data communication capacity
(bandwidth). Use of IP addressing and the network segmentation scheme is
described in “IP Addresses and Segmented Networks” in this appendix.
The relationship between a host's Ethernet address and its IP address is established
by the TCP/IP protocol software. No user interaction is needed to establish this
relationship. However, some network management systems require that the
Ethernet address of each network host be kept in a data base. So, it is sometimes
necessary to communicate the Ethernet addresses of all devices on the network to
the Network Administrator.

IP Addresses and Segmented Networks

I-8.

If all networks consisted of a few computers and other devices attached to each
other locally, use of IP addressing and network segmentation schemes would not
be necessary. However, networks have evolved past simple work groups into
campus-wide, inter-campus, and even international interconnect schemes. This
makes it necessary to divide the network into subnets.
I-6

Network Considerations
Network Primer

The IP address provides two pieces of information: the network ID and the host
ID. The network ID must be unique among all network subnets within a connected
Internet. It identifies the network subnet to which a host is connected. The host ID
must be unique among hosts within a network subnet and identifies the host within
the subnet.
Network subnets connected to the public Internet must obtain an official network
ID from the Network Information Center (800-444-4345 or nic@nic.ddn.mil) to
preserve the unique network ID’s within the Internet. However, if you never intend
to connect to the Internet, you’re free to select your own network IDs.
The IP address consists of four numbers. Each of these four numbers can have a
value in the range 1 to 254. An IP address is written in the form w.x.y.z. For
example, "198.178.246.10" (or "C6.B2.F6.0A" in hexadecimal) is a valid IP
address.
There are three commonly used classes of IP address assignment as follows:
Class

w Value

Net ID

Host ID

Available
Subnets

Available
Hosts

1 to 126

x, y, z

126

16777214

128 to 191

w, x

y, z

16384

65534

192 to 223

w, x, y

2097151

254

The following are reserved addresses and may not be assigned to hosts:
127.0.0.0
128.0.0.0
191.255.0.0
192.0.0.0
223.255.255.0
w = 224 through 255 with x, y, and z equal to any value
Most IP subnets have Class B or C Net IDs because there are quite a few of these
available. You may be able to get a Class A Net ID, but there are so few of these
available (only 126 world-wide) that they are rarely issued and most are already
assigned.
Most companies get one or more Class C assignments, which means that there is a
limit of 254 hosts per network subnet.
The TCP/IP software separates the Net ID portion of the IP address from the Host
ID portion using the user-assigned Subnet Mask. This mask looks like an IP
address, but has a bit set in each bit position of the portion of the IP address that is
in the Net ID portion. For example, the Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 sets the Net
I-7

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ID portion to be the higher order 24 bits of the IP address (a class C address).
Using the Subnet Mask, the TCP/IP software is able to detect if a destination
address is in the local subnet or if the packet must be sent to another subnet
through a Router or Gateway.
Networks are segmented by use of an active device called a Router (Gateways and
hubs sometimes have router capabilities.) When a host on one subnet wants to
send a message to a host on another subnet (the Net ID sections of the IP source
and destination are different), the Router is used to deliver the packet to the other
network subnet.
NetDAQ instruments are shipped with a default IP address of 198.178.246.bcn,
where bcn is the base channel number assigned to the instrument. This is a Class
C Net ID assigned to the Fluke Corporation, so it is highly unlikely that it will
overlap with a Net ID in use at your company. However, if you want to attach a
NetDAQ instrument to an existing network, you should check with your Network
Administrator before using the default IP address or assigning a new IP address to
a NetDAQ instrument or PC.
When assigning the IP address to your PC, unless your network contains a Router,
you must use the same Net ID used by the NetDAQ instruments (for example,
198.178.246.z). If you do this, you should set z to a number that does not interfere
with the instruments. Because the BCN can range from 1-99, you should set z of
the IP address of your PC in the range 101-254. The Subnet Mask assigned to the
PC should be 255.255.255.0.
If your network contains more than one subnet, and you want to communicate
with a NetDAQ instrument in another subnet, you need to set the default gateway
address in both the PC and NetDAQ to the address of the local router. The TCI/IP
stack will detect that the destination address for a packet is in a different subnet
(via the subnet mask) and send the packet to the default gateway address where
the router will route it to the proper subnet.
For example, if you have three NetDAQ instruments with bcn’s 1, 2, and 3, and a
single PC, you could set the following IP addresses:
NetDAQ #1

198.178.246.1

NetDAQ #2

198.178.246.2

NetDAQ #3

198.178.246.3

Host PC

198.178.246.101

This would place all three instruments and the PC in the same subnet (net ID
198.178.246).
During initial operation of the TCP/IP software the IP section builds a table that
contains the correspondence between the IP address and Ethernet address of each
host. This is done via the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). To do this, the IP
I-8

Network Considerations
Network Primer

software sends out a broadcast frame that every TCP/IP host and router receives.
This frame contains a request for the host with the unknown IP address to return a
frame to the ARP requester. This response frame contains the Ethernet address of
the sourcing host, and this information is then added to the address
correspondence table. All communication with a host can then be done with
information from the table.
The operation of ARP also initializes the routing tables in bridges, routers, and
gateway devices on the net. These tables are used to determine the section of the
network to which a frame should be sent.

Ethernet Adapter Hardware for the PC

I-9.

To communicate via the Ethernet network, each PC must be equipped with an
Ethernet adapter. There are several types of adapters available (i.e. internal
interface boards, Parallel to LAN Adapters (PLAs), and PCMCIA interface cards.)
Some PCs are equipped with an Ethernet adapter by the manufacturer, but most
adapters must be added after purchase.
Installation of an Ethernet adapter is quite simple. The 264XA-801 card, available
as an option to the NetDAQ instruments is supplied with a small software package
that investigates the current configuration of the PC and sets the card so there is
no interference with other hardware and software. Windows 95 and Windows NT
can install commonly used adapters without using the adapter’s installation
software.
During the installation of an internal interface board on an ISA bus computer, you
must make several detailed configuration decisions. An interrupt line (IRQ) is
assigned, port addresses selected, and the network connection type selected. Be
sure to record these configuration values because you will need them when
installing the network interface software (on Windows 3.1).
During installation of a PCMCIA or PLA interface, few, if any decisions need to
be made. These devices make use of already established interfaces to the computer
bus.

Drivers

I-10.

A driver is the low-level software within the PC that communicates directly with
the interface adapter hardware. Drivers cover up the specific nature of the
hardware interface and allow the protocol software to be unaware of the type of
hardware being used.
Drivers are usually written and supplied by the adapter vendor. Windows 95 and
Windows NT supply drivers for commonly used adapters. On Windows 3.1, you
may need to install Newt or Trumpet networking software and a driver. The Newt
networking software supports two driver standards: ODI and NDIS. The Trumpet
network software supports the Packet driver standard.
I-9

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Packet drivers support only one protocol at a time. As a result, only one package
of protocol software can use a packet driver at any one time.
Packet drivers are usually loaded by executing a *.com or an *.exe file in the
autoexec.bat. This loads a terminate and stay resident (TSR) program during
the DOS boot process. The setup of the packet driver is usually done by including
command line switches on the driver load line. There must be at least one switch
that assigns the soft interrupt used to communicate with the protocol stack. Other
switches may be required to set the IRQ, port address, and other parameters.
For example, the 3Com EtherLink packet driver is loaded by executing the line
3c5x9pd.com 0x60, where the 0x60 sets the soft interrupt to number 60
(hex). This driver needs no other parameters because it reads the other information
from flash memory on the interface board. On the other hand, the Cabletron
adapter packet driver reads setup information from a file named e21pd.cfg.
Since each driver is different, the NetDAQ Logger installation program has packet
driver information built-in for only the Ethernet drivers we sell. If other hardware
is used, you must enter the proper information in the Trumpet setup window
during the installation process or edit the autoexec.bat file directly.
Both ODI and NDIS are multi-protocol, packet driver standards. They both allow
operation of more than one set of protocol software "over" the driver at the same
time. Use of this feature will be discussed in the protocol section below.
The ODI standard was defined by Novell for use with the netware line of
networking software. It supports the native IPX/SPX protocol of netware and
other protocols, such as TCP/IP.
NDIS was defined by 3COM and Microsoft for use with the LANManager
networking software. It has since become commonly used by other network
operating systems. It also supports multiple protocols, including IPX/SPX and
TCP/IP.
ODI and NDIS drivers are usually loaded by being included in a DEVICE= line in
the config.sys file. This line loads a DOS-level driver. There are a few
implementations of the NDIS driver as a Windows VxD level driver. The NDIS
driver used with the Windows for Workgroups version of MS Windows is a
Windows VxD.
The setup information for NDIS drivers is contained in a file called
protocol.ini that must be in the same directory from which the driver is
loaded. This file contains sections describing the driver characteristics and the
protocols that may be operating over the driver. For example, a driver
characteristic section might look like this:
[EtherLinkII]
DRIVERNAME=ELNKII$
INTERRUPT=5
TRANCEIVER=INTERNAL
IOADDRESS=0x300
I-10

Network Considerations
Network Primer

While a protocol section might look like the following:
[NETMANAGE]
DRIVERNAME=NETMNG$
BINDINGS=EtherLinkII
These two protocol.ini file sections describe a hardware driver characteristic
for a 3COM EtherLink II hardware card and specifies that the NetManage
protocol stack should bind with the EtherLink II driver.
The setup information for ODI drivers is contained in a file called net.cfg that
must be in the Novell directory (the driver must be there too). This file contains
sections describing the driver characteristics and the protocols that may be
operating over the driver. For example, a driver characteristic section might look
like the following:
Link Support
Buffers 8 1589
MemPool 4096
Protocol IPX
Bind EXP16ODI
Protocol
Bind EXP16ODI
ip_address 198.178.246.101
Link Driver EXP16ODI
Port 300
Frame Ethernet_802.3
Frame Ethernet_II
Protocol IPX Ethernet_802.3
This net.cfg file describes a hardware driver characteristic for an Intel
EtherExpress 16C hardware card and specifies that the IPX and TCP/IP protocol
stacks should bind with the EtherExpress driver.

TCP/IP Protocol Stack

I-11.

A protocol stack is a group of interacting programs that implement the various
functions of the network communication protocol. They are usually arranged in a
hierarchy of low to higher level functions, so the collection is called a stack.
Windows 95 and Windows NT supply a TCP/IP protocol stack and you can obtain
TCP/IP software for Windows for Workgroups from Microsoft. On Windows 3.1,
you may need to install Newt or Trumpet. Novell sells an optional package for
NetWare called LAN Workplace for DOS/Windows that includes a TCP/IP stack.
I-11

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Currently, the WINSOCK DLL that operates with LAN Workplace must be
downloaded from the Novell forum on CompuServe or you must request a copy
from Novell. TCP/IP protocol packages with included WINSOCK DLLs can be
purchased from a variety of sources including Microsoft, Banyan, FTP, SunSoft,
and IBM.
The Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) has evolved as a
networking protocol that supports communication among diverse computers and
devices (at U.C. Berkeley there once was a TCP/IP-connected Coke machine). The
TCP/IP protocol can be used to communicate between programs running on many
different computer systems, running under many different operating systems, and
even running on several different physical network types (Ethernet being only one
of the many types supported).
The TCP/IP protocol stack is isolated from the underlying network hardware by a
device driver. Applications use TCP/IP resources via one of the several
Application Programming Interfaces (API) that are commonly supported by
network software vendors. The API used by the NetDAQ software is WINSOCK
(discussed below). There are also API’s for file transfer (FTP) and file sharing
(NFS and others).
You rarely need to know the details of the TCP/IP protocol. In summary, TCP/IP
enables two computer systems to establish a connection that allows data to be
exchanged. Data to be transmitted is broken up into manageable chunks (packets)
by the TCP portion of TCP/IP. TCP also reconstructs the data at the receiving end
by merging the chunks back together in the correct order. TCP also assures errorfree communication by use of a checksum within each packet. Finally, TCP uses
the Port ID to specify the specific application within each system that is sending
and receiving the data.
The IP portion of the TCP/IP protocol simply addresses, sends, and receives
packets. It uses the IP address, the Subnet Mask, and the Default Gateway
information. The IP address is described in “IP Addresses and Segmented
Networks” in this appendix.
The subnet mask is used to separate the network ID from the host ID in an IP
address. For example: if the IP address of a NetDAQ address was 198.178.246.10,
and a class C network ID was active, the subnet mask would be 255.255.255.0.
When this mask is applied to the address, the network ID is extracted as
198.178.246 and the host ID as 10.
The default gateway information is only used when your network contains more
than one subnet, or is connected directly to the Internet. When the network ID of
the source and destination address of a packet are different (hosts on different
network segments), the packet is forwarded to the default gateway for delivery.
The default gateway has knowledge of the network IDs of the other network
segments, so it forwards the packet to other gateways on the network until the
packet is delivered to the gateway attached to the destination segment with the
I-12

Network Considerations
Notes to Network Administrators

matching network ID. This process is generally referred to as routing the packet,
and devices that do this are also referred to as Routers or Gateways.
In many modern networks, the use of subnet masking and the default gateway is
not necessary. These networks contain routers and gateways that support the
Proxy ARP protocol. In this protocol, the routing path between any two hosts is
automatically established by the routers during the ARP process. As a result, the
user doesn’t need to manually enter the subnet mask and default gateway
information.
When the TCP/IP protocol stack software starts operation, it communicates with
an NDIS or ODI driver in a process called Binding. During this process, the stack
tells the driver which protocol it is handling. In this way, a driver can direct
packets to more than one protocol stack. For example, it is quite common to have
the Novell IPX/SPX protocol stack and the TCP/IP protocol stack operating over
the same ODI multi-protocol driver.
The protocol.ini file, associated with the NDIS driver and the net.cfg
file, associated with the ODI driver, contain driver characteristics and information
about each protocol that is operating over the driver.

WINSOCK DLL and Application Programming Interface

I-12.

The NetDAQ Logger software uses the TCP/IP protocol via a set of resources
contained in a winsock.dll. This DLL contains a set of functions that support
two-way communication between two hosts on the network. Of course, both hosts
must support the TCP/IP protocol for a WINSOCK connection to be successful.
WINSOCK isolates the NetDAQ application software from the specific
implementation of TCP/IP operating in the PC. WINSOCK's interface to
applications has been standardized by a committee of many different PC hardware
and software vendors. This makes it possible to operate NetDAQ software over
WINSOCK's from several different software vendors.
Windows 95 and Windows NT provide a WINSOCK. You can obtain a Winsock
for Windows for Workgroups from Microsoft. On Windows 3.1, you may need to
install Newt or Trumpet to get a WINSOCK.

Notes to Network Administrators

I-13.

The NetDAQ product line consists of two instruments, the PC software, and some
options. The instruments communicate with the PC using the TCP/IP protocol and
the Ethernet physical network. Using proper Gateway devices, the PC could be on
almost any physical network that is capable of carrying or tunneling TCP/IP
packets and can gate to an Ethernet.
NetDAQ instruments support user entry of the subnet mask and the default
gateway. On networks that contain routers and gateways and support the Proxy
I-13

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

ARP protocol or have static routing tables, you don’t have to use these parameters.
In the Proxy ARP protocol, the routing path between any two hosts is
automatically established by the routers during the ARP process.
The NetDAQ PC software communicates with the NetDAQ instruments in a
totally peer-to-peer manner. Operation of the instruments and software require no
server support. As a result, as long as your network can carry and route TCP/IP
packets, you should have no interaction between communication with the
NetDAQ instruments and other traffic on the network.
The PC software runs in the MS Windows environment and is designed to operate
over any winsock.dll that supports version 1.1 of the WINSOCK standard. A
16-bit WINSOCK and TCP/IP software package (Trumpet) is included with the
PC software. However, if your PCs already have a winsock.dll and TCP/IP
stack loaded, you should use that instead. Especially in Novell environments, you
may want to use the “LAN Workplace for DOS & Windows” product from Novell
instead of the WINSOCK and stack supplied with the NetDAQ Logger software.
Whichever winsock.dll that you use, make sure that there’s only one file with
this name in any directory specified in your PATH. WINSOCK libraries are
specifically matched to the underlying TCP/IP software and are not
interchangeable between software vendors. If the wrong winsock.dll is found
during NetDAQ Logger startup, it will be loaded and the network interface will
not operate.
The NetDAQ instruments have both coaxial (10Base2) and unshielded twisted
pair (10BaseT) connectors for network connection. Only one of these may be
connected to a network at any one time because network activity on the
connection is used to automatically select which is to be active.
If you are already using the TCP/IP protocol for client/server activities on your
network, you may want to review the socket port assignment for the NetDAQ
instruments and PC software. If you already have a service assigned to the socket
port that is used as the default in the NetDAQ products, you may have to change
the port used by NetDAQ. The list of supported services is usually in the
“SERVICES” file in the directory that contains the TCP/IP stack software.
Changing the socket port used by NetDAQ is easy to do (see Chapters 2 and 3 of
this manual for details).
Again, if you are already using TCP/IP, you must assign IP addresses to the
instruments (and PCs of course) in accordance with your established subnet
scheme. If you install the NetDAQ Logger software for “general network”
operation, you are free to select any IP address for the PC and instruments. With
the isolated network operation, you are limited to using the 198.178.246.0 subnet
(Class C subnet assigned to the Fluke Corporation) for both the PC and
instruments.

I-14

Network Considerations
Running Two Network Cards in a PC

If your network contains routers, bridges, gateways, or other devices that divide
the network into subnets, and you intend to have the PC on a different subnet from
the NetDAQ instrument(s), you need to make sure that the devices can route IP
packets. This is especially true on Novell networks, where the network may
contain devices that can route only IPX packets.
The PC software uses the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to establish the
relationship between the physical address and IP address of the NetDAQ
instruments. The ARP protocol uses broadcast messages. So, your routers must be
set up to pass ARP broadcasts to all subnets containing NetDAQ instruments.

Running Two Network Cards in a PC

I-14.

There are cases when you may want to operate more than one network interface
on your PC. You can do this if you’re careful in setting up the adapters and
configuring the software.
One instance when you might want to use two adapters in your PC is when you
want to communicate with the NetDAQ instruments on a network that is separate
from your general, multipurpose network. Another is when your general network
uses other than Ethernet hardware (such as Token Ring).
Use of two network adapters will allow higher throughput when communicating at
high speed with a set of NetDAQ instruments on one network and logging data to
a file server over the other network.
When setting up two network adapters in a single PC, make sure that the hardware
resource setups do not overlap. Each adapter needs a unique interrupt level (IRQ)
and port address. This is sometimes hard to do because of the limited number of
IRQ levels available in the PC hardware, so be careful.
If you’re using two Parallel-to-LAN Adapter Ethernet interfaces (264XA-802),
you should include the LPTn switch on the packet driver load line, in the driver
section of the protocol.ini file for the NDIS driver, or in the driver section
of the net.cfg file for the ODI driver. This switch specifies which of the
parallel ports that adapter is connected to. If you leave this switch off, the driver
may attach to the wrong adapter.
If you’re using two ISA bus Ethernet adapter cards, make sure that the IRQ level
and port addresses don’t overlap. Also make sure that you add the I/O address to
the end of the packet driver load line, in the driver section of the
protocol.ini file for the NDIS driver, or in the driver section of the
net.cfg file for the ODI driver.
Load the network operating system client software first, then load the Trumpet or
Newt software.
During installation of the Newt software, be careful to enter the IRQ and port
address that matches the network card attached to the NetDAQ instruments.
I-15

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Network drivers typically use PC soft interrupts to communicate with the protocol
software. If you’re using two network cards, and as a result, two drivers, you must
select two different soft interrupt levels for the drivers. For example, Packet
drivers (used with Trumpet) usually use soft interrupt level 60 (hex). If two packet
drivers are resident, one can use 60, but the other must use something else (like
61). Usually, this must be communicated to the driver (via a command line switch
or configuration file) and to the level of protocol software that is communicating
with the driver (winpkt in the case of Trumpet).
So, you usually have to include a command line switch on both the driver load line
and on some other load line (like the winpkt line) to identify the soft interrupt and
these much match each other. Packet drivers may use soft interrupts in the range
60 - 7F (hex).

Troubleshooting Information

I-15.

This section presents some information about what to do if you cannot
successfully communicate between your PC and NetDAQ instruments.
1. Mouse stops working when using a Parallel-to-LAN adapter (PLA).
This is usually due to a bus mouse using the same IRQ as the PLA's parallel
port. Move the bus mouse to a different IRQ.
2. Bind fails during PC boot.
Check that the information in the driver section of the protocol.ini file
associated with the NDIS driver, matches the setup of the Ethernet adapter.
Check for misspelled words in the protocol.ini file (NDIS driver). Make
sure that the BINDINGS= line in the [NETMANAGE] section contains the
name of the correct driver section.
Check that the soft interrupt specified for use by the network interface driver
is the same as specified for use by the protocol software. Make sure that this
interrupt is not being used by another software package (i.e. another hardware
driver).
3. Network software loads and binds properly, but NetDAQ Logger cannot
communicate with the instrument.
Use the communication configuration dialog and the instrument front panel
interface to check that the Base Channel Number (BCN), IP address, Socket
Port Number, and Instrument Type are all correct for each instrument.
If General Networking mode is selected, check that the subnet of the PC is the
same as the subnet of each instrument (see “IP Addresses and Segmented
Networks” in this appendix). If the subnets are not the same, check the router
connecting the subnets to make sure it can route IP packets. Also check the
I-16

Network Considerations
Troubleshooting Information

NetDAQ instrument and the PC default gateway addresses to make sure they
are set correctly.
Check all network wiring. Make sure that 10Base2 terminators are placed at
the two open ends of the coax. Make sure that there is no more than one
terminator on each end (some network repeaters, bridges, and routers have
termination built into the unit.)
In a 10Base2 network, make sure that the collision indicator on the
instruments (amber LED) is not lighting. If the collision indicator lights often,
check all wiring for possible sources of impedance mismatch, missing
terminators, broken insulation, metal parts touching each other (i.e. the Tee
touching another connector on the PC), or other wiring problems.
In a 10BaseT network, make sure that the link indicator (same amber LED) is
lit continuously. If it is not, make sure that connection to the hub is correct
and that the hub port is active.
If you have replaced an instrument with another with the same IP address
(same BCN in the isolated network mode), you must reboot your PC. The
TCP/IP software builds a table of the relationship between an instrument’s IP
address and its Ethernet address. If you attach a new instrument to the network
with an IP address that has been previously used, the relationship between the
IP and Ethernet address will be wrong, causing communication with that
instrument to fail. Rebooting the PC clears the IP/Ethernet address
relationship table (the ARP table).
Make sure that there is only one TCP/IP stack software package running on
this PC.
4. Instrument to PC communication starts OK, but there are frequent
communication interruptions reported.
On a general network that is heavily loaded or if there are lots of routers or
gateways between the host and the instrument, the communication time-out
value may need to be increased. Edit the CommTimeout parameter in the
netdaq.ini file (value is seconds) to increase the timeout up to 1000
seconds.
There may be times on a very heavily loaded general network where it is
impossible to maintain high enough speed communication with the instrument
to avoid communication interruptions. In this case, consider moving the
instrument to an isolated network or a different subnet.
5. NetDAQ Logger can not keep up with the scan rate selected in the
instruments. This is indicated by the count of the number of scans in the
instrument increasing continually, to the maximum count, during a data
acquisition run. Once the maximum count is reached, an error message is
displayed by the NetDAQ Logger software indicating that scans are being lost.
I-17

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Move your instrument to a less loaded subnet of your network or isolate the
NetDAQ instruments on their own network.
If possible, increase the scan interval.
Use the Fast Binary file format rather than CSV or Trend Link formats.
Make sure that there are few or no other Windows applications running at the
same time as NetDAQ Logger.
Upgrade to a faster PC and disk drive and increase the amount of RAM in
your PC.
Disable the Windows Screen Saver function or make sure that it doesn’t
activate during data collection.
Turn off Trend Link, QuickPlot, and Spy in NetDAQ Logger and don’t open
any dialog boxes in NetDAQ Logger.
Close any dialog boxes that you have open in NetDAQ Logger. Avoid
operations which open dialog boxes, such as configuring an instrument, while
logging data at high speed.
Load smartdrive during PC boot or use vcach with Windows for Workgroups.
Use of disk caching utilities increases throughput to the data files. However,
data could be lost if the PC crashed suddenly due to power failure or
malfunction.
Make sure the disk drive that you’re writing the data files to is not
fragmented. Disk fragmentation develops during a long period of writing and
deleting files on the disk. Use a defragmentation utility (like Norton speedisk)
to reduce this problem.
If you’re using a general network that is loaded by other communication,
isolate your instruments and host computer onto separate wiring and a
separate host computer interface adapter from general network
communication. If you must still communicate via the general network,
consider installing two network adapters in your host computer and
communicate only with NetDAQ instruments on one adapter and wiring (see
“Running Two Network Cards in a PC” in this appendix).
6. Interaction with advanced display adapter driver packages.
A very common software interaction exists between network support software
and advanced display adapter driver and support packages. If your network
software doesn’t load or operate properly, try selecting the standard VGA
driver in Windows Setup under the control panel. If the problems go away,
contact your display adapter vendor for the latest version of their display
adapter driver and associated support software. If using the latest version
doesn’t fix the problems, you may have to use a less capable display adapter
driver package when running the NetDAQ and other networking software.
I-18

Network Considerations
Handling Token Ring Networks

7. Failure to communicate when using the Parallel to LAN Adapter (PLA)
In some computers the speed of the parallel port hardware is insufficient to
support the normal bi-directional communication used by the Silicom PLA. In
these rare cases, you must force use of the uni-directional communication on
this interface. You do this by adding the unidir switch to the driver.
If you are using the Trumpet TCP/IP package (isolated network), you place
the unidir switch on the command line in your autoexec.bat file where
the etpacket.com packet driver is loaded as follows:
The line in the autoexec.bat before the change:
c:\netdaq\etpacket.com int:60
The line in the autoexec.bat after the change:
c:\netdaq\etpacket.com int:60 unidir
If you are using the Newt TCP/IP package (General Network), you place the
unidir switch on a line in the driver information area of the
protocol.ini file (NDIS driver) as follows:
The lines in the protocol.ini file before the change:
[silicom]
drivername=epndis$
The lines in the protocol.ini file after the change:
[silicom]
drivername=epndis$
unidir
For further information on the unidir switch, see the Silicom SET User
Guide.
8. Newt loads without error on a Novell work station, but cannot communicate
with NetDAQ instrument.
Be sure that there is only one net.cfg file, or that the one modified by the
newt installation program is also loaded by the Novell station.

Handling Token Ring Networks

I-16.

If you need to install your NetDAQ system on an existing token ring network,
your network must contain a Gateway device (see “Network Interconnection
Devices” in this appendix). The Gateway must support both Ethernet and Token
Ring subnets, and must be capable of routing IP packets between these two
subnets. You will need to consult with your Network Administrator about setting
up the routing tables in the Ethernet to Token Ring Gateway device to allow
proper routing of IP packets.
I-19

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

If you install Newt networking software on a token ring network on Windows 3.1,
the Newt installation procedure must be modified slightly. When prompted for the
interface type in the “Add Interface” dialog box, use the list pull-down control to
display the other types. From the type list, select “Token Ring”, then hit the OK
button on the dialog box.
Continuing with the Newt setup, when the hardware selection dialog is presented,
you will see only Token Ring network adapters in the list. Select your adapter or
select “Other” for hardware that is not on the list. If you choose other, you need to
enter information from the hardware vendor documentation in the Section Name
and Driver Name fields in the hardware setup dialog box. You will also be asked
to enter the file name of the driver. Consult the Newt documentation for more
information on this.
Once hardware setup is complete, continue the installation.

Newt Networking Software

I-17.

If you are running Windows 3.1 and do not already have a TCP/IP protocol stack,
you can purchase and install Newt Networking Software, option 2640A-913. Read
the following sections to decide whether you need the Newt software, then use the
installation instructions later in this appendix. Before installing Newt software,
review the following checklist to make sure your network is ready for this
installation.
Ethernet Adapter For most general networks, an Ethernet adapter will already
have been installed on the host computer. If this is not the case, one of the
recommended Ethernet adapters for your host computer may be purchased from
Fluke as an option. See “Installing the Host Computer Ethernet Adapter” before
proceeding with the Newt software installation.
Driver for Ethernet Adapter If you intend to interoperate (communicate over
the same Ethernet adapter hardware and wiring) with your existing network
software, and this software (including Ethernet adapter driver) is already installed
and operating, one of the following conditions must be met:

I-20

•

An NDIS or ODI driver is already installed and configured to support the
existing network but a TCP/IP stack is not installed.

•

A driver other than an NDIS or ODI driver is used by the existing network
software. In this case, you will need to upgrade your networking software to
accommodate an NDIS or ODI driver. Consult your local network
administrator or your network software vendor for information on this
upgrade. Once the NDIS or ODI driver is in use, the Newt software can be
installed.

•

If your Ethernet adapter is newly installed, run the manufacturer’s installation
program to install the NDIS and/or ODI drivers.

Network Considerations
Newt Networking Software

Ethernet Components and Wiring The NetDAQ instruments and host computer
should be connected to the network as shown in Chapter 2 of this manual.
Instrument Preparation Each NetDAQ instrument should be connected to an ac
outlet or dc source with a proper ground. The instrument’s line frequency and
network parameters should be set properly (see “Instrument Preparation” in
Chapter 2 of this manual).
General Network Parameters Before you begin software installation, obtain the
parameters needed to complete the items listed below. These parameters are
available from your network administrator, network software vendor, or Ethernet
adapter documentation. The default gateway parameters are only needed if your
network contains router or gateway devices. The Ethernet adapter parameters are
needed only if this hardware is not in the list of devices supported by the Newt
installation program. The socket port number is needed only if the default socket
port number (4369) is currently in use on your network.
If your host computer is already running network software in the Windows 3.1 or
3.11 environment using a separate adapter and isolated network wiring, make sure
that the two Ethernet adapters do not interfere with each other. Consult the
documentation that came with your Ethernet adapter and see and see “Running
Two Network Cards in a PC” in this appendix for information on installing two
network adapters on one host computer.

Newt TCP/IP vs. Novell NetWare

I-18.

If you have the Novell TCP/IP package (LAN Workplace for DOS/Windows) with
WINSOCK already installed on your PC, you do not need to install the Newt
package. You do, however, need to get the winsock.dll associated with the
LAN Workplace product from Novell. This is available by down-load from
CompuServe or from the Novell BBS.
If you don’t have the Novell TCP/IP package, use the Newt package with the basic
NetWare client software on your PC. First, boot your PC with your Novell
NetWare Client software active. Make sure that the version of NetWare you have
uses an ODI driver.
Next, use the basic Newt installation procedure in this appendix. Newt Setup will
detect the presence of the Novell NetWare software and automatically modify the
NetWare net.cfg file. If Newt Setup cannot find the active net.cfg file, it
will prompt you for its location.
Novell NetWare uses an ODI driver, loaded during your Novell client code setup.
The Newt TCP/IP stack will be loaded to operate over this driver.
On completion of Newt installation, you will see that the net.cfg file in the
Novell NetWare directory has had something like the following lines added
(example for the Intel EtherExpress 16C adapter).
I-21

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Link Driver EXP16ODI
Port 300
Frame Ethernet_802.3
Frame Ethernet_II
Protocol IPX 0 Ethernet_802.3

Newt TCP/IP vs. Microsoft LANManager

I-19.

If you have the Microsoft LANManager software already installed on your PC,
you do not need to install a new driver. However, unless you have the
LANManager TCP/IP software option, you will need to install the Newt TCP/IP
stack.
During NetManage Newt installation, select None when asked for a hardware
Vendor.
LANManager uses an NDIS driver that is loaded during installation of this
software. To add NetManage TCP/IP support to this driver, you must add lines to
the config.sys and protocol.ini files. Add a line to the config.sys
just after the line where the NDIS network driver is loaded as follows:
DEVICE=c:\netmanag\netmanag.dos
Add a section to the protocol.ini file as follows
[NETMANAGE]
DRIVERNAME=NETMNG$
BINDINGS=hardware driver name
The hardware driver name should be the same as that used in the drivers section
of the protocol.ini file (section that identifies the hardware used).
Delete the following line from your autoexec.bat file (the Newt Setup
program placed it there):
c:\netmanag\netbind
If you already have the LANManager TCP/IP software package installed, you do
not need to install the Newt package. Just make sure that the directory containing
the winsock.dll file is in the path as specified in your autoexec.bat.

Newt TCP/IP vs. Banyan Vines

I-20.

Banyan Vines versions 4.10, 4.11, and 5.5 or higher can use the NDIS driver for
network card support. You must configure Vines to use the NDIS driver in order
to install the Newt software. This is done via the Banyan PCCONFIG utility
supplied with Vines.

I-22

Network Considerations
Newt Networking Software

After configuring Vines for NDIS driver support, install Newt. Select "None"
when asked for a hardware Vendor.
Once Newt is installed, edit the protocol.ini file in the Vines directory to
add the following section:
[NETMANAGE]
DRIVERNAME=NETMNG$
BINDINGS=hardware driver name
The hardware driver name should be the same as that used in the drivers section
of the protocol.ini file (section that identifies the hardware used).
Add a line to the config.sys just after the line where the NDIS network driver
is loaded as follows:
device=c:\netmanag\netmanag.dos
Delete the following line from your autoexec.bat file (the Newt Setup
program placed it there):
c:\netmanag\netbind
At present, the Banyan TCP/IP software package doesn’t support winsock.dll.
Since this is needed to run NetDAQ Logger, you must replace the Banyan TCP/IP
package with Newt.

Newt TCP/IP vs. Windows for Workgroups

I-21.

Microsoft Windows for Workgroups contains built-in peer to peer networking
capability. This capability normally uses the Microsoft Network Protocol
(combination of NetBIOS and NetBEUI), but can operate over TCP/IP or other
protocols. You can also run Newt TCP/IP and the Microsoft Network Protocol at
the same time on a PC because Windows for Workgroups normally uses NDIS
drivers that are capable of supporting more than one protocol.
If you already have the TCP/IP for Windows for Workgroups optional software
package from Microsoft, you do not need to install Newt. Just install NetDAQ
Logger. It will use the winsock.dll included in your TCP/IP package.
We recommend that you upgrade to Windows for Workgroups Version 3.11
before attempting to install Newt and NetDAQ Logger. You should also have
Windows for Workgroups configured and operating with networking enabled
before starting Newt installation.
After ensuring that the proper version of Windows for Workgroups is installed
and working properly, install Newt. Select "None" when asked for a hardware
Vendor. Aside from that, install Newt in the same way as described above.
Newt will modify the following files:
I-23

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

•

autoexec.bat Netmanage directory added to the path.

•

system.ini netmanage.dos added to the transport= line under the
[Network Drivers] section. LoadRMDrivers= will be changed to
Yes.

•

protocol.ini [NETMANAGE] section added that should have a
BINDINGS= line that links to the adapter driver that is to be used for the
interface to the NetDAQ instruments.

Once Newt is properly installed, search the Windows directory for a file named
winsock.dll. If you find this file, you must remove it or rename it so the Newt
winsock.dll is used instead of the one that came with Windows for
Workgroups.

Newt TCP/IP vs. Windows for Workgroups and Novell NetWare

I-22.

If you’re running Novell NetWare Client functions in Windows for Workgroups,
the Installation will be somewhat different.
Make sure that Windows for Workgroups with Novell Client functions is
operating properly before installing Newt. If this is the case, your
autoexec.bat will load an ODI driver and the odihlp.exe shim rather than
the usual NDIS driver.
After ensuring that Windows for Workgroups and Novell NetWare are operating
properly, install Newt as described above. You will not be prompted for hardware
setup, because the Newt setup will sense that an ODI driver is already active.
Newt will modify the net.cfg file to add the necessary Frame and Protocol
lines to support TCP/IP as an active protocol over the ODI driver. It will also add
a load of the NMODI shim to your autoexec.bat file to allow the Newt stack
to operate over the ODI driver.

Installing Newt Networking Software

I-23.

Complete the following procedure to install Newt:
1. Insert Newt disk 1 and run setup.exe.
2. Follow the Newt setup instructions:
a. Enter the Serial Number and Key Number from the NetManage License
Record Card. Use UPPERCASE for alpha characters. Click Continue.
b. If you are not prompted for the Identification information above, then you
have residual elements of a previous Newt installation on your host
computer.
c. If you do not intend to update the current Newt installation, do not
continue with this procedure.
I-24

Network Considerations
Newt Networking Software

d. Accept the default directory c:\netmanag. Click Continue.
e. Acknowledge the Setup is Complete! message by clicking OK.
3. Select Interface | Add. Accept the Ethernet defaults. Click OK.
If you are already using Novell NetWare Client software, Banyan Vines,
Windows for Workgroups (with networking enabled) or another package that
already has installed an ODI or NDIS driver, the following Hardware
Selection dialog box will not appear and the existing driver is used. Newt
modifies the protocol.ini (NDIS driver) or net.cfg (ODI driver) file
associated with the installed driver.
4. Select Setup | Hardware. Select the desired Ethernet adapter hardware type. If
your hardware device is not shown, select Other and enter the Section Name,
Driver name, and the Driver File name and location in the appropriate fields
(Entries in this box are case-sensitive.) Refer to the Newt Manual for more
information.
5. Select Setup | IP address. Enter the IP address assigned by your network
administrator for this host computer and click OK.

6. Select Setup | Subnet Mask. Accept the default of zero additional mask bits
unless your system administrator says otherwise. A subnet mask other than the
default for your IP address is required if routers are used on your network to
divide the net into “subnets.

I-25

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

7. Select Setup | Host Name. Enter the host name assigned by your network
administrator for this host computer. Click OK.
8. Select Setup | Domain Name. Enter the domain name assigned by your
network administrator for this host computer. Click OK.
9. Select Setup | Ethernet Type and verify that Ethernet/DIX is selected. Click
OK.

10. Check the Custom window for a summary of your parameters (the example
below is typical). Repeat Steps 4 to 9 as required to make changes. The
Physical Address (host computer Ethernet Adapter interface address) is
entered automatically when the computer is rebooted.

I-26

Network Considerations
Newt Networking Software

11. Select File | Save. If the NDIS driver must be loaded, and it cannot be found
on one of the directories specified in your PATH environment variable, the
following dialog box displays. Enter the path to the NDIS driver. It is usually
found in the NDIS directory of the diskette supplied with your Ethernet
adapter.

If communication between the host computer and a NetDAQ instrument must
pass through a router or gateway, you must set up the default gateway address
on both the host computer and the instrument. (This information is available
from your network administrator.) To set the default gateway address in Newt,
select Service | Default Gateway and enter the address for your local router or
gateway.
12. In the Custom window, select File | Exit. Click OK to reboot the computer.
After rebooting is complete, continue to Step 13.
13. In Windows, open Custom from the NEWT group. Verify that the Physical
Address is filled in (the example below is typical). If you receive error
messages, see Table I-1 Newt Quick Check.

I-27

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Write down the Physical (Ethernet) Address from the Custom window inside the
back cover of this manual. Select File | Exit to close Newt.

I-28

Network Considerations
Newt Networking Software

Table I-1. Newt Quick Check
Newt Error Messages

Description of Problems and Problem Resolution

Plug-in Card
Failed to get interface
characteristics table
Failed to initialize

1. No Ethernet card is installed. Complete "Installing the Host
Computer Ethernet Adapter” in Chapter 2 of this manual.
2. The installed Ethernet card does not match the Newt Custom
Hardware selection. Change hardware selection. See Step 4 of
the Newt installation procedure.

interface

3. Newt was installed but the computer was not rebooted to
implement the changes to the autoexec.bat and config.sys files.
Reboot the computer.

Failed to open driver

4. The Ethernet card I/O Base Address given in step 5 is incorrect.

Parallel-to-LAN
1. No Ethernet adapter or the adapter is not powered. Check that
the Ethernet Adapter power LED (red) is on.
Failed to get interface
characteristics table

2. The installed Ethernet Adapter does not match the Newt Custom
Hardware selection. See Step 4 of the Newt installation
procedure.
3. Newt was installed but the computer was not rebooted to
implement the changes to the autoexec.bat and config.sys files.
Reboot the computer.

Failed to initialize
interface

4. There is an IRQ5 or IRQ7 (Interrupt Request) conflict with your
parallel port. For example, you may be sharing the IRQ with a
bus mouse (a mouse not connected to a COM port). In DOS, use
the MSD utility (supplied with Windows) to examine your
computer setup and make corrections as required, or use a
different parallel port.

Failed to open driver

5. Errors in autoexec.bat, config.sys, or win.ini. See Table I-2 for the
correct listings. Use the Notepad accessory to check each file
and make corrections.

I-29

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Table I-2. Additions to Host Computer Files made by Newt Installation
Newt Installation
Newt for a typical
plug-in Ethernet card

Host Computer Files Addition or Modification
Five lines added to c:\autoexec.bat
@REM The following line was added by Chameleon (date)
C:\NETMANAG/NETBIND
C:\NETMANAG; (to the PATH command)
@REM The following line was added by Chameleon (date)
SHARE
Six lines added to c:\config.sys
REM The following line was added by Chameleon (date)
DEVICE=C:\NETMANAG\PROTMAN.DOS /I:C:\NETMANAG
REM The following line was added by Chameleon (date)
DEVICE=C:\NETMANAG\ELNK3.DOS
REM The following line was added by Chameleon (date)
DEVICE=C:\NETMANAG\NETMANAG.DOS
Four lines added to c:\windows\win.ini
[TCPIP]
ID=M4py50snByr0sl_Srhf (typical)
SLIP=C:\NETMANAG\SLIP.INI
FILE=C:\NETMANAG\TCPIP.EFG
Directory added: C:\NETMANAG
Group added to Program Manager: NEWT

Newt for a typical
Parallel-to-LAN
Ethernet Adapter

Two lines added to c:\autoexec.bat
C:\NETMANAG; (to the PATH command)
C:\NETMANAG\NETBIND
Three lines added toc :\config.sys
DEVICE=C:\NETMANG\PROTMAN.DOS/I:C:\NETMANAG
DEVICE=C:\NETMANG\EPNDIS.DOS
DEVICE=C:\NETMANAG\NETMANAG.DOS
Four lines added to c:\windows\win.ini
[TCPIP]
ID=m4py50snByr0sl_Srhf (typical)
SLIP=C:\NETMANAG\SLIP.INI
FILE=C:\NETMANAG\TCPIP.CFG
Directory added: c:\netmang
Group added to the Program Manager: NEWT

I-30

Network Considerations
Glossary

Glossary

I-24.

10Base2 Network wiring scheme using 50 ohm coaxial cable (10 MHz,
Baseband, 200 meter max. length).
10BaseT Also called UTP. Network wiring scheme using unshielded, twisted pair
cable (10 MHz, Baseband, Twisted Pair).
API Application Programming Interface. A documented interface that allows
application software packages to access resources from a library. For example,
WINSOCK is an API into the winsock.dll library, which itself gives users
access to functions in the TCP/IP protocol stack software. Other commonly used
APIs are the Windows SDK, OLE, NetBIOS, and DPMI.
ARP Address Resolution Protocol. A low-level portion of the TCP/IP protocol
that automatically determines the relationship between a host’s IP address and its
physical address. For example, on an Ethernet, the ARP table contains the
relationship between a host’s IP address and Ethernet address.
BCN Base Channel Number. Used by the NetDAQ instruments and software to
identify the channel number range assigned to a specific instrument. Set from the
front panel controls on the instrument. Also used in the isolated network mode to
set the lowest order portion of the IP address assigned to the instrument
(198.178.246.BCN).
Bind The process of initializing the interface between the physical interface
driver (device driver) and the bottom of the TCP/IP stack software. During the
bind process the information in the protocol.ini (NDIS Driver) or net.cfg
(ODI Driver) is communicated to the driver and the protocol software.
Bridge A device used to isolate two portions of a network on the Frame level.
Used to minimize collisions on an Ethernet. Also acts as a repeater.
Brouter A device that combines bridge and router functions in the same box.
Client A computer system that uses resources made available by other computers
on a network.
Default Gateway Address The address of the router or gateway that routes
packets from the local subnet to other subnets in the network. If a host determines
that the destination address for a packet has a different subnet number than its
own subnet (via use of the subnet mask), it sends the packet to the default gateway
to be routed to the correct subnet.
Dialog Box A standard MS Windows user interface mechanism that consists of a
window containing various controls (input fields, check boxes, radio buttons, etc.)
DLL Dynamic Link Library. A library loaded automatically by MS Windows
when required by an application software package and unloaded when it is no
longer needed.
I-31

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

DNS Domain Name Service. A database and associated software packages that
provides the means of establishing and accessing the relationship between the
names and IP addresses of network hosts.
Domain A group of computers on the network may be assigned a domain name
and referred to by that name. Domain names can be used as part of the Internet
name of a host. For example, my Internet name is dag@tc.fluke.com. My domain
name is “tc”.
DOS An operating system used on the IBM PC and clones of this architecture.
There are three major variations of DOS (and lots or minor ones): MS/DOS from
Microsoft, PC/DOS from IBM, and DR/DOS from Novell.
Driver A software package that provides a specific and usually standardized
interface between a hardware interface and application software. There are three
standard network driver types; NDIS, ODI, and Packet.
Ethernet One type of physical network standardized by IEEE-802.3. The
Ethernet standard supports several wiring types.
Ethernet Address An Ethernet address is a six-part number. It is usually
expressed in hexadecimal format, with each part separated by a colon. This
address must be unique and is usually assigned to a hardware interface device at
the point of manufacture.
Frame A sequence of bits on a physical net that encompasses one block of
communication between a transmitter and one or more receiver. A frame usually
contains a header, source and destination physical addresses, an error detection
field, and the information that is to be transferred. In TCP/IP over Ethernet, the
Ethernet frame contains the IP packet, which, in turn contains the TCP packet.
Gate Also called a Gateway. A device used to interconnect different types of
physical networks. Gateways also usually perform router functions.
Host Any computer system attached to a network.
Hub The central unit of a 10BaseT network. It is a hardware device that allows
multiple hosts to communicate with each other via 10BaseT cable. Most hub
devices also support gating 10BaseT wiring to other forms of network wiring.
Interrupt A scheme for signaling the CPU in a computer that an event has
happened that needs software service. In the IBM PC there are two types of
interrupts. The first are IRQs (or hardware interrupts) that are communicated via
signals on hardware connections to an interrupt controller on the PC motherboard.
The second are soft interrupts that allow one software package to signal another
that some event has happened. Soft interrupts are initiated by executing a CPU
instruction. In the PC/AT architecture, there are 16 IRQs and 256 soft interrupt
levels available.

I-32

Network Considerations
Glossary

IP A unit of information passed across an Internet. The IP portion of the TCP/IP
protocol is responsible for transmitting blocks of data from the source to the
destination using the IP addresses specified. It also provides for fragmentation and
reassembly of data blocks that are too long for one frame on the physical network.
IPX A protocol used by Novell NetWare LANs.
IP Address Internet Protocol Address. A 32-bit address assigned to a host on a
TCP/IP Internet. The IP address is divided into Host ID and Network ID portions.
IRQ Hardware interrupt level in the IBM PC standard. The PC/XT supports 8
IRQ levels and the PC/AT supports 16 levels.
LAN Local Area Network. A network that covers a single site, usually at most, a
single building or cluster of buildings.
MAC Media Access Control. The lowest layer of network interface hardware and
software. Most of the MAC layer is usually implemented in hardware and
embedded software in the network interface hardware. Some of the functionality
of the MAC layer may be in the driver for the interface hardware.
Network A system of computers interconnected by wires or other means in order
to share information.
Network Interface Adapter A hardware device that allows a computer to
communicate with a network. Modern network adapters contain on-board logic
that implements most of the MAC layer of the network protocol.
NetDAQ A trademarked name for a series of really fine instruments, software,
and accessories from the Fluke Corporation. Stands for Networked Data
Acquisition.
NDIS Driver Network Device Interface Specification. One of the three popular
device driver specifications used on Personal Computers. NDIS supports
operation of multiple protocol stacks over the same driver and hardware interface.
NIC Network Information Center. The central agency for IP address assignment
to organizations. You must get an IP address range assignment from the NIC
before connecting to the international Internet.
ODI Driver A network device driver specification defined by Novell for use with
the NetWare line of networking software. ODI supports operation of multiple
protocol stacks over the same driver and hardware interface.
Packet A block of digital data on a network, usually containing source and
destination addresses, protocol type information, and other information that allows
it to be directed to the proper destination and for the receiving host to detect
transmission errors.

I-33

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Packet Driver A network device driver specification defined by 3COM. Packet
drivers support operation of only a single protocol stack over the driver and
hardware interface.
PC Personal Computer. A much misused term usually used to refer to a computer
built to comply with the IBM PC defacto standards. Also used to refer to just
about any small computer.
PC Port Address The Intel X86 processor architecture supports addressing of
I/O devices in a separate address space from memory. The PC/AT architecture
supports 1024 of these I/O device addresses, commonly called port addresses. In
most cases, each I/O device (including network adapter cards) are assigned one or
more port addresses to allow the software to communicate with the interface
hardware.
PING Packet Internet Groper. A program for testing if a host with a specified IP
address or name is reachable on the net. Some PING programs report statistics
about the path to the host that is found.
PLA Parallel to LAN adapter. A network interface adapter device that plugs into
the standard parallel interface (Printer Port) of an IBM PC or clone.
Port Also called an application port or socket port. A number used to identify a
specific connection to an application using TCP services. TCP uses port numbers
to provide multiple connections between applications in one host and applications
in one or more other host.
Proxy ARP A protocol used by Routers and Gateways to establish inter-subnet
routine paths automatically during the execution of an ARP between two hosts.
Network Protocol A standard procedure for regulating data transmission
between computers.
net.cfg A file in a standard format used to hold configuration information for
an ODI driver.
Protocol Stack A group of software packages that work together to implement a
network protocol. These packages are usually arranged so that one package
communicates with at most two other packages, one that implements a lower level
of the protocol and one at a higher level. This is why the collection is called a
“Stack”.
protocol.ini A file with a standard format used to hold configuration
information for NDIS drivers.
Repeater A device used to physically isolate and extend the length of a network
wiring segment.
RFC Request For Comment. RFC documents describe all aspects and issues
associated with the International Internet and the TCP/IP protocol. Whenever a
I-34

Network Considerations
Glossary

change to TCP/IP is contemplated, an RFC is issued over the Internet and
everyone is invited to comment on the change before its implementation.
Router A router provides a communication path between two or more sections of
a network. It directs packets between sections (subnets) of the network so that
only those packets addressed to hosts (or other routers) within the subnet are
communicated to that subnet.
Server A computer that provides services (such as file, print, and database
services) to other computers on a network.
Shim A driver-like TSR that translates the interface of a driver of one type to
communicate with protocol stacks that expect to communicate with a driver of a
different type. In most cases this is a TSR that allows stacks that can operate only
over NDIS or ODI drivers to use another type of driver (such as a packet driver).
Socket A two-way pipe-like connection between an application port in one host
and an application port in another host. Once a socket is established between two
hosts, everything that is placed in the output socket of one host will appear in the
input socket of the other host. An API to the socket functions of TCP is provided
by WINSOCK.
Subnet A portion of the network that is partially isolated from other sections of
the net by a router device. In IP networks, the upper portion of the IP address
defines the subnet and the lower portion is unique for each host computer.
Subnet Mask A 32-bit pattern that is used to separate the subnet portion from the
host portion of an IP address. This mask is used to determine whether an
addressed host is on the local subnet, or if the packet needs to be communicated to
a different subnet through a router.
TCP Transmission Control Protocol. The high level portion of the TCP/IP
protocol. It is responsible for providing reliable, securable, end-to-end connection
service between pairs of processes in hosts on the network. It must provide
facilities for:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Basic Data Transfer
Reliability (retry, sequence numbering)
Flow Control (ACK/NACK)
Multiplexing (socket ports)
Connections (Sockets)
Precedence and Security

TSR Terminate and Stay Resident. A DOS program that, when run, leaves a
portion of itself resident upon termination.
Token Bus One type of physical network standardized by IEEE-802.4.
Token Ring One type of physical network standardized by IEEE-802.5.

I-35

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

UDP User Datagram Protocol. A portion of the TCP/IP protocol. It supports
unreliable, connectionless, datagram services. UDP has much lower overhead
(both time and space) than TCP, but is unreliable and should be used only when
the application software provides algorithms for reliability, sequencing, flow
control, and other such services usually provided by TCP.
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair also called 10BaseT. A network wiring scheme
using twisted pair wiring and connectors that look somewhat like telephone jacks
and plugs.
WAN Wide Area Network. A network that supports hosts at locations that are far
apart. Usually refers to a network that covers more than one city and can refer to a
world-wide network.
Windows An operating environment developed by the Microsoft Corporation.
Also the name of a rectangular region on a computer screen containing the user
interface for a task or a portion of a task. Each MS Windows application
maintains at least one window (even though you can’t see some of them).

I-36

Appendix J

Error Messages & Exception
Conditions

Introduction

J-1.

This appendix describes error messages and how NetDAQ Logger handles
exception conditions during operation.

Communications Connection

J-2.

If the communications connection to an instrument is broken during logging, a
modeless window appears with a warning message, bringing NetDAQ Logger to
the top. NetDAQ Logger continues on with other instruments in a round-robin
fashion and attempts to regain communication with the disconnected instrument
each time around.

Full-Disk

J-3.

If the disk becomes full during data collection or if the directory structure is
deleted such that attempts to write to the data file fail, subsequent scans are not be
recorded, but communication with the instrument and data display continues. A
modeless window appears with a warning, bringing the NetDAQ Logger
application to the top.

Scan Queue Overflows

J-4.

If the instrument’s scan queue overflows, a modeless window appears with a
warning message.

Error Conditions

J-5.

Various error conditions in the instrument are checked and reported at the time
communications are opened. Diagnostic messages are displayed if the user enters
J-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

invalid values into the fields of a dialog box. If a critical instrument error occurs
(RAM constants failure or A/D not responding), a modeless window appears with
a warning message. For a description of each error message, refer to Error and
Status Messages in the online help.

Error and Status Messages

J-6.

NetDAQ Logger displays three types of messages: Verification, Exclamation, and
Information.
Verification messages (below is typical) ask you to verify your operation. Click
the Yes or No button. No cancels the operation.

ds309s.bmmp

Exclamation messages (below is typical) notify you of an operational error. Click
the OK button in acknowledgment.

ds310s.bmp

Information messages (the example below is typical) provide information or
notify you of a non-allowed operation. Click the OK button in acknowledgment.

ds311s.bmp

Error and status messages are summarized below in alphabetical order. Locate the
message and then read the Explanation for more information.
J-2

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

[File Name] is not a valid ASCII file!
You are trying to use an incompatible ASCII file for this conversion.
Make sure you are selecting a NetDAQ ASCII (CSV) file. Other CSV formats
such as Trend Link cannot be used with the NetDAQ conversion utilities (Utilities
menu).

[File Name] is not a valid Binary file!
You are trying to use an incompatible Binary file for this conversion.
Make sure you are selecting a NetDAQ Binary (BIN) file. Other BIN formats
cannot be used with the NetDAQ conversion utilities (Utilities menu).

4W Measurements not allowed on Channels 11-20!
You tried to configure 4-wire measurements on channels 11 to 20. 4-Wire
measurements require two channels spaced a decade apart, e.g., channel 3 and
channel 13. The lower channel is configured and the upper channel is prevented
from being configured. This means you can configure 4-wire measurements only
on channels 1 to 10.

A/D Board Failure! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

A/D Open Thermocouple Detection Failure! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If this
fault occurs again, stop operations and cycle instrument power. If the fault still
persists, remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service
Center for repair, along with a description of the error message.

A/D Overload Detection Failure! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.
J-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

A/D Reference Balance Values Invalid! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

A/D Zero Offsets Invalid! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

All associated configurations will be lost. Continue?
You are deleting all the instruments in the Communications Configuration File,
which will also clear the configuration data from the instruments and remove all
the instruments from the Icon Bar and network.
Clearing the Communications Configuration File of all network instruments
invalidates all references to network instruments in all setup files as the
Communications Configuration File is common to all setup files. Click Yes to
proceed or No to cancel the operation.

J-4

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

All Slave instruments will become Async. Continue?
You are setting a Master instrument back to an Asynchronous instrument.
A group instrument consists of a Master and one or more Slaves. If you redefine
the Master as an Asynchronous instrument, then the Slaves will automatically also
become Asynchronous. Click Yes to proceed or No to cancel the operation.

Analog Processor not responding! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

Analog Processor not responding!
Your instrument may have experienced a failure.
Stop operations and cycle instrument power. On rare occasions when measuring
extremely noisy inputs at maximum voltage levels, the analog processor may fail
to respond. In this case, try to reconfigure the instrument. If the problem persists,
return the instrument to a Fluke Service Center for repair.

Are you sure you want to Delete All?
You are deleting all the instruments in the Communications Configuration File,
which will remove all the instruments from the network.
Clearing the Communications Configuration File of all network instruments
invalidates all references to network instruments in all setup files as the
Communications Configuration File is common to all setup files. Click Yes to
proceed or No to cancel the operation.

Are you sure you want to Delete?
You are deleting an instrument in the Communications Configuration File, which
will remove it from the network.
Clearing the Communications Configuration File of an instrument invalidates
references to the instrument in all setup files as the Communications
Configuration File is common to all setup files. Click Yes to proceed or No to
cancel the operation.
J-5

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Associated configuration will change to reflect new instrument model.
Continue?
You are modifying an instrument model number in the Communications
Configuration File, which will also modify the instrument model number for the
associated icon on the Icon Bar.

Associated icon will change to the new number. Continue?
You are modifying an instrument BCN in the Communications Configuration File,
which will also modify the BCN for the associated icon on the Icon Bar.

Attempt to set instrument to invalid time - Verify your PC time!
When logging starts, the instrument time is set according to the clock on your PC.
If your PC date and time settings are invalid, the instrument time cannot be set and
this message will appear.
Reset the date and time on your PC. If this message continues to appear, check
your PC’s clock batteries and replace if necessary.

Attempt to start Trend Link failed!
Trend Link could not start.
Make sure Trend Link is installed. Note the directory used for the installation and
try again. If prompted for the directory location, enter the path to the location of
the Trend Link installation. If Trend Link is not installed, see the procedures in
Chapter 2.

Bad calibration input value - Check your source!
Your calibrator did not input a valid calibration value to the instrument.
Check your calibrator output, particularly for 4-wire connections (Ohms for
example) as the calibrator must be configured for both Sense and Source.

Base Channel Number must range from 1 to 99!
You tried to enter the number 00, or other characters. Select a number in the range
01 to 99.

Batch information in data set has been corrupted!
This will occur when NetDAQ Logger starts logging into an existing Trend Link
data file for which the batch information has been corrupted. The best workaround
is to start logging into a new Trend Link data file.

J-6

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

Boot ROM Failure! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

Calibration Constants Corrupted! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

Calibration Mode not enabled! See service manual.
You have not pressed the calibration button behind the instrument front panel
CALIBRATION SEAL.
Do not enable calibration unless you have all the equipment for a complete
instrument calibration procedure, as defined in the Service Manual.

Cannot access specified drive [Drive] for Trend Link data!
You specified a disk drive for the Trend Link data file that cannot be used.
Check the availability of the disk drive you selected for the Trend Link data file.

Cannot add [Channel] to the Trend Link Data Set! Check amount of
free disk space available.
You have tried to add another tag (instrument channel) to the Trend Link data file
when the disk space is insufficient.
To use this disk drive, delete unneeded files to create space for the new Trend
Link tags and try again. To delete old Trend Link data files, see "Deleting Old
Trend Link Files" in Chapter 5 of this manual.

Cannot add more grouped Trend Link Data Sets! Delete a Data Set(s)
or create a new Data Set.
Your infolink.ini file specifies more than 25 instruments for a group
instrument.
J-7

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

A Data Set is opened for each instrument in a group instrument and each data set
is created by appending 1 of 25 letters in the alphabet. If more than 25 letters are
required, then this message appears. To delete old Trend Link files, see "Deleting
Old Trend Link Files" in Chapter 5 of this manual.

Cannot change Configuration while logging!
You tried to copy channels to an instrument that was logging.
Copy channels only to instruments that are not logging.

Cannot create data file!
You are trying to start logging into a directory that does not exist or into a "read
only" file.
Correct the data file name and directory path or use File Manager to check the
data file properties.

Cannot create file [File Name]!
Your output file for a conversion utility (Utilities menu) cannot be created.
Enter a valid file name and directory path for the output file.

Cannot create Trend Link Data Set directory [Directory]. Check
directory permissions or free disk space.
Trend Link is unable to create the Data Set directory for your Trend Link data file.
Check that the directory permission is not set to Read-Only, check the path for
your data file to make sure the directory path allows access, and verify you have
sufficient disk space for the new directory.

Cannot create Trend Link Data Set dummy file [File Name]!
Trend Link is unable to create the Data Set *.set file for your Trend Link data
file.
Verify that the Data Set directory permission is not set to Read-Only, check the
path for your data file to make sure the directory path allows access, and verify
you have sufficient disk space for the new files.

J-8

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

Cannot write to Trend Link Data Set! Check amount of free disk
space available.
You are trying to write to a Trend Link data file on a disk drive that has little or
no storage capacity.
To use this disk drive, delete unneeded files to create space for the Trend Link
data file with its associated data set. To delete old Trend Link data files, see
"Deleting Old Trend Link Files” in Chapter 5 of this manual.

Cannot write to Trend Link infolink.ini! Check file permissions or
location of file.
Trend Link is unable to write to your infolink.ini file.
The Trend Link infolink.ini file is either missing, corrupted, is from a
previous version of Trend Link, or is write-protected. Trend Link will look for the
infolink.ini file in one of three places. The default location is in the
c:\Program Files\Fluke\tl directory. Refer to Chapter 4 of your Trend
Link for Fluke manual for more information. Check your Trend Link installation
or reinstall Trend Link using the procedures in Chapter 2.

Cannot open data file!
Your data file cannot be opened.
Enter a valid file name and directory path.

Cannot open file [File Name]!
Your input file for a conversion utility (Utilities menu) cannot be opened.
Enter a valid file name or valid formatted file.

Cannot write to NETDAQ.INI file! Check file permissions.
You are not being allowed to write to the c:\Program
Files\Fluke\netdaq\netdaq.ini file (assuming you have used the
default directory).
Check the permissions for the netdaq.ini file. In particular, remove ReadOnly protection. If you have netdaq.ini opened in an editor or some other
application, close that application.

Changes made in lower level dialog boxes will be lost. Are you sure
you want to cancel?
This will occur in the Instrument Configuration, Channels Configuration, and
Data File Configuration dialog boxes if the user cancels after having made
changes in lower level dialogs under these dialogs. For example, if the user okays
J-9

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

changes in the Auto Rollover dialog box and then cancels the Data File
Configuration dialog box, the message will appear.

Channel [GCN] must be defined for calculation of computed channel
[GCN]
You tried to reference a channel set to OFF in a computed channel definition.
Make sure the channels you reference in computed channels have a function, even
if the function is another computed channel.

Communications Configuration File is Damaged! Delete CCF.CFG file
and reconfigure communications.
Your c:\Program Files\Fluke\netdaq\ccf.cfg file is corrupted.
Close NetDAQ Logger. Use the Windows Explorer feature to delete the existing
ccf.cfg file. Open NetDAQ Logger, and then select the Communications
Config command from the Setup menu to create a new ccf.cfg file. Reenter the
network parameters for each instrument.

Communication Interruption!
Communications with your instrument have been interrupted. This may be a
temporary condition.
Acknowledge the message. If the problem persists, check the network connections
and make sure the instrument is powered.

Communication Parameters Corrupted! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

Communications with this instrument have already been opened!
You are trying to communicate with an instrument after communications have
already been established with the instrument.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Close NetDAQ
Logger and restart the application.

J-10

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

Computed channel [Channel #]: Instrument equation buffer size limits
will be exceeded!
The instrument’s buffer space for storing equation tokens (1000 bytes) has been
exceeded.
Delete or modify the equations until they occupy no more than 1000 bytes. If this
message continues to appear when you click OK, continue to modify or delete
equations as necessary. See Equation Syntax for instructions on entering equation
for computed channels.

Computed channels must be calculated from lower numbered
channels!
You tried to create a computed channel that has a lower channel number than the
channels used for the computed function.
Use channels that are lower when creating a computed channel function. For
example, if creating computed channel 24 for channel averaging, then the
channels used for channel averaging must be lower, e.g., channel 23, 18, 6 and so
forth.

Configuration will be lost! Delete anyway?
You are deleting an icon from the Icon Bar, which will clear the instrument of
configuration data. Click Yes to proceed or No to cancel the operation.
To save configuration data for all the instruments, save the setup as a new setup
file. (Select the Save Setup As command from the Setup menu.)

Connection is Down!
Your network cannot support the connection with the instrument.
For the general network, this is usually caused by network downtime. Verify your
general network is operating. For the isolated network, this may be caused by an
Ethernet interface failure at the instrument. Cycle the instrument power and try
again. If the problem persists, your instrument may need service.

Connection Successful!
You have successfully communicated with the selected instrument.
Click OK.

J-11

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Connection Successful, but instrument has older software that will
not support computed channel equations or custom RTDs!
You have successfully established communications with an instrument and can
continue to operate, but you will not be able to use computed channel equations or
custom RTDs.
As long as you do not attempt to set computed channel equations or custom RTDs
in NetDAQ Logger, you can continue to operate with your current software. If you
want to use these features, you will need to contact your Fluke Service Center for
a firmware upgrade.

Constant too Large!
Your equation contains a constant that exceeds the maximum limit of
3.402823e38.
Modify the equation as necessary so no constants exceed this limit.

Conversion is complete!
Indicates the conversion for Binary to ASCII Conversion, ASCII Timestamp
Conversion, or Binary to Trend Link Conversion (Utilities menu) is complete.

Converting File: [% Complete]
Gives the status of file conversion activities in percent complete for Binary to
ASCII Conversion, ASCII Timestamp Conversion, and Binary to Trend Link
Conversion (Utilities menu).
During file conversion, you can click the Abort button to terminate the conversion
process.

Copying to different model. Some channel definitions may differ.
Continue?
You are trying to copy channel configurations between different models.
Channel functions and ranges are different for each instrument. For example, the
maximum volts dc range is 50V for the 2645A and 300V for the 2640A (channels
1 and 11), and there is no 2-wire RTD function for the 2645A. Click Yes to copy
the channels configuration as closely as possible between instrument models, or
No to cancel the operation.

Current Master instrument will become a Slave. Continue?
You are changing a Slave instrument into a Master instrument.
A group instrument consists of a Master and one or more Slaves. If you redefine a
Slave as a Master, the old Master becomes a Slave. Click Yes to proceed or No to
cancel the operation.
J-12

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

Current Master instrument will become Async. Continue?
You are changing an Asynchronous instrument into a Master instrument.
A group instrument consists of a Master and one or more Slaves. If you redefine
an Asynchronous instrument as a Master, the old Master becomes an
Asynchronous instrument. Click Yes to proceed or No to cancel the operation.

Currently logging instruments will be stopped!
You tried to exit NetDAQ Logger while instruments are still logging.
If you wish to exit and stop all logging, click OK. To keep the application open
until logging has stopped, click Cancel.

Demo Version of NetDAQ Logger - 60 minutes is up!
Your NetDAQ Logger demonstration software has been in operation for 60
minutes.
Close the application. You may open the application again for another 60 minutes
of operation, if desired.

Demo Version of NetDAQ Logger - will stop after 60 minutes!
You will be able to use the NetDAQ Logger software in the demonstration mode
for up to 60 minutes.
After the 60 minutes is over, the message "Demo Version of NetDAQ Logger - 60
minutes is up!" appears. You must close the application and, if desired, open it
again for another 60 minutes of operation.

Duration Interval must be greater than zero!
You tried to enter a duration interval of 0 or else entered extraneous characters.
Enter a duration interval greater than 0. The format is Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Entered values do not generate valid Mx+B values!
Your Input Range and Scaled Range values for the Mx+B calculation generate
invalid M and/or B values.
Enter Input Range and Scale Range values such that M and B are less than
+9.9999E+9.

J-13

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Error registering window class!
Windows was unable to open NetDAQ Logger due to a conflict with other
versions of Windows, or Windows is operating with marginal memory.

Error returned from Trend Link function [Error]
The Trend Link application has experienced an error.
The Trend Link error message that appears will indicate the fault experienced by
Trend Link.

Ethernet Chip Failure! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

Ethernet Parameters Corrupted! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

Exceeded Nested Parentheses Limit!
Your equation contains too many sets of nested parentheses.
Do not use more than three sets of nested parentheses. The following examples
demonstrate how you should construct your equations when you use nested
parentheses:

J-14

Allowed:

Not Allowed:

(-2*c21/c2)/(2*((c1+1)-(c21/c2)*(c1-1)))

(-2*(abs(c1/(c2-c3))))

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

Existing data file is not compatible for appending!
You tried to log data to a data file in the Append mode but have added or
subtracted instrument channels from the configuration since the previous logging
session.
Change the instrument channels back to their original settings, log to a new data
file, or rename the original file. You cannot append a data file after adding or
subtracting channels. You can, however, append a data file if you change channel
functions or ranges.

File Size must be between 200 and 100000!
You entered an invalid File Size into the Auto Rollover dialog box.
Enter a value between 200 and 100000 k bytes.

Front Panel Display Failure! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

Front Panel Display Not Responding! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

Hour of Day must be between 0 and 23!
You entered an invalid Hour of Day into the Auto Rollover dialog box.
Enter a value between 0 (midnight) and 23.

J-15

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Instrument [BCN] already has this filename!
Your have configured more than one instrument with the same data file name.
Check your data file names and make sure each instrument has a unique data file
name, or uncheck Enable Data File Recording in the Data File Configuration
dialog box.

Instrument BCN does not match! Reconfigure Communications!
You have a BCN mismatch between what is entered at the instrument and what is
entered in NetDAQ Logger.
The BCN shown on the Icon Bar and the BCN shown on the instrument front
panel do not agree. Change one or the other. If you change the BCN for an
instrument, you must change it at both the instrument front panel and in the
Communications Configuration File.

Instrument has older software that will not support computed channel
equations or custom RTDs!
You attempted to configure computed channel equations or custom RTDs on an
instrument that does not support these features.
As long as you do not attempt to set computed channel equations or custom RTDs
in NetDAQ Logger, you can continue to operate with your current software. If you
want to use these features, you will need to contact a Fluke Service Center for a
software upgrade.

Instrument is busy completing its last received command!
Your instrument is currently processing a command and cannot accept another
command until the first command operation is complete.
This can occur when sending a command to an instrument after aborting the
Reading Remaining Scan process, particularly when the measurement time of a
scan is long. Long measurement times result from configuring several channels
with slow-reading functions such as frequency and AC volts.

Instrument is in use by another PC, or Socket Port number is
incorrect!
You are trying to operate the instrument from more than one host computer, or the
instrument Socket Port does not match the host computer Socket Port.
Operate the instrument from one host computer at a time, or check the Socket Port
settings at both the instrument and host computer.

J-16

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

Instrument model does not match! Reconfigure Communications!
The instrument model does not match the entry in the Communications
Configuration File.
Modify the instrument model number in the Communications Configuration File
(select the Communications Config command from the Setup menu and click the
Modify button).

Instrument not found!
You have a communications problem with the instrument or with the network.
(The host computer Ethernet interface is operating correctly, i.e., the problem is
not with the host computer.)
If the network connection has never worked, check the installation procedures in
Chapter 2, or "Troubleshooting Network Problems."
If the network connection stopped working, check the following:
Network Connections Verify all network connections. For the isolated network
using 10Base2 coaxial cable, be sure the 50-Ohm terminations at the network
endpoints are still in place, especially if you have made a direct connection
between the instrument and the host computer. For a network using 10BaseT
unshielded twisted-pair cable, be sure you have used a standard cable when
connecting to a hub, or a reverse-signal cable (reversing the transmit and receive
wires) when making a direct connection between the instrument and the host
computer.
Instrument Preparation Verify the instrument is powered and prepared for
operation. The network parameters entered at the front panel of the instrument
must agree with the network parameters at the host computer Communications
Configuration File. For the isolated network, this includes the BCN and isolated
network. For the general network, this includes the BCN, general network, socket
port, IP address and default gateway.

Instrument Scan Queue Overflow! Newest scans discarded.
NetDAQ Logger is unable to retrieve scans from the instruments quickly enough
and the instrument scan queue has overflowed. In this condition, the instrument is
discarding the newest scans and saving the oldest scans.
Improve the data throughput characteristic. (See "Optimizing Performance for
Speed" in Chapter 4 of this manual.) When the scan queue overflows, the action
taken depends on your setting in the netdaq.ini file, i.e., discard the newest
scans or overwrite the oldest scans. (See, “Configuring the netdaq.ini file” in
Chapter 3 of this manual.)

J-17

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Instrument Scan Queue Overflow! Oldest scans overwritten!
NetDAQ Logger is unable to retrieve scans from the instruments quickly enough
and the instrument scan queue has overflowed. In this condition, the instrument is
overwriting the oldest scans and saving the newest scans.
Improve the data throughput characteristic. (See "Optimizing Performance for
Speed" in Chapter 4 of this manual.) When the scan queue overflows, the action
taken depends on your setting in the netdaq.ini file, i.e., discard the newest
scans or overwrite the oldest scans. (See, “Configuring the netdaq.ini file” in
Chapter 3 of this manual.)

Instrument software is outdated for this version of NetDAQ Logger!
You are attempting to communicate with an instrument whose software is
incompatible with this version of NetDAQ Logger.
Contact your Fluke Service Center to have your instrument software upgraded.

Instruments with invalid BCNs [Setup File Name] not loaded!
Configure communications with desired BCNs!
You have tried to load instrument icons from a setup file for instruments that do
not appear in the Communications Configuration File.
The Communications Configuration File dialog box (select the Communication
Config command from the Setup menu) has an Instruments on Network list, which
is common to all setup files. When a setup file is opened and contains icons for
instruments that are no longer on the Instruments on Network list, this message
appears. You must add the missing instruments to the Instruments on Network list
that you removed in other operations and then reopen the setup file to place the
instruments back on the Icon Bar.

Invalid Actual Calibration Value! Choose a value closer to the
suggested value!
You have selected a calibration input value that is invalid.
Calibration consists of entering specified values over the range of the instrument
input. You must select these or similar values for proper calibration. If you select
values too far from an acceptable input, they will not be accepted as calibration
values.

Invalid Alarm Value!
You have entered an alarm value that is excessively large.
Select an alarm value that is less than +9.9999E+9.
J-18

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

Invalid Channel Number!
Your equation contains a channel number that is not expressed with the correct
syntax.
When used within an equation, channel numbers must be preceded by the letter
‘c’ (or ‘C’). The channel number itself is expressed as an integer between 1 and
30. For example, channel 21 should be expressed as c21 (or C21).

Invalid Equation!
NetDAQ Logger attempted to read an equation that is missing or was entered in
invalid syntax.
This messages appears when a computed function is defined as Equation, but the
equation is either missing from the dialog box or was entered in a format that
cannot be read by NetDAQ Logger. Verify the equation has been entered, check
for missing operators or operands, misspelled operators, or illegal characters, and
correct the equation as necessary.

Invalid Factor (M) Value!
You have entered a Factor (M) value for Mx+B scaling that is excessively large.
Select a M value that is less than +9.9999E+9.

Invalid IP Address or Socket Port Number! Reconfigure
Communications!
Your Communications Configuration File does not have a valid IP Address, or
Socket Port for this instrument. (General Network only.)
Make sure you have not set an IP address to 000.000.000.000 in the
Communications Configuration File. (Select the Communications Config
command from the Setup menu.)

Invalid Maximum Value for Scaled Range!
You have entered an invalid Maximum Value for the Mx+B Input Range
calculation.
Enter a Maximum Value that is less than +9.9999E+9.

Invalid Maximum Value for Input Range!
You have entered an invalid Maximum Value for the Mx+B Input Range
calculation.
Enter a Maximum Value that is less than +9.9999E+9.
J-19

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Invalid Minimum Value for Scaled Range!
You have entered an invalid Minimum Value for the Mx+B Input Range
calculation.
Enter a Minimum Value that is less than +9.9999E+9.

Invalid Minimum Value for Input Range!
You have entered an invalid Minimum Value for the Mx+B Input Range
calculation.
Enter a Minimum Value that is less than +9.9999E+9.

Invalid Offset (B) Value!
You have entered an Offset (B) value for Mx+B scaling that is excessively large.
Select a B value that is less than +9.9999E+9.

Invalid Plot Maximum Value!
You have entered a Plot Maximum value that is excessively large.
Select a Plot Maximum value that is less than +9.9999E+9.

Invalid Plot Minimum Value!
You have entered a Plot Minimum value that is excessively large.
Select a Plot Minimum value that is less than +9.9999E+9.

Invalid Value!
You entered a value in a format that cannot be read by NetDAQ Logger.
Re-enter the value according to the instructions for the dialog box, which are
available within Online Help (use the Search feature in the Help menu).

IP Address segments must range from 0 to 255!
You tried to enter an IP address segment that is over 255.
An IP address is 32 bits divided into four octets (8 bits), with each octet expressed
in dotted-decimal format. For example, 198.187.246.101. The maximum decimal
number expressed by 8 bits is 255, therefore, the largest possible IP address
segment is 255.

J-20

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

Low on memory!
The current Windows memory level cannot support your operations.
Close all applications and restart Windows.

Maximum number of Instruments reached!
You tried to add more than 20 instruments to the Icon Bar.
The maximum number of instruments on the Icon Bar is 20. If you wish to add a
new instrument, you must first delete an existing instrument on the Icon Bar.

Min. Free Disk Space must be between 0 and 100000!
You entered an invalid Low Disk Space amount into the Auto Rollover dialog
box.
Enter the number of k bytes as a number between 0 and 100000. This amount will
be used as the Low Disk Space amount, and should be entered into the Low Disk
Space field in the Auto Rollover dialog box.

Minimum and Maximum values for Input Range must be farther apart!
You have entered invalid Minimum and Maximum values for the input range of
the Mx+B calculation.
Enter representative values for the Minimum and Maximum Input Range that are
farther apart, for example, 0 and 100 for Celsius calculations. Very small values
such as .00001 and .00002 cannot be used for the required calculations.

Missing channel number reference!
A computed channel equation must contain at least one reference to another
configured channel.
Amend the equation to refer to another channel.

Missing left parenthesis!
You neglected to use a complete set of parentheses to delimit the argument to a
function.
This message will show the location of the error. Amend the equation as
necessary so a complete set of parentheses is used to delimit the argument.

J-21

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Missing right parenthesis!
One of the sets of parentheses in your equation is not complete, leaving a left
parenthesis without a matching right one.
Check each set of parentheses in your equation to locate the one that is missing
the right parenthesis.

Must Select Function for Monitor Channel!
You selected a Monitor Channel that has the function OFF.
Select a Monitor Channel that has a function, e.g., volts dc, thermocouple, Ohms.

Mx+B Load File is Invalid!
You attempted to load an Mx+B File which cannot be read by NetDAQ Logger,
either because the file contains invalid input, or because it is larger than 1 k byte.
If possible, the line which caused the error will be displayed with this error
message allowing you to locate the invalid line in the Mx+B file. Change the
syntax of all invalid lines in the file in accordance with the instructions under
Loading an Mx+B File.

NetDAQ Logger software is not compatible with Setup File version: xx
You attempted to load a setup file that is not compatible with this version of
NetDAQ Logger software.
Contact your Fluke Service Center for a software upgrade. You will need to
provide a description of this error message along with the current version numbers
of both the Setup File and NetDAQ Logger.

NetDAQ Logger software is outdated for this instrument!
The NetDAQ Logger software you are running is not compatible with the
software on your instrument.
Contact your Fluke Service Center to obtain an updated version of the NetDAQ
Logger software.

No channels defined!
You are trying to start logging for an instrument that has no configured channels
(all channels show OFF in the Function column in the Main Window).
Configure at least one channel for a function, e.g., volts dc, thermocouple, Ohms.

J-22

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

No instruments are available for association!
You tried to create an instrument icon from the Available Instruments list when
there were no instruments listed.
Instruments on the network are either shown as icons on the Icon Bar or are listed
on the Available Instruments list. Adding a new instrument to the network and
Icon Bar is a 2-step process. First, you add the instrument to the Communications
Configuration File, where all the network parameters are saved (select the
Communications Config command from the Setup menu). The new instrument
appears on the Available Instruments list. Second, you create an instrument icon
(select the Create Instrument Icon command from the Setup menu) by selecting
the instrument from the Available Instruments list. When an instrument is placed
on the Icon Bar, it is removed from the Available Instruments list. When an
instrument is removed from the Icon Bar, it is returned to the Available
Instruments list.

No timers available! Close another application and try again!
Windows timer resources have been exceeded.
Close other applications to free Windows timers and continue operations.

Not responding to command!
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

Only [Number] bytes free disk space remain on [Drive] for Trend Link
data!
You are logging to a Trend Link file and the minimum Low Disk Space amount
has been reached.
When you are logging to a Trend Link data file, NetDAQ Logger periodically
checks for available disk space. When this space reaches the value set in the Auto
Rollover dialog box, this warning is displayed and a rollover of the Data Set file
automatically takes place. To change the disk space default value (1000 k bytes),
refer to Low Disk Space for Trend Link section of the Auto Rollover dialog box.

J-23

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Out of Memory! Close another application and try again!
You have run out of Windows memory.
Close other applications to free Windows memory and continue operations.

PC time earlier than existing Trend Link data! Verify PC time, wait [nn]
seconds, or create a new Data Set.
This message indicates that the Trend Link Data Set you are trying to initialize or
log to has a timestamp that is newer than the current PC time.
This message can occur under the following conditions:
•

The Instrument clock is slightly faster than the PC clock. If NetDAQ Logger
runs for several days, then when the instrument is stopped, the last recorded
timestamp may be later than the PC time. In this case, wait for the PC time to
“catch up” before trying to initialize the Trend Link data file for collecting
additional date. For example, if the PC time is 1 minute behind the instrument
time, wait at least 1 minute before restarting. You can also create a new Trend
Link Data Set.

•

The PC clock is losing time. Reset the PC clock to the correct time. If this
problem continues, you may have to replace the battery in your PC that
powers the internal clock.

•

The PC clock is set to a new time. You will not be able to log data to an
existing Trend Link file after changing the PC clock to a time earlier than the
timestamps in the Trend Link file. To continue, let the PC time catch up to the
time recorded in the timestamps or create a new Trend Link file.

Performing Rollover.
This is a status message that appears at the end of converting a binary data file to
a Trend Link data file. It indicates that the Trend Link *.now file just created by
the conversion procedure is being rolled over into a *.tlg (history) file.

Plot Maximum must be larger than Plot Minimum!
You tried to configure a Quick Plot where the plot maximum was less than the
plot minimum.
Change your Quick Plot maximum and minimum values such that the maximum
value exceeds the minimum value.

J-24

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

Primary Interval must range from 0 to 24 hours (86400 seconds)!
You tried to enter a Primary Interval greater than 86400 or tried to enter
extraneous characters.
Enter numbers only between 00000.000 and 86400.000 for the Primary Interval.

RAM Constants Corrupted! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue or No to terminate operations. If the fault
recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

RAM Constants Corrupted!
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click OK. If the fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument
power. If the fault still persists, remove the instrument from service and return to a
Fluke Service Center for repair, along with a description of the error message.

RAM Failure! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

Reading Remaining Scans...
This message appears when you stop scanning and there are still scans in the
instrument scan queue. When all the scans are read, the message clears, or you can
click Abort and terminate the reading process.

Reconfigure Communications to include this instrument!
You have an error in your Communications Configuration File.
The Communications Configuration File resides in the c:\Program
Files\Fluke\netdaq directory as ccf.cfg. If somehow this file has been
deleted, modified, or copied to this directory from another source, you may have
instrument icons without the attendant network parameters. If this condition
J-25

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

occurs, you must reconfigure communications to add the network parameters
(select the Communications Config command from the Setup menu).

ROM Failure! Continue?
Your instrument has detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations or No to terminate operations. If the
fault recurs, stop operations, and cycle instrument power. If the fault still persists,
remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service Center for
repair, along with a description of the error message.

RTD Alpha value must range from 0.00374 to 0.00393!
You entered an out-of-range RTD probe constant Alpha value.
Enter a value between 0.00374 and 0.00393. The default is 0.00385055.

RTD R0 value must range from 10 to 1010 Ohms!
You entered an out-of-range RTD R0 (ice point).
Enter an R0 value between 10 and 1010 Ohms. The default is 100 Ohms. (The R0,
or ice point, refers to the resistance of the RTD at 0 degrees C.)

Sampling interval must range from 1 to 3600 seconds!
You tried to select a Quick Plot X-Axis Sampling Interval that was less than 1
second or more than 3600 seconds.
Reenter a Sampling Interval that is between 1 and 3600 seconds. The Quick Plot
displays 40 interval points on the plot.

Select at least one group average channel!
You selected the Average Computed Channel or the Difference from Average
function but did not specify any channels to average.
Select at least one channel from the Group Average list box for the Average
Computed Channel function.

Select at least one spy channel!
You selected the Spy window but did not specify any channels to spy on.
Select at least one channel from the Channel list box for the Spy window feature.
J-26

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

Select at least one trigger type!
Your scan parameters do not include a type of trigger.
Configure your scan parameters to include at least one of the triggers: Interval
Trigger, External Trigger or Alarm Trigger.

Selected Trend Link Data Set already contains data for instrument
[BCN] Delete the Data Set or create a new Data Set.
The name you selected for your Trend Link data file is already being used by
another instrument.
Select another data file name for this Trend Link file or delete the old Trend Link
data set and try again. To delete old Trend Link data files, see "Deleting Old
Trend Link Files” in Chapter 5 of this manual.

Setup File Is Invalid!
Your setup file is corrupted.
Delete the setup file and recreate a new setup file with the same name.

Setup has changed. Save the changes?
You tried to exit the application or select another setup file without saving the
changes to the current setup file.
Select Yes to save the changes, No to not save the changes, or Cancel to return to
your previous operation.

Shunt Resistance value must range from 10 to 250 Ohms!
You entered an out-of-range shunt resistance for dc current measurements.
Enter a shunt resistance value between 10 and 250 Ohms. The default is 10 Ohms.

Socket Error!
Your host computer is not able to connect to the network.
Check that your networking software has not been corrupted and is correctly
installed. If necessary, reinstall your networking software as described in Chapter
2. Check that your Ethernet adapter is operating by using the diagnostic
procedures that are on the diskette supplied with the adapter. You may have
experienced a hardware failure in the Ethernet adapter.

J-27

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Socket Port Number must range from 1024 to 65535!
You tried to enter a Socket Port number less than 1024, greater than 65535 or
included extraneous characters.
Enter a Socket Port number between 1024 and 65535. The default is 04369.

There are no Trend Link data files to be initialized!
You do not have Trend Link selected as a data file format for any of the
instruments, or instruments with the Trend Link data file format are already
logging and therefore do not need initializing.

There is not enough free disk space on [Drive] for the Trend Link Data
Set files!
You are trying to create a Trend Link data file on a disk drive that has little or no
storage space.
To use this disk drive, delete unneeded files to create space for the new Trend
Link data file with its associated data set. To delete old Trend Link data files, see
"Deleting Old Trend Link Files” in Chapter 5 of this manual.

This Base Channel Number is already in use!
You tried to add an instrument to the Communications Configuration File with a
BCN that is already in use.
Select a BCN number that is unique, that is, not used by any other instrument on
the network. The range of BCNs is 01 to 99.

Time Interval must be between 1 and 99!
You entered an invalid Time Interval into the Auto Rollover dialog box.
Enter the number of hours as a whole number between 1 and 99. Do not enter
minutes.

Time Interval must range from 1 minute to 999 hours and 99 minutes!
This will occur in the Batch Options dialog box when the user selects Periodic
Interval with an interval value outside the stated range.

Time of Day must be entered as 0 to 23 hours and 0 and 59 minutes!
This will occur in the Batch Options dialog box when the user selects Periodic
Interval and checks “Begin first interval at specified time,” and enters a time
outside the stated range.
J-28

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

Token String is too Large!
This equation exceeds the limit of 1000 bytes after it’s been converted into binary
format.
Once equations are converted into binary format (so they can be read by the
instrument) they cannot exceed 1000 bytes in length. To reduce this equation’s
length, reference other computed channels (average, difference, and difference
from average) in the equation.

Trend Link data file paths must begin with a drive letter. Universal
Naming Convention (UNC) path names are not supported at this time.
This will occur in the 32-bit version only, in the Data File Configuration dialog
box, when the user has selected an UNC path name for a Trend Link data file
name.

Trend Link Data Set file not found! Close Trend Link, start logging
again, and then reopen Trend Link.
A Trend Link data file that Trend Link is currently accessing has been deleted.
Exit Trend Link, begin logging data again, and then re-open Trend Link.

Trend Link Data Set .NOW file already exists! Delete the Data Set or
create a new Data Set.
You are attempting a Fast Binary (BIN) to Trend Link (SET) conversion using an
existing Data Set name that contains a *.now file.
Choose new Trend Link file names when converting Fast Binary files instead of
using existing names.

Trend Link file prefix must be 7 characters or less!
Your Trend Link data file name has 8 characters instead of 7 (or less) characters.
Trend Link file names are a maximum 7 characters (plus extension). For example,
testdat.set. This is necessary because the data set directory is the same name
as the data file name, preceded by an underscore, e.g., the data file
testdat.set is in the directory _testdat.set.

Trigger Interval must range from 0 to 24 hours (86400 seconds)!
You tried to enter a Trigger Interval greater than 86400 or tried to enter
extraneous characters.
Enter numbers only between 00000.000 and 86400.000 for the Primary Interval.
J-29

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Unable to communicate with instrument!
You have not made RS-232 connection with the instrument for calibration
procedures.
Check that the host computer and instrument have the same baud rate and are
properly interconnected. (See the Service Manual for more information.)

Unable to Create Configuration Text File!
The name you selected for the text file already exists or is write protected or you
have run out of disk space.

Unable to create Trend Link Data Set chart file [File Name]
Trend Link is unable to create the Data Set *.cht file for your Trend Link data
file.
Check that the directory permission is not set to Read-Only, check the path for
your data file to make sure the directory path allows access, and verify you have
sufficient disk space for the new chart file.

Unable to get a Trend Link DLL function address!
Your Trend Link installation is missing the required c:\Program
Files\Fluke\tl\tbase.dll file.
Check that your Trend Link installation is complete. You may also be trying to
operate with portions of an older version of Trend Link. Reinstall Trend Link
following the procedures in Chapter 2.

Unable to initialize DDE!
Windows is unable to support DDE operations due to low memory or other
Windows resource problem.
Close all applications and restart Windows.

Unable to initialize Winsock! Verify that driver has been loaded.
Your winsock.dll file was found but could not be initialized.
If this is a new installation, you most likely forgot to reboot your computer after
installing your TCP/IP software. If in doubt, reboot your computer NOW and try
again. See if more than one winsock.dll file is on your computer and the
wrong one is being loaded. If the problem persists, reinstall NetDAQ Logger
software.
J-30

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

Unable to load Trend Link DLL!
NetDAQ Logger is unable to load the Trend Link c:\Program
Files\Fluke\tl\tbase.dll into memory.
Check that you have sufficient memory space to load tbase.dll, that the
tbase.dll has not been corrupted, or you are not trying to operate with
portions of an older version of Trend Link. Reinstall Trend Link following the
procedures in Chapter 2.

Unable to open Communications Configuration File!
You tried to open the Communications Configuration File but failed.
Check the read/write permissions for the c:\Program
Files\fluke\netdaq\ccf.cfg file. This error can be caused by having
this file Read-Only. Remove the Read-Only property from the file. Other causes
include the ccf.cfg file does not exist or is corrupted. In either of these cases,
close the application and delete the current ccf.cfg file. Then restart the
application and select the Communications Config command from the Setup menu
to create a new ccf.cfg file.

Unable to open communications socket with instrument!
You tried to communicate with the instrument and the Socket Port could not be
opened.
The Windows resources are out of memory or there is a configuration problem
with the networking software. For example, if you accidentally close the Winsock
icon you will receive this message. Close all applications and restart Windows or
close NetDAQ Logger and try again. Also check your networking software.

Unable to Open Mx+B File!
You have specified an Mx+B file that is not readable.
Make sure the file is a text file, and that it resides in a directory with the proper
read permissions.

Unable to open RS232 port!
Your host computer RS-232 port cannot be opened.
Check your host computer RS-232 port operation. Your COM port may be
disabled for an internal modem or other device or may be in use by another
application. The RS-232 port is used only for calibration procedures.

J-31

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Unable to Open Setup File!
You have specified a setup file name or directory that does not exist.
Check your files and directories for the correct name and path. If you are using
this setup file on the NetDAQ Logger command line, change the command line to
a valid file name and path. (See "Starting NetDAQ Logger with a Setup File" in
Chapter 3 of this manual.)

Unable to read Trend Link default template chart file - tldef.cht!
Your NetDAQ Logger installation is missing the required c:\Program
Files\Fluke\netdaq\tldef.cht file.
The installation of NetDAQ Logger may be corrupted. Reinstall NetDAQ Logger
following the procedures in Chapter 2.

Unable to stop scanning!
You have lost communications with your instrument and scanning cannot be
stopped.
When you lose communications with the instrument while scanning, it is
indeterminate if it is a network problem or an instrument problem. If it is a
network problem, then the instrument continues to scan. To remedy this situation,
correct the communications problem and then click the Stop Instrument button
(acknowledge the "Unable to stop scanning!" message) and then click the Start
Instrument button again. You can also cycle the instrument power to stop
scanning.

Unable to Write to Configuration Text File!
The name you selected for the text file already exists as a Read-Only file or you
have run out of disk space.
Choose a different name for the text file, remove the Read-Only property of the
existing file, or free up disk space.

Unable to Write to Data File! Check disk space.
You have run out of space on the disk drive used for your data file, or the disk
drive is not responding.
Check your disk medium. If you are using a floppy disk, make sure the disk has
not been removed from the drive.
If you are writing to a Trend Link data file and there is still free disk space
remaining on your disk drive, data logging may have been stopped due to settings
J-32

Error Messages & Exception Conditions
Error and Status Messages

in the Auto Rollover dialog box. You can change the minimum amount of free
disk space that can exist while logging to a Trend Link file by changing the
settings in the Low Disk Space for Trend Link section of the Auto Rollover dialog
box.

Unable to Write to Setup File!
Your setup file properties do not allow writing to the file or the directory path no
longer exists.
Use File Manager to check the properties of your setup file, i.e., be sure the file is
not configured for Read Only, and check the setup file directory path.

Uncalibrated or Calibration Incomplete! Continue?
Your instrument detected a fault during internal performance monitoring.
This message does not appear under normal operating conditions. Note the
message and click Yes to continue operations, or click No to terminate operations.
If the fault recurs, stop operations and cycle the instrument’s power. If the fault
still persists, remove the instrument from service and return it to a Fluke Service
Center for repair, along with a description of this error message.

Unknown Communication Error!
You have experienced an unknown communications error.
Make sure the socket port number in NetDAQ Logger and in the instrument are
the same. If the problem persists, close NetDAQ Logger and restart the
application.

WARNING: Only [Number] bytes of free disk space remain on [Drive]
for Trend Link data!
You are logging to a Trend Link file and the minimum Low Disk Space amount
has been reached.
When you start logging to a Trend Link data file, NetDAQ Logger periodically
checks for available disk space. When this space reaches the value set in the Auto
Rollover dialog box, this warning is displayed and a rollover of the Data Set file
automatically takes place. To change the disk space default value (1000 k bytes),
see the Help instructions for Low Disk Space for Trend Link in the Auto Rollover
dialog box.

J-33

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Window creation failed!
Windows was unable to open NetDAQ Logger due to insufficient resources such
as insufficient memory in Windows.
Close all applications and restart Windows to clear the resource problem.

Winsock.dll not found!
The winsock.dll file cannot be found in any directory listed in your
c:\autoexec.bat path.
Be sure you have enabled or installed networking software (see Chapter 2 of this
manual).

J-34

Appendix K

Fluke Service Centers

USA
California
FLW
Fluke Calibration Center
C/o FLW Service Corporation
3505 Cadillac Ave., Bldg E
Costa Mesa, CA 92626
TEL: (714) 751-7512
FAX: (714) 755-7332

Washington
Fluke Service Center
Fluke Corporation
Building #4
1420 - 75TH St. S.W.
Everett WA 98203
TEL: (206) 356-5560
FAX: (206) 356-6390
INTERNATIONAL

Dallas
Fluke Service Center
2104 Hutton Drive
Suite 112
Carrollton, TX 75006
TEL: (214) 406-1000
FAX: (214) 247-5642

Australia
Phillips Sci. and Ind., Pty., L.
745 Springvale Road
Mulgrave
Victoria 3170
TEL: 61-3-881-3666
FAX: 61-3-881-3636

Fluke Service Center
42711 Lawrence Place
Fremont, CA 94538
TEL: (510) 651-5112
FAX: (510) 651-4962

Phil. Sci. & Ind. Blk F, Centrecrt.
34 Waterloo Road
North Ryde, N.S.W. 2113
TEL: 61-2-888-8222
FAX: 61-2-888-0440

Illinois
Fluke Service Center
1150 W. Euclid Avenue
Palatine, IL 60067
TEL: (708) 705-0500
FAX: (847) 705-9989

Austria
Fluke Vertriebsges. GMBH (GM)
SudrandstraBe 7
P.O. Box 10, A-1232 Vienna
TEL: 43-1-614-100
FAX: 43-1-614-1010

New Jersey
Fluke Service Center
W. 75 Century Rd
Paramus, N.J. 07652-0930
TEL: (201) 599-9500 (599-0919)
FAX: (201) 599-2093

Bahrain
Mohammed Fakhroo & Bros.
P.O. Box 439
Bahrain
TEL: 973-253529
FAX: 973-275996

K-1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Belgium
N.V. Fluke Belgium S.A.
Sales & Service Dept.
Langeveldpark - Unit 5 & 7
P.Basteleusstraat 2-4-6
1600 St. Pieters - Leeuw
TEL: 218-2-331-2777 (ext 218)
FAX: 32-2-331-1489
Bolivia
Casilla 7295,
Calle Ayacucho No. 208
Edificio Flores, 5to. Piso
La Paz, Bolivia
TEL: 591-2-317531 or 317173
FAX: 591-2-317545
Brazil
Philips Medical Systems, LTDA
Av. Interlagos North
3493 - Campo Grande
04661-200 Sao Paulo S.P.
TEL: 55-11-523-4811
FAX: 55-11-524-4873 (ID 2148)
Sigtron Instrumentos E. Servicos
Rua Alvaro Rodriques
269 - Brooklin
Sao Paulo, Sp
TEL: 55-11-240-7359
FAX: 55-11-533-3749
Sistest
Sist. Instr. Testes Ltda
Av. Ataulfo De Paiva
135 S/ 1117 - Leblon 22.449-900 Rio De
Janeiro, Rj, Brazil
TEL: 55-21-259-5755 or 512-3679
FAX: 55-21-259-5743
Bulgaria
Ac Sophilco, Cust. Supp. Serv.
P.O. Box 42
1309 Sofia, Bulgaria
TEL: 359-2-200785
FAX: 359-2-220910
C.S.F.R.
Elso
NA. Berance 2
16200 Praque 6
TEL: 42-2-316-4810
FAX: 42-2-364986
Data Elektronik BRNO
Jugoslavska 113
61300 Brno
TEL: 42-5-57400-2
FAX: 42-5-574002

K-2

Canada
Fluke Electronics Canada Inc.
400 Britannia Rd East, Ut #1
Mississauga, Ontario
L4Z 1X9
TEL: 905-890-7600
FAX: 905-890-6866
Chile
Intronica, Instrumen Electronica, S.A.C.I.
Guardia Vieja 181 Of. 503
Casilla 16500, Santiago 9
TEL: 56-2-232-6700
China
Fluke S.C., Room 2111
Scite Tower
Jianguomenwai Dajie
Beijing 100004, PRC
TEL: 86-10-512-6351,6319, 3437
FAX: 86-10-512-3437
Colombia
Sistemas E Instrument., Ltda.
Calle 83, No. 37-07
Po Box 29583
Santa Fe De Bogota
TEL: 57-1-287-5424
FAX: 57-1-218-2660
Costa Rica
Electronic Engineering, S.A.
Carretera de Circunvalacion
Sabanilla Av. Novena
P.O. Box 4300-1000, San Jose
TEL: 506-253-3759 or 225-8793
FAX: 506-225-1286
Croatia
Kaltim - Zagreb
Fluke Sls & Serv. Draga 8
41425 Sveta Jana
TEL: 385-41-837115
FAX: 385-41-837237
Denmark
Fluke Danmark A/S, Cust. Supp.
Ejby Industrivej 40
DK 2600 Glostrup
TEL: 45-43-44-1900 or 1935
FAX: 45-43-43-9192
Ecuador
Proteco Coasin Cia., Ltda.
Av. 12 de Octubre 2449 y Orellana
P.O. Box 17-03-228-A, Quito
TEL: 593-2-230283 or 520005
FAX: 593-2-561980

Fluke Service Centers

Egypt
EEMCO
Electronic Equipment Mkting Co.
9 Hassan Mazher St.
P.O. Box 2009
St. Heliopolis 11361
Cairo, Egypt
TEL: 20-2-417-8296
FAX: 20-2-417-8296
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Fluke Deutschland Gmbh
Customer Support Services
Servicestutzpunkt VFN5
Oskar-Messter-Strasse 18
85737 Ismaning/Munich
TEL: 49-89-9961-1260
FAX: 49-89-9961-1270
Fluke Deutschland
(CSS), Servicestutzpunkt VFN5
Meiendorfer Strasse 205
22145 Hamburg
TEL: 49-40-679-6434
FAX: 49-40-679-7653
Finland
Fluke Finland Oy
Sinikalliontie 3, P.L. 151
SF 02631 Espoo
TEL: 358-0-6152-5600
FAX: 358-0-6152-5630
France
Fluke France S.A.
37 Rue Voltaire
BP 112, 93700 Drancy, Cedex
TEL: 33-1-4896-6300
FAX: 33-1-4896-6330
Greece
Philips S.A. Hellenique
Fluke Sales & Service Manager
15, 25th March Street, P.O. Box 3153, 177
78 Tavros Athens
TEL: 30-1-489-4911 or 4262
FAX: 30-1-481-8594
Hong Kong
Schmidt & Co, Ltd. 1st Floor
323 Jaffe Road
Wanchai
TEL: 852-9223-5623
FAX: 852 834-1848

Hungary
MTA MMSZ KFT, Srv. / Gen. Mgr
Etele Ut. 59 -61
P.O. Box 58
H 1502 Budapest
TEL: 361-186-9589 or 209-3444
FAX: 361-161-1021
Iceland
Taeknival HF
P.O. Box 8294, Skeifunni 17
128 Reykjavik
TEL: 354-1-681665
FAX: 354-1-680664
India
Hinditron Services Pvt. Inc.
33/44A 8th Main Road
Raj Mahal Vilas Extension
Bangalore 560 080
TEL: 91-80-334-8266 or 0068
FAX: 91-33-247-6844
Hinditron Services Pvt. Ltd
Hinditron House, 23-B
Mahal Industrial Estate
Mahakali Caves Rd, Andheri East
Bombay 400 093
TEL: 91-22-836-4560, 6590
FAX: 91-22-836-4682
Hinditron Services Pvt. Ltd
Castle House, 5th Floor
5/1 A, Hungerford Street
Calcutta 700 017
TEL: 91-33-400-194
FAX: 91-33-247-6844
Hinditron Services Pvt. Ltd
204-206 Hemkunt Tower
98 Nehru Place
New Delhi 110 019
TEL: 91-11-641-3675 or 643-0519
FAX: 91-11-642-9118
Hinditron Services Pvt. Ltd.
Field Service Center
Emerald House, 5th Floor
114 Sarojini Devi Road
Secunderabad 500 003
TEL: 91 40-844033 or 843753
FAX: 91-40-847585
Indonesia
P. T. Daeng Bro, Phillips House
J/n H.R. Rasuna Said Kav. 3-4
Jakarta 12950
TEL: 62-21-520-1122
FAX: 62-21-520-5189 or 62-21-520-5189

K-3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Israel
R.D.T Equipment & Sys, Ltd.
P.O. Box 58072
Tel-Aviv 61580
TEL: 972-3-645-0745
FAX: 972-3-647-8908
Italy
Fluke Italia S.R.L., CSS
Viale Delle Industrie, 11
20090 Vimodrone (MI)
TEL: 39-2-268-434-203 or 4341
FAX: 39-2-250-1645
Japan
Fluke Corp., Sumitomo Higashi Shinbashi
Bldg.
1-1-11 Hamamatsucho
Minato-ku, Tokyo 105
TEL: 81-3-3434-0188 or 0181
FAX: 81-3-3434-0170
Kenya
Walterfang
P.O. Box 14897
Nairobi, Kenya
TEL: 254-2
FAX: 254-2
Korea
B&P International Co., Ltd.
Geopung Town A-303
203-1 Nonhyun-Dong
Kangnam-Ku
Seoul 135-010
TEL: 82 12 546-1457
FAX: 82 12 546-1458
IL MYOUNG, INC.
Youngdong P.O. Box 1486
780-46, Yeogsam-Dong
Kangnam-Ku, Seoul
TEL: 82 2 552-8582-4
FAX: 82 2 553-0388
Kuwait
Yusuf A. Alghanim & Sons W.L.L.
P.O. Box 223 Safat
Alghanim Industries
Airport Road Shuwaikh
13003 Kuwait
TEL: 965-4842988
FAX: 965-4847244
Malaysia
CNN. SDN. BHD.
17D, 2nd Floor
Lebuhraya Batu Lancang
Taman Seri Damai
11600 Jelutong Penang

K-4

TEL: 60-4-657-9584
FAX: 60-4-657-0835
Mexico
Metro. Y Calibraciones Ind., S.A.
Diagonal No. 17 - 3 Piso
Col. Del Valle
C.P. 03100, Mexico D.F.
TEL: 52-5-682-8040
FAX: 52-5-687-8695
Netherlands
Fluke Nederland B.V. (CSS)
Afdeling Service
Science Park Einhoven 5108
5692 EC Son
TEL: 31-40-2678
FAX: 31-40-2678
New Zealand
Phillips Scientific & Ind., Pty., L.
Private Bag 41904,
St. Lukes, 2 Wagener Place
Mt. Albert, Auckland 3
TEL: 64-9-894-4160
FAX: 64-9-849-7814
Nigeria
Philips Projects Centre
Resident Delegate / PMB 80065
8, Kofo Abayomi Street
Victoria Island, Nigeria
TEL: 234-1-262-0632
FAX: 234-1-262-0631
Norway
Fluke Norway A/S, Cust. Support
P.O. Box 6054 Etterstad
N-0601 Oslo
TEL: 47-22-653400
FAX: 47-22-653407
Pakistan (Philips)
Philips Elec. Ind. of Prof. Sys. Div. Islamic
Cham. of Commerce
St-2/A, Block 9, KDA Scheme 5,
Clifton, Karachi-75600
TEL: 92-21-587-4641 or 4649
FAX: 92-21-577-0348
Peru
Impor. & Repres. Electronicas S.A., JR.
Pumacahua 955
Lima 11
TEL: 51-14-23-5099
FAX: 51-14-31-0707

Fluke Service Centers

Philippines
Spark Electronics Corp.
P.O. Box 610, Greenhills
Metro Manila 1502
TEL: 63-2-700-621
FAX: 63-2-721-0491 or 700-709
Poland
Elec. Instr. Srv. Philips Cons.
UL. Malechowska 6
60 188 Poznan
TEL: 48-61-681998
FAX: 48-61-682256
Portugal
Fluke Iberica S.L.
Sasles Y Services Dept
Campo Grande 35 - 7b
1700 LIsboa
TEL: 351-1-795-1712
FAX: 351-1-795-1713
Romania
Ronex S.R.L., Cust. Supp. Serv.
Str. Transilvaniei Nr. 24
70778 Bucharest - I
TEL: 40-1-614-3597 or 3598
FAX: 40-1-659-4468
Russia
Infomedia
UL. Petrovsko Razumovsky
Proezd. 29
103287 Moscow
TEL: 7-95-212-3833
FAX: 7-95-212-3838
Saudi Arabia
A. Rajab & Silsilah Co. S&S Dept.
P.O. Box 203
21411 Jeddah
TEL: 966-2-661-0006
FAX: 966-2-661-0558
Singapore
Fluke Singapore Pte., Ltd.
Fluke ASEAN Regional Office
#27-03 PSA Building
460 Alexandra Road
Singapore 119963
TEL: 65-276-5161
FAX: 65-*-276-5929
South Africa
Spescom Measure. (PTY) Ltd.
Spescom Park
Crn. Alexandra Rd. & Second St.
Halfway House, Midrand 1685
TEL: 27-11-315-0757
FAX: 27-11-805-1192

Spain
Fluke Iberica S.L.
Centro Empresarial Euronora
c/Ronda de Poniente, 8
28760-Tres Cantos
Madrid, Spain
TEL: 34-1-804-2301
FAX: 34-1-804-2496
Sweden
Fluke Sverige AB, (CSS)
P.O. Box 61
S-164 94 Kista
TEL: 46-8-751-0235 or 0230
FAX: 46-8-751-0480
Switzerland
Fluke Switzerland AG, (CSS)
Rutistrasse 28
CH 8952 Schlieren
Switzerland
TEL: 41-1-730-3310 or 730-3932
FAX: 41-1-730-3932
Taiwan
Schmidt Scientific Taiwan, Ltd.
6th Floor, No. 109,
Tung Hsing Street
Taipei, Taiwan R.O.C.
TEL: 886-2-767-8890 or 746-2720
FAX: 886-2-767-8820
Thailand
Measuretronix Ltd.
2102/31 Ramkamhang Road
Bangkok 10240
TEL: 66-2-375-2733 or 2734
FAX: 66-2-374-9965
Turkey
Pestas Prof. Elektr. Sist. Tic. V
Selcuklar Caddesi
Meydan Apt. No. 49, Daire 23
Akatlar 80630 Istanbul
TEL: 90-212-282-7838
FAX: 90-212-282-7839
U.A.E.
Haris Al Afaq Ltd.
P.O. Box 8141
Dubai
TEL: 971-4-283623 or 283624
FAX: 971-4-281285
United Kingdom
Fluke U.K. LTD. (CSS)
Colonial Way
Watford, Hertfordshire WD2 4TT
TEL: 44-923-240511
FAX: 44-923-225067

K-5

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual
Uruguay
Coasin Instromontos S.A.
Casilla de Correo 1400
Libertad 2529, Montevideo
TEL: 598-2-492-436, 659
FAX: 598-2-492-659

West Indies
Western Scientific Co., Ltd.
Freeprot Mission Road
Freeport, Trinidad
West Indies
TEL: 809-673-0038
FAX: 809-673-0767

Venezuela
Coasin C.A.
Calle 9 Con Calle 4, Edif. Edinurbi
Piso-3
La Urbina
Caracas 1070-A, Venezuela
TEL: 58-2-241-6214
FAX: 58-2-241-1939

Yugoslavia
Jugoelektro Beograd
T & M Customer Support Servicies
Knez Mihailova 33
11070 Novi
TEL: 38-11-182470
FAX: 38-11-638209

Vietnam
Schmidt-Vietnam Co., Ltd.
8/Fl. Schmidt Tower
Hanoi International Tech. Ctr
KM8, Highway 32, Cau Giay
Tu Liem, Hanoi
Vietnam
TEL: 84-4-346186 or 346187
FAX: 84-4-346-188

K-6

Zimbabwe
Field Technical Sales
45, Kelvin Road North
P.O. Box Cy535 Causeway
Harare, Zimbabwe
TEL: 263-4-750381 or 750382
FAX: 263-4-729970

Index

—1—
10Base2 (Coax) wiring, interconnection, 2-48
10BaseT (twisted-pair) Ethernet wiring ,
interconnection, 2-48

—2—
2640A 2-Wire resistance measurement
specifications, A-13
2640A 4-Wire resistance measurement
specifications, A-12
2640A ac voltage measurement
specifications, A-9
2640A dc voltage measurement
specifications, A-8
2640A frequency measurement
specifications, A-16
2640A RTD’s 2-Wire per ITS-1990
measurement specifications, A-14
2640A RTD’s 4-Wire, per ITS-1990
measurement specifications, A-13
2640A specifications, A-7
2640A thermocouple per ITS-1990
measurement specifications, A-14
2640A/2645A combined specifications, A-1
2640A/2645A environmental
specifications, A-3
2640A/2645A general specifications, A-1
2640A/2645A Input/Output capabilities, A-4

2640A/2645A real-time clock and
calendar, A-7
2640A/2645A totalizer, A-7
2645A 2-Wire resistance measurement
specifications, A-22
2645A 4-Wire resistance measurement
specifications, A-21
2645A 4-Wire RTD per ITS-1990
measurement specifications, A-22
2645A ac voltage measurement
specifications, A-19
2645A dc voltage measurement
specifications, A-17
2645A frequency measurement
specifications, A-25
2645A specifications, A-17
2645A thermocouple per ITS-1990
measurement specifications, A-23
2-Wire resistance accuracy test
(2640A), 6-17
2-Wire resistance accuracy test
(2645A), 6-18

—4—
4-Wire resistance accuracy test
(2640A), 6-20
4-Wire resistance accuracy test
(2645A), 6-23

—A—
AC power, 2-6
1

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Accessing NetDAQ Logger commands, 3-3
Accessories, options and, 1-14
Accuracy performance tests, 6-11
Adding an Instrument to the network, 3-5
Adding or Changing the Chart Title, 5-23
Adjusting the Curve Amplitude Scale
(Y-axis), 5-16
Adjusting the Curve Time Scale
(X-axis), 5-15
Alarm
master, 1-10, 2-14
trigger, 1-10
Alarm specifications, master, A-6
Alarm/trigger I/O connections, 2-12
Alarms, 1-8, 3-23
Analog channel integrity test, 6-15
Analog channels
capabilities, 1-7
Assigning channel labels, 3-24
Asynchronous instrument operations, 1-12
Auto rollover, 4-14

—B—
Background Preferences, 5-21
Base channel number, reviewing and setting
the, 2-27
Basic network packet and frame contents, I-6
Binary data files
converting to ASCII, 4-18

—C—
Calibration, 6-31
Capabilities, instrument, 1-4
Channel
labels, 3-24
monitoring, 1-8
Channel equation
defining a computed, 3-20
Channels
analog, 1-7
computed, 1-7
configuring, 3-18
copying, 3-26
numbering, 1-7
2

Channels configuration dialog box, 3-18
Chart Title, Adding or Changing the, 5-23
Chart, Printing a, 5-24
Cleaning, 6-4
Clearing instrument totalizer value, 4-5
Common mode voltage, 2-7
Communications
network, I-2
RS-232, 1-13
Communications configuration dialog
box, 3-5
Computed channel
defining an equation, 3-20
Computed channel integrity test, 6-15
Computed channels, 1-7
defining an equation, E-1
Configuration commands, dimmed, 3-15
Configuration lockout, using, 3-28
Configuration, power-on, 2-21
Configuring alarms, 3-23
Configuring an instrument, 3-15
Configuring analog channel functions, 3-19
Configuring channels, 3-18
Configuring computed channel
functions, 3-20
Configuring Mx+B Scaling, 3-22
Configuring Mx+B scaling from a file, 3-25
Configuring network communications, 3-4
Configuring the Curve Status Display, 5-17
Configuring the netdaq.ini file, 3-29
Configuring the performance test setup, 6-6
Connecting to a power source and instrument
grounding, 2-5
Connections
alarm/trigger I/O, 2-12
digital I/O, 2-11
universal input module, 2-7
Connector set, instrument, 1-15
Controls
front panel, 2-17
rear panel, 2-20
Controls and indicators, 2-15
Converting a data file from Binary to
ASCII, 4-18
Converting data files, 4-18

Index (continued)
Copying channels, 3-26
Creating instrument icon, 3-8
Crosstalk considerations, 2-11, B-2
Current setup
saving the, 3-11
Curve Preferences, 5-18
Curve Status Display, Configuring the, 5-17
Custom-385 RTD, D-2

—D—
Data file format, F-1
Data files
ASCII, 4-13
binary, 4-13
configuring, 4-14
converting, 4-18
converting from Binary to ASCII, 4-18
trend link, 4-14
viewing and printing, 4-18
Data transmission and storage rate,
increasing, 4-20
DC power, 2-7
DDE example using Excel, G-2
DDE links reference, G-1
Deadband values
specifying, 4-16
Defining a computed channel equation, 3-20
Deleting an instrument from the
Network, 3-7
Deleting instrument icon, 3-9
Describing the instruments, 3-25
Designating instruments
asynchronous, 3-9
group, 3-9
Digital I/O, 1-8, 2-12, A-4
Digital I/O connections, 2-11
Digital I/O output test, 6-26
Digital input test, 6-27
Digital input/output tests, 6-26
Dimmed configuration commands, 3-15
Display
variations in the, 6-34
Displaying a monitor channel, 2-22

Displaying a Trend Link Chart During
Logging, 5-3
Displaying the totalizer status, 2-26
Driver
Ethernet adapter, I-20
NDIS, I-20
ODI, I-20
packet, I-10
Drivers, I-9, I-20
Dynamic data exchange (DDE), 4-12, G-1

—E—
Effects of internal noise in ac
measurements, C-1
Equation syntax, 3-21
Error and status messages, J-2
Error codes, 6-3
Ethernet adapter installation, 2-43
Ethernet Adapters, host computer, 1-15
Ethernet address, viewing of, 2-41
Ethernet cabling, 2-45, H-1
Ethernet port selection, 1-12
Excel, DDE example, G-2
Exception condition, J-2
Exporting Trend Link Data Files, 5-9
External trigger, 1-10
External trigger wiring, group
instrument, 2-15

—F—
Features, instrument, 1-4
File format, F-1
Files
data, 4-13
setup, 3-11
Files, data
configuring, 4-14
converting from Binary to ASCII, 4-18
converting from Binary to Trend
Link, 4-18
Fixed-385 RTD, D-1
Frequency accuracy test, 6-14
Frequency Update, Real-Time, 5-23
Front panel controls, 2-17
3

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Front panel indicators, 2-18
Full-disk, J-1
Fuse replacement, 6-4

—G—
General network IP address, reviewing and
setting the, 2-37
General network operation, 1-12
General network socket port, reviewing and
setting the, 2-36
Glossary, I-31
Grounding and common mode voltage, 2-7
Group instrument operations, 1-13
Group instrument, external trigger
wiring for, 2-15

—H—
Help, Online, 4-21
Host computer Ethernet adapter
installation, 2-43
Host computer Ethernet adapters, 1-15
Host computer networking parameters,
setting of, 2-51
Host computer networking software,
installing of, 2-50
Host computer requirements, 1-14
Host computer/instrument direct
connection, 2-45

—I—
I/O, Digital, 1-8
Importing Trend Link Data Files, 5-6
Increasing data transmission and
storage rate, 4-20
Increasing network speed,, 4-21
Increasing scanning rate, 4-20
Indicators
front panel, 2-18
rear panel, 2-20
Initializing the performance test setup, 6-9
Input, trigger, 1-9, 2-13
Input/Output capabilities, 2640A/2645A, A-4
Installation
4

driver, Ethernet adapter, I-20
driver, NDIS, ODI, I-20
Ethernet adapter, 2-43
host computer Ethernet adapter, 2-43
host computer networking
software, 2-50, 2-52
NetDAQ Logger, 2-52
Newt Networking Software, I-20, I-24
testing, 2-55
Trend Link, 2-55
Trumpet networking software, 2-53
Instrument
adding to the network, 3-5
clearing totalizer value, 4-5
deleting from the network, 3-7
unpacking and inspecting, 2-5
Instrument and host computer
interconnection, 2-45
Instrument configuration dialog box, 3-15
Instrument configuration, saving as a text
file, 3-28
Instrument connector set, 1-15
Instrument description, 3-25
Instrument features and capabilities, 1-4
Instrument grounding, 2-5
Instrument icon, creating, 3-8
Instrument icon, deleting, 3-9
Instrument preparation, 2-3
Instrument, configuring, 3-15
Interconnection
instrument and host computer, 2-45
Interconnection using 10Base2 (coaxial)
wiring, 2-48
Interconnection using 10BaseT (twisted-pair)
Ethernet wiring, 2-48
Interval Trigger, 1-10
IP address for default gateway, 2-39
IP address for host computer, setting, 2-51
IP address for instrument, setting, 2-38
IP addresses and segmented networks, I-6
Isolated network operation, 1-12
Isolated network type, reviewing and setting
the, 2-31

Index (continued)

—L—
Line frequency, reviewing and setting, 2-29
Linearization, RTD, D-1
Logging status window, 4-7
Logging, simulated, 4-5
Logging, starting and stopping, 4-3
Logging, starting automatically, 3-14

—M—
Main window, NetDAQ Logger, 3-3
Maintenance, 6-3
Maintenance of 2640A/2645A
instruments, 6-3
Master alarm, 1-10, 2-14
Master alarm output test, 6-29
Master alarm specifications, A-6
Messages, error and status, J-2
Monitor channel
displaying a, 2-22
Monitoring
channel, 1-8
totalizer status, 2-26
Mx+B scaling, 1-7
Mx+B scaling, configuring from a file, 3-25
Mx+B, Configuring Scaling, 3-22

—N—
NetDAQ and network communication
techniques, I-2
NetDAQ Logger commands, accessing, 3-3
NetDAQ Logger, starting, 3-3
Netdaq.ini file, configuring the, 3-29
Network
adding an instrument to, 3-5
configuring communications, 3-4
deleting an instrument, 3-7
troubleshooting problems, 2-58
verifying communications, 3-7
Network Administrator, I-2
Network administrators, notes to, I-13
Network cards, two in one PC, I-15
Network communications, configuring, 3-4
Network considerations, I-1

Network interconnection devices, I-4
Network interface hardware (PC), I-9
Network primer, I-3
Network speed, increasing, 4-21
Newt Networking Software, I-20
Newt Networking Software, installation
of, I-24
Newt TCP/IP vs. Banyan Vines, I-22
Newt TCP/IP vs. Microsoft
LANManager, I-22
Newt TCP/IP vs. Novell NetWare, I-21
Newt TCP/IP vs. Windows for
Workgroups, I-23, I-24
Noise and shielding, B-2
Noise considerations, B-1
Note System, Using the, 5-24
Novell NetWare, I-21
Numbering, channel, 1-7

—O—
Online help, using, 4-21
Open thermocouple response test, 6-16
Operation
preparing for, 2-3
Optimizing performance, 4-20
Optimizing performance for precision, 4-21
Optimizing performance for speed, 4-20
Options and accessories, 1-14
Options, power-on, 2-21
Output, trigger, 1-9, 2-14
Overview, 1-3

—P—
Performance
optimizing, 4-20
optimizing for precision, 4-21
optimizing for speed, 4-20
Performance test, 6-6
Physical layer wiring schemes, I-4
Playing Back a Fast Binary (BIN) File in
Trend Link, 5-5
Playing Back a Trend Link (SET) File in
Trend Link, 5-4

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Playing Back an ASCII (CSV) File in Trend
Link, 5-6
Positioning and rack mounting, 2-5
Power
ac, 2-6
dc, 2-7
Power source, connecting to and instrument
grounding, 2-5
Power-on options, 2-21
Precision, optimizing performance for, 4-21
Preferences, Background, 5-21
Preferences, Curve, 5-18
Preparation,
instrument, 2-3
Preparing for operation, 2-3
Printing a Chart, 5-24
Printing and viewing data files, 4-18

—Q—
Quick plot, 4-11

—R—
Rack mounting, 2-5
Reading Rate, Selecting the, 3-17
Real-time clock and calendar, A-7
Real-time displays
dynamic data exchange (DDE), 4-7
instrument front panel, 4-7
logging status, 4-6
quick plot, 4-6
readings table, 4-6
spy, 4-6
Trend Link, 4-7
Real-Time Frequency Update, 5-23
Rear panel controls, 2-20
Rear panel indicators, 2-20
Replacement parts, 6-36
Replacement, fuse, 6-4
RS-232, 1-13
RTD
custom-385, D-2
fixed-385, D-1
using custom-385 with other platinum
RTDs, D-3
6

RTD linearization, D-1
RTD temperature accuracy test (DIN/IEC
751 RTD), 6-25
RTD temperature accuracy test (resistance)
(2640A), 6-24
RTD temperature accuracy test (resistance)
(2645A), 6-25

—S—
Saving an instrument configuration as a text
file, 3-28
Saving the current setup, 3-11
Scaling, Mx+B, 1-7, 3-22
Scan queue overflows, J-1
Scanning and logging, 1-13
Scanning duration, selecting an
instrument’s, 4-5
Scanning rate, increasing, 4-20
Segmented networks, IP addresses and, I-6
Self-diagnostic tests, 6-3
Service, 6-35
Setting host computer networking
parameters, 2-51
Setup file
starting NetDAQ Logger with, 3-13
Setup files, 3-11
opening, 3-12
Shielded wiring, 2-11
Shielding considerations, B-1
Simulated logging, 4-5
Specifications, A-1
2640A, A-7
2645A, A-17
2-Wire resistance measurement
(2645A), A-22
2-Wire resistance measurement
(2640A), A-13
4-Wire resistance measurement
(2640A), A-12
4-Wire resistance measurement
(2645A), A-21
4-Wire RTD per ITS-1990 measurement
(2645A), A-22
ac voltage measurement (2640A), A-9

Index (continued)
ac voltage measurement (2645A), A-19
combined 2640A/2645A, A-1
dc voltage measurement (2640A), A-8
dc voltage measurement (2645A), A-17
frequency measurement (2640A), A-16
frequency measurement (2645A), A-25
general 2640A/2645A, A-1
RTD’s 2-Wire per ITS-1990
measurement specifications
(2640A), A-14
RTD’s 4-Wire, per ITS-1990
measurement (2640A), A-13
thermocouple per ITS-1990
measurement (2640A), A-14
thermocouple per ITS-1990
measurement (2645A), A-23
Speed, optimizing performance for, 4-20
Spy window,, 4-9
Starting and stopping logging, 4-3
Starting logging automatically, 3-14
Starting NetDAQ Logger, 3-3
Starting NetDAQ Logger with a setup
file, 3-13
Starting or stopping all instruments, 4-4
Starting or stopping group instrument, 4-4
Static versus dynamic measurements, B-1
Status and error messages, J-2
Subnet mask and default gateway, reviewing
and setting the, 2-38
System operation, 1-11

—T—
TCP/IP protocol stack, I-11
TCP/IP software
Banyan Vines, I-22
Microsoft LANManager, I-22
Novell NetWare, I-21
Windows for Workgroups, I-11, I-23
Windows NT, I-11
Windows95, I-11
Test
2-Wire resistance accuracy
(2640A), 6-17

2-Wire resistance accuracy
(2645A), 6-18
4-Wire resistance accuracy
(2640A), 6-20
4-Wire resistance accuracy
(2645A), 6-23
analog channel integrity, 6-15
computed channel integrity, 6-15
digital I/O output, 6-26
digital input, 6-27
digital input/output, 6-26
frequency accuracy, 6-14
master alarm output, 6-29
open thermocouple response, 6-16
performance, 6-6
thermocouple temperature
accuracy, 6-16
totalizer, 6-28
totalizer count, 6-28
totalizer sensitivity, 6-28
trigger input, 6-30
trigger output, 6-30
Test setup
initializing the performance, 6-9
Test setup, configuring the, 6-6
Testing and troubleshooting, 2-55
Testing the Installation, 2-55
Text file, saving an instrument configuration
as, 3-28
Thermocouple temperature accuracy
test, 6-16
Token ring networks, I-19
Totalizer, 1-9, 2-12
2640A/2645A, A-7
Totalizer count test, 6-28
Totalizer sensitivity test, 6-28
Totalizer tests, 6-28
Totalizer value, clearing instrument, 4-5
Trend Link
Displaying a Chart During Logging, 5-3
Exporting Data Files, 5-9
Importing Data Files, 5-6
Playing Back a Fast Binary File, 5-5
Playing Back a Trend Link file, 5-4
Playing Back an ASCII File, 5-6
7

2640A/2645A NetDAQ
Users Manual

Using the Menus, 5-15
Trend Link Chart, Getting the Right Look
for your, 5-12
Trend Link for Fluke, Using, 5-3
Trend Link, Installation of, 2-55
Trigger in, A-5
Trigger input, 1-9, 2-13
Trigger input test, 6-30
Trigger out, A-6
Trigger output, 1-9, 2-14
Trigger output test, 6-30
Trigger, alarm, 1-10
Trigger, external, 1-10
Troubleshooting, I-16
Troubleshooting network problems, 2-58
Troubleshooting, testing and, 2-55
True-RMS measurements, C-1
Trumpet networking software,
installation, 2-53

—U—
Universal input module connections, 2-7

Unpacking and inspecting the instrument, 2-5
Using Excel, DDE example of, G-2
UTP cables, H-1

—V—
Variations in the display, 6-34
Verifying network communications, 3-7
Viewing and printing a data file, 4-18
Viewing the instrument Ethernet
address, 2-41
Volts ac accuracy test, 6-13
Volts dc accuracy test (2640A), 6-11
Volts dc accuracy test (2645A), 6-12

—W—
Waveform comparison (true rms vs average
responding), C-2
Windows for Workgroups, I-23
WINSOCK DLL and application
programming interface, I-13
Wiring, shielded, 2-11

Instrument Parameter Record (Isolated Network)
Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument BCN:

Note:

Instrument Parameter Record (General Network)
Instrument BCN:

IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

.
.

Default Gateway:

.
.

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:
Ethernet Address:
Note:

Instrument Parameter Record (General Network)
Instrument BCN:

IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

.
.

Default Gateway:

.
.

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:
Ethernet Address:
Note:

Instrument Parameter Record (General Network)
Instrument BCN:

IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

.
.

Default Gateway:

.
.

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:
Ethernet Address:
Note:

Instrument Parameter Record (General Network)
Instrument BCN:

IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

.
.

Default Gateway:

.
.

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

IP Address:

Ethernet Address:

Note:
Instrument BCN:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:
Ethernet Address:
Note:

General Network Parameter Record
(default is 4369)

Socket Port:

....................................................................................................................
Host Computer General Network Parameter Record
Host Computer:
IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

Host Name:
Domain Name:
Default Gateway:

(only if routed network)
I/O Address:
Interrupt:
Ethernet Address:

....................................................................................................................
Host Computer:
IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

Host Name:
Domain Name:
Default Gateway:

(only if routed network)
I/O Address:
Interrupt:
Ethernet Address:

General Network Parameter Record
(default is 4369)

Socket Port:

....................................................................................................................
Host Computer General Network Parameter Record
Host Computer:
IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

Host Name:
Domain Name:
Default Gateway:

(only if routed network)
I/O Address:
Interrupt:
Ethernet Address:

....................................................................................................................
Host Computer:
IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

Host Name:
Domain Name:
Default Gateway:

(only if routed network)
I/O Address:
Interrupt:
Ethernet Address:

Fluke Netdaq 2640A Users Manual Ruckus Wireless™ SmartCell Insight™ Release Notes, V. 3.0.0

2645A to the manual b8c68817-6844-43b5-8292-da8e463bb405

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation